Table of Contents Pdf

Home

1. e rta 3200 training book Page 7 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 25 Press DETECTR H to enter the Detector averaging menu 15 OCT 26 19 27 NORMAL Lea MIN MRK SEL DISPLAY note G 8 BEBE ERPUHEHT IAL 1 5 Ineut 1 LIHEBR 1Hz 1B8kHz RESET 15 OCT 94 205075 Bd FRED FA A I S BBanHz HARA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 95 2 71 8 e L TACH 8 8 SPEED B a FA AAA Z o0mM 1 FB Bd dotted crsr IHITIHL ROOMS usREPHM STHT MHs Spec F TRIG SETUP FILES AUT STE 26 Within the Detector menu choose AV TIME H to modify the integration time 15 OCT 295 1095 42 LIH 5 LIH F EsF E SFDO H COUHT Z COUHT F AL TIM DET 20 16 49 LIN S LINR EMP EXPO N COUNT B dia ZB dede QE m o V VEVIR dE Um Um ee EP IRI DN RO RR d r by RC Ec j ro m we e A dE de ARO UN dr dp ER DAR Nes S R UE EXF HEHT T DL 1 neut 1 LINEAR iHz 1BkHz ET 15 OCT 94 2065075 B 44 III A ea Re a R T R HET EIA aS d t T x ARARAH H4HH 00 1 of 1 HL r errenneren COE a l TACH 8 8 SPEED H H db dotted crsr IHITIHL 27 Press 1 64 A to select the fastest exponential detector inte gration time p m oO DI m DE De DE M M k Dm TANE L hb E TM DLE Dm DR I 7x m Ln m E m mn r4 a hi ad A GAGA ZB WORT as Mey A ea O SECR at amy V xe EXPONENTIAL 1
2. e rta 3200 training book Page 3 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL LD MICROPHONE SENSITIVITY The quieter the sound level the more sensitive the microphone must be Conversely the louder the sound level the less sensitive the microphone need be Applications requiring measurements of very small sound levels such as outdoor night measurements quiet products or quiet rooms demand the use of a sensitive microphone Higher sensitivity on a microphone is acheived by using a looser diaphragm In general larger diameter microphones are more sensitive than smaller microphones Basic Acoustics FREE FIELD MICROPHONE Measuring in a free field Testing to IEC 651 standards Europe amp Japan Noise source is clearly identifiable Microphone pointed at the noise source Free field compensates for disturbances in sound filed SR TMM Basic Acoustics 4 3 e rta 3200 training book Page 4 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 4 4 RANDOM INCIDENCE Used when measuring in a diffuse field Use when testing to ANSI 1 4 standards Used when location of noise source is unknown Responds uniformly to sounds arriving from all angles at the same time Characteristics very similar to a pressure microphone Basic Acoustics RANDOM INCIDENCE MICROPHONE If random incidence micr
3. e rta 3200 training book Page 2 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL CROSS D INTENSITY E This key places the analyzer in a cross channel mode for perform ing Autospectrum Cross spectrum Transfer functions and Co herence measurements This implies a cross channel measurement between channel 1 and channel 2 optional This key places the analyzer in the intensity mode for performing intensity sound power and quality measurements This mode of operation is discussed in detail later in this manual Selection of Units and Calibration In the Units menu you can select either dBuv SPL or define your own units of calibration To select a units type or define a new unit of calibration 1 Press the UNITS F key from the System menu 13 OCT 81 55 43 Chanls STHHDRED CROSS IHTEHSE V UNITS FILTER CLASS 267 81 58 43 AChanls STRNDRD CROSS INTEN UNITS Hate SPL B imd 13H KE MESI ege Vel w ms abso aU VS xw ae Sp ee a eee oU qe WO Nel aa dU EDO B e bo we eg EXPOHENTIAL 1 A DIRECT LINEAR Z2H 2BHEHz RESET 19 OCT 94 01 55 10 1145 Ll See ls FILTER 14 vr A Hz L Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d A 73 7 9H p c A p 1 er PHOHS as Poe ac TACH H H SPEED B amp 25 1 Hz SGG Hz TG GLC HZ dotted_ crar ABCD 1 0 HOISE IHFUT clock COLOR ETUF FILES RESETS 2 Press the name B key to assign a Units name to an unde fined Units key 1
4. Ar FRER 43 1254Hz ESRB Transfer Function Hl D 2 1 d 5 8686 E 41 JE O NON HHT Baze Fre ujmnca QG s 1 TWST td zB Chz pa sen un TRCH o a SPEED 0 6 INITIAL RLTERN BUNOR 1446 Br TRIG SETUP FILES A OSTR 45 You are viewing the real portion of the transfer function To Y view the imaginary part press ALTERN I ar ded z2 1d io4 A SPECT C SPECT A FER COMER TIME DISPLAY nate DETECTR IMAG i a LEF E JE AN NE A TA OE ROSA VE EET ER COUNT MANUAL ACCEPT 1 Dual LINEAR 1Hz 16kHz i STOP Hr JAN 98 22 84 38 EHi FREQ H3 1258Hz ESHH 1 Transfer Function Hl 0 2 d 1 881 E 88 IMAGINARY JE EE i Z 2s va ae See Sac ee dal Maca ee A ve AC z ee cus A ua V Gee v AAA O OR O Baze Freauer4 D OBR 1 TWST td zh Chz Ba im Wo R R ces DAL ARCU deco WOES UU RUE de a OR A Rc XL Oe RE e a TRCH g H SPEED g H INITIAL TBUHORM por TPE fus SETUP FILES R lOSTE 10 27 e rta 3200 training book Page 28 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 46 Press COHER D to display the coherence function The T coherence function is a measure of signal to noise ratio and is D an indicator of the quality of the measurement A good coherent measurement has a value at or near one all the way across the frequencies of interest except at anti reso nances TIME DISPLAY note DETE TE Br JAH 22 19 48 A 1 48 y LEF HA ka
5. e rta 3200 training book Page 7 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL V SUM J This key give you the vector sum which displays the square root of the sum of the squares between channel 1 and channel 2 spec trum crucis 23130141 1 1 143 SUM SETUSER note Multi Hate SFL 2 3500 a r gR Su os Gan can sad cae ED Z k Gar qe HR A te ade ZR sas fe Za a Jak ARP 4 fec Y Qo Sah Yeas Gap ca AC RR T Jay Sages idis A EXPONENT IAL 1 8 Dual LIHEAR z5BHz Zz kHz STOP 23 FEB 95 23 22 44 TH r PCM o A A a ee key E Seed FILTER 14 25 Q Hz Leo qe anne E abs ea eee r SO ak ce c mE DIFF Ph 84 7 Sn 22 22 REM E TACH H B SPEED B A H Hz 5 dotted crar DOOFUS Dia WGT EMOFF 3 Press the Dig Wgt I key to access the weighting menu See 23130141 1 1 143 sur SETUSER note Multi Hote SPL Z 1301 at EAA REE TEA R ah ince hn take a te cate gee aR any Cass ong Seb dat neiges we EXPOHENTIAL 178 ual LINEAR zHHz zB kHz 23 FEE 98 23 22 44 A Hz 3 Channel Z of Z HORMAL d i ri DIFF Ph 54 7 Sns 22 22 TACH Ha SPEED Bg d dotted crar EWH REM 4 Press one of the following keys to select the desired display weighting e 16 FEB 19 35 84 Zw FREE Zu DIFF ee SFL 1 92758 aa r WII ov SEZ car a ta a OM Septet Jet MR RET os Gon Ta TERRIER EXPOHENTIAL 178 Dual LINEAR ZBHHz ZzB kHz 1 STOP 16 FEB 98 12 08 33 TH r wei tt Se oa tae ete RR ca LE E PC a
6. 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Why Use Acoustic Intensity Does not require a special test space e Measurements not typically affected by steady and station ary sources e Easy conversion to sound power e Yields location of sound sources e Provides a means to rank sound sources The Acoustic Intensity Probe The Acoustic Intensity probe consists of two phase matched microphones hardware to fix the microphones in the proper ori entation signal conditioning and microphone polarization volt age The microphones are kept at a fix distance apart by means of a spacer Typical microphone orientation is face to face The probe is directional A signal in the front of the probe will register as positive intensity while a signal at the back of the probe yields negative intensity A signal at 90 degrees will result in Zero intensity e rta 3200 training book Page 9 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Intensity Probe Spacer Selection The probe spacer and the microphone diameter will determine the frequency range for the intensity measurement Ao OO ee ol 1 Cc AA ICAA jc TET OA C OO O CCS o N UICE AAA ACA AAC ACACIA NOICS NNNM m T pra cce x pa x mnm paa a c a Ta Ma la poc GOGO O CO C C tt i I KN He AA CACA c c NN A ONES N HT N C L L L AE o 7 DEN coud TRAN Rocke PRO O NOH R OOA S LLL HCH CHO LLL CC A DAA C a HCS N
7. nEut 1 LINEAR 1Hz 16kHz i 15 OCT 94 28 87 35 44 O O EET EE Ha GHz H4HH i VE 1 of 1 AL hehehe j o ROTT l l LE LN c ag dotted crzr INITIAL 4 S 16 32 e4 125 236 312 EXIT 28 Press EXIT to return to the STAND analysis menu Setting the byTACH Autostore parameters 1 As mentioned earlier you will be utilizing the Autostore byTach feature for this test Press AUTOSTR P to enter the autostore menu 15 OCT 21 45 46 NORMAL Les MIN Me SEL DISPLAY note DETECTR G B eaa ZE RRR OE ee RD we RD EC ED UE A A A UE Um VES E A d r dno voln SE Ta dy a cece zl EXF HEHT HL 1 64 bTACH Input 1 LINEAR 1Hz 18kHz RESET 15 OCT 94 28 11 27 FRED A AAGAHz H4AA d A ae aureis ed ace a te alae ae yao qu Da E Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 95 2 71 8 ED N SA RA A r AE TRR RA A A AA R RAEN tee a eee oe Loc TACH d d SPEED EE E A E TO TOV O RO uma HA AAA Z 0H 1 FE Bd dytted CESE IHITIHL ROOMS usREPHM STHT fs Spec F TRIG SETUP FILEX AUTOSTR 12 7 e rta 3200 training book Page 8 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 2 To activate bv LACH autostore press by TACH J Z 15 BEL 21 46 29 OFF ESTIME delta endstor nate J G B ABBA ZE E ION Sn cul E EXPOWEWT IAL 1 Ad Ingut 1 LINEAR 1Hdz 16kHz RESET 15 OCT 94 28 11 27 44 A a ae RR ee ITE FREQ AeA ARRAHZ H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 95 2 E 71 9 LOC TACH 8 8
8. Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d Z3 a JA r SR O A A L Ee ie ce ees Ke car Say E VN NEO S A ONEN NO EE BIFF Fhz nz E Sn Z 43 LU ee ee eee eee eee ee ML M osi M i 100line 2601 ine 410111 mH IHC BASE Bd 4 The next item to establish is the freguency range or analysis baseband This is the maximum freguency of interest for the test item Press BASE Bd O to access the baseband options 15115 23411234 lsloct 1 3oct lona short reverse SPL B BEBE at n c pL Llc t EXF HEHT T DL 1 E Input 1 LINEAR 258Hz zBakHz RESET 2 JAM 58 23 38 41 70 Da a cal Gap cats dat ae AS O cup EE e see A e ORE CN 08287 Ves Y dE FILTER 16 de H Hz L E Channel 1 LE 1 OR m r 56 Be aay ar uh O E E BIFF Ph 52 8 Sn 2 43 REM TACH 6 4 SPEED H H SEHE acie toe dod decode dcdob Sedi e EU e S AAA AAA died a I zo Hz 838 Hz i zH BEHz k FF INITIAL 1901 1ne 2991 1ne 4Bbline Saline FFTZO0M WINDOW BASE Ey 7 3 e rta 3200 training book Page 4 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 5 Within the baseband menu you will be prompted in the T upper right hand corner of the screen to select UPPER D BAND EDGE frequency Press 2 5kHz D 18 MBR 16 19 00 20kHz 18kHz SkHz Gx oe 6 9090 1 SPL ag o E a we eee VITIS LL A A EXPOHEHTIAL 18 Inrut 1 LIHEHE 28Hz 26kHz RESET 18 MAR 94 16 18 18 TE A a A Se OEIL a a da a Gd ee OU JE a aa RE GEL a o Nee FREQ Ae mn
9. JE L mr m m T bi m x T m SPL B BEBE EIS ee EXPOHEHT IAL 1 2 i Dual LINEAR ZzHHz zB kHz O La RESET 12 OCT 34 13 43 27 70 A RRR R RR NR RR NR R RN NNN R NR RR NR AA NR R ah a IRR a FREQ Ae AARAHZ Hel Auto zpectrur D 1 15 3 a s B E A A A A AR A SITAS Baze Fresuenc y Ae AE a TACH H B SPEED B B AA dad 00m 1 I246 2758 E A dotted crar IHITIHL 11 After selecting the desired exponential window leave the EXIT FILTER menu by choosing EXIT Then press INPUT K K within the SYSTEM menu d U pi dz sg4 Chanls STHHDED CROSS IHTEHSY UNITS FILTER CLASS SPL B GRE I6 r PUT ITI EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 Dual LIMEHR 258Hz zBakHz RESET Hr JAW 92 Al 39 25 70 We 6 I OR AS a UAR RR R RR RR R K RR A AA ON dw RO K A RAR me U 8 FILTER 14 75 8 Hz sa A Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL 56 E THT TEE Phe 52 E Sd 3 43 FEM TACH BH SPEED EA 385 GUERRE Nah a A O NA V a WOW ine Que ce Pee ee ge A ate m E k m E z IHITIHL clack COLOR MLS FILES RESETS 10 19 e rta 3200 training book Page 20 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 12 Next select a high and low pass filter typically in a modal i test one would choose 1 10K M Choose 1 10K M press M CH2 hardkey and repeat step 12 ene A ER PU ira 1551 SPL 6 0000 EE x Works WOW ee ao de KON UR X T oe S N N Dec A GS AAA AY RR N EXPOHENTIAL 148 Dual LIH
10. EXIT l The delta is the parameter that establishes how often a spec trum is to be captured you will choose a delta that matches the averaging time that you previously established when you selected the linear repeat detector Thus you will use 05 seconds 13 Press delta C S gt a gp ISSS OFE bere GET een rte SPL A aad TH dE I IP a c2 Pl o z A LINEAR FEFEHT A 9500 TIME Dual LINEAR 2BHz l8kHz RESET 26 FEE 98 13 31 27 ah r a FILTER 14 25 Aa Hz a4 Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL 8 2 E _ 23 8 AB EFE RR tenes ince cemento SCR eos GUNT NONI EE OE a RSG sies emis Seb ONUS qi edd DIFF Fhz 28 1 Ens dd REM TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 6 eee Y S ROOMS b 43THCH TACHSET F TRIG FILES 14 Type in a delta value of 05 seconds as shown below 28 FEB 155859 r JT LIHEHFE FEFEHT B ASAA bTIME Dual LINEAR ZBHz 18kHz RESET 26 FEE 93 13 31 27 JA r won mom on m om n mo 3 NON RO Ro nom m sas n om ho 3 O3 23 o3 s o m n m mo n m 9 o 9 o3 m gn nm n n9 FILTER 14 25 4 Hz Sri 1 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL i g B 23 8 JA r ON NI gn m n n BIFF Fh 2 1 n dd REM p l TACH 8 8 SPEED 6 4 dotted crear ROOMS 15 Press EXIT to enter this Autostore delta time EXIT Now that the Autostore measurement parameters are estab lished let s review what will happen during the measurement You will drive the room with pink noise until it is excited at all of the frequencies of interest You will then begin the Aut
11. e rta 3200 training book Pagei Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM Table of Contents Chapter1 Introduction to LD Real Time Analyzers RIAS 1 1 AIN ZSE a A 1 2 Mart Meni sak OH 1 4 nel ctinova display parameter nario 1 4 Display Wer BUDg sas 1 5 Annotation of a Measurement sse eee eee eee 1 9 Selection ol Detecci n 1 10 Special Meastre e sa o 1 12 ODS CU AN A nen PA 1 12 Storage and Recall of instrument setups esse eee eee eee eee 1 15 IST Re eiii 1 18 AMOSO Dy TITIO das ob ale o a 1 27 Recalline amndXULOSDOEO verear ovato tds deda n k utekla tu dn 1 29 Waterfall display of Autostored Records 1 31 Block Averaging of Autostored Spectra eee 1 33 Chapter2 System Menu aa 2 1 Operation Laa ius etia ad 2 1 Selection of Units and Calibration sese sese eee 2 2 Calibration based on a Reference Signal 2 4 Calibration based on a Transducer Sensitivity Value 2 5 Selection of Filter Type Octave Fractional Octave and FFT 2 5 I C C ommiuniedllOllS sarna ia 2 10 TO DOE controlada os is O 2 11 Key A and Key B control2 11 Beeper ing A r 2 12 Operation of the Noise and Signal Generator Opt 10 amp Opt 11 2 13 Option 10 Noise Generator msi 2 13 e E e rta 3200 training book Page ii
12. A NA A R N SFL B B 106 r ANA EXPOHENTIAL 1 Dual LINEAR 2B8Hz 1BkHz RESET 26 FEE 98 1H 4r 4 amp ea r ROK aR R OOA ONO 7277211115121 127171171111 2727111177 FILTER Hld 25 8 Hz Les Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 34 4 a 49 2 AH o A ANE EA I BIFF Fhz 65 9 Ens 6 85 REM lt 7 l TACH a d SPEED 4 6 25 0 GET O A a E a dotted crar IHITIRL SINGLE DUAL BUA LCD SINGLE I Single data display window DUAL J Two data display windows QUAD K Four data display windows LCD L This will display a reproduction of the display on the analyzer 2 25 e rta 3200 training book Page 26 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 4 Press the OFF A key when finished using the external mon Q 1tor A eal 165 5 25 27 FF 6462358 EdBxd450 Spesa SPL B ABBA 148 r K AT TT RT R R N A E K ET E AR RT 8 6 RT RC TK co RT oa VEI oc Rol ee DESCR DT A EXF HEHT IHL 1 Dual LIHEHE EHz 18EHz RESET ZB FEE 55 16 47 46 ai r a veze a Malena Ca Aid Cam UE ten me cana Mus EXE ERE A ORB AE IRE s V UT Nera ROB TR R FE VESPA aa hay gates n FILTER 14 75 8 Hz Leo rte 1 uS uo NN DIFF Ph 65 9 Sn 6 85 REM TACH d d SPEED a El 2 z z E z L dotted crar INITIAL SIHGLE DUAL BUA LCD 5 Press the EXIT hardkey to return to the SYSTEM Menu EXIT Resets You can reset data and setups stored in the internal memory of the analyzer To reset data or setups 1 Pres
13. I e ro dl z0 BBE EE Kok ko X OW a a X cw K a X a eae a N LIHEHE INGLE za EE Input 1 LINEAR iHz i amp BkHz STOP G3 JAH 92 06 41 13 r z a i o No E T FFEL He Eb Hz HSHH Channel 1 of 1 NORMAL s 46 3 E 34 9 5 o k P Ue ee e REM TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 4 115 RRR e RR R E nde o D ko td N NERA du EXE By do BB E AL s solid crese IHITIRL uncdet under undef undet 17 At the Enter setup name prompt type in VIB1CH or EXIT whatever label you like Then press EXIT 05 JAM 80 47 25 A Bob l p E i Enter e and name dicen ZB DEE Eo o O O EE EET letra E ode oe ERI LIHE ARG Input 1 LINEAR iHz i amp BkHz STOP G3 JON 92 pD 41 12 FE PA cr 111711 700 T FRE HE ARARAHZ HSHH Channel 1 of 1 NORMAL s 46 3 E 34 5 5 o A Ue de e cu O AAA 1A MAR O TACH 8 0 SPEED 8 8 BB E G solid crsr INITIAL I J K L H H 0 F 18 Next we need to store the current active setup to the VIB1 CH K setup key Press STORE E then VIB1CH K K gt BOOT note AAA HEAR SINGLE HEHE Fut 1 LINEAR 1Hz iBkHz JAM 35 41 1 He A g Hz HAA nnel 1 of MAL B B8 SPEED B B solid crzr under under under Under The vibration setup is now stored to the VIB1CH K key This setup can be activated at any time by pressing this soft key from within the SETUP menu 7 21 e rta 3200 training book Page 22 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL
14. under under INITIAL M SEC under 3 Apply a known excitation level say from a microphone cali brator to the transducer in this case a microphone 4 Press the R S hardkey to run the analyzer RESET R S 5 Move the cursor to the frequency of excitation by using the left or right arrow keys Press the level H key 12 EFE 16 25 39 SLOPE name SAME E UMIT Hoize F ml cal U cal level SPL zz 4668 115 A O O A V cay N Gee aan 8 4200 Jaka v ule E ERXF HEHT HL 1 8 Dual LIHEHE 2BHz 26k Hz RUH 13 FEE 38 16 25 16 at B hose xe Kok es SS Caec UE OE CE OR dn XS A cC ee x FILTER 24 254 Hz L ve ea 1 ee oe r 7A za v Ta A hoja da op on DIFF Ph 92 6 Sn 22 61 sau TACH Ha SPEED B d H Hz Eod Hz z datted crar IHITIHL F SPL 1l ZEC under under under Under The message Enter Level XXX will appear on the right side of the display prompting you to enter the known excitation level via the numeric keypad For a LarsoneDavis Model CAL250 calibrator the level will be 114 0dB 19 FEB 16 26 25 ore c s o os ee Gh eles Uh body TERT EMT 114 2 Goi A e Doe Sees dep duced dede b ob iP ne oh aed EXPOHEHTIBL 1 3 Dual iS DEE zHHz zBkHz RUH FEE 38 16 25 16 at WOW cxx x ow X Xo NBC ode A KU Des Xo FILTER 24 z756 Hz Leo Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 166 48 H Bis TH fats at Ow cxx cx FEME ERRE Bs Am DEACON ah M Dio HN DIFF Fhz a7 E Sn 38 08 FEM TACH H H SPEED B d SH OT 5 E O z dotted crar
15. 10 BkHz Zz A dotted_ crar 566 Hz AITEST S gt J0E SPART S gt AREA S gt EbIT C1 F4 2 Cz F 2 FSF On the display you will see the total sound power spectra of the specified job part and area 13 IHH 98 amp BBg 42 41 315 Hz Ls3 1 d 13 8mm 161 tristem e amp 9tdBrl 25 8 Hz 566 Hz 10 BkHz Zz A dotted crar HITEST SJOB S FART S AFEA S EDIT CitF4 2 Czx Fd z F3 FZ 11 31 e rta 3200 training book Page 32 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 11 32 e rta 3200 training book Page 1 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM Autostore by TACH oskPM Display and Order Tracking The Model 3200 has the capability to acguire data as a function of RPM speed utilizing the built in tachometer input feature This is very useful when measuring vibration or noise from a device that has a variable operating speed such as a turbine transmission etc For this exercise you will explore the vsRPM features of the 3200 by making vibration measurements on plate that is attached to a dc motor As the motor runs up or increases in te RPM the vibration frequencies of the plate will also shift ex upward as a function of speed You will measure the vibration using an accelerometer although other transducers could be used for this test as well The TACH INPUT of the 3200 is designed to be used with a tachometer tha
16. 5H Hz L 3 Channel 1 of 2 M RMBHL lt A 56 6 AB O le o PHOHSS Toe 1 adt TACH Ha SPEED B d 54 H ob D Hz HZ doatted crar IHITIHL KOH usEPH STHT Hx Spee E TEIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 2 Press one of the following keys to select the desired display SUM SETUSER note Multi Wis I a d 25 DO er ou nrc 2 0 m A E Hz Z E H a H 45 5 DIFF Ph 84 57 5n gt TACH A H SPEED 8 8 dotter crar EWHORH zu m C T Ga Tuna E z B DUUE US DiS WaT WW Sun This key permits you to view a displayed spectrum that was tak en in 1 3 octave in 1 1 octave This will sum the 13 bands into groups of three to produce the spectrum having 1 1 octave band widths This key will return you to a 1 3 octave bandwidth from a 1 1 octave bandwidth If the measurement was taken in a 1 1 octave bandwidth you may not view it in 1 3 octave bandwidth The 1 1 A or 1 3 B will not appear in the menu This key controls the digital readout of the broadband levels A weighting or Linear Summation shown on the right side of the spectrum by the two vertical bars The actual numeric readout for 1 5 e rta 3200 training book Page 6 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL these vertical bars is identified by A for A weighting and for linear summation shown below Ld c E LM ZR GIS E O TH NU B zziii SH rr n nr os s PR
17. E Hz 1 FESET 1 HE 94 17 11 TE lo EE dE a we A AA eR A ES VELLE vee ee CE DR Joli EL a FEQ AA HARAH HSHH Channel of 1 NORMAL d 15 3 12 68 SN ERES TACH H H SPEED EA HA AAA Z o0m I 2500 05606 Z A dotted crar UIEi dE el SFL Ej Under Under undet unde Under Calibration Calibration values of the accelerometer or any other transducer can be entered in several ways in the RTA The easiest way is to enter the sensitivity or calibration value directly from the cali bration paperwork that came with the transducer In the case of an accelerometer this may be a certain number of millivolts per g mV g e rta 3200 training book Page 9 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 1 If the number was 10 mV g you would enter this by first V pressing mV cal F SAFE ee oO ve en G A GAGA ae ose Ade A A a 17017071 7012520110007 1700051 EXPONENTIAL 1 8 InFut 1 LINEHE 1Hz 1GkHz RESET 18 MAR 94 17 11 71 TER N N cc TM FREQ DD ARRAHZ HS8HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 15 3 B 12 8 zu TACH BH SPEED ALA FA HAHA z H I 25068 0060 Z A datted crar UIEi dE oU SPL G under undet undef under Under 2 Atthe Enter mV unit prompt type in 1 000 E 01 using the numeric keys on the RTA keypad use the Shift key then 44 JI key to enter a as II 3 54 18 Enter nusuni 1 888 EA 5 B Baca ae E RRR TN FAO EE SEIN
18. Hi OCT 16 11 38 create RECORDS T d Press the Files O key found in either the Main Menu or the System Menu Place a 3 5 inch floppy disk drive located in the back of the analyzer Select the desired file to be trans ferred into the analyzer memory by using the T E or 4 M keys Press the mem L key Bi OCT 16 12 47 create RECORD T disk O Format Memoria Used 2563568 Disk Used 756236 enora Free 222725 Disk Free 674754 Ey gt HS DISK CHTE TIME DATE TIME LM MEMORY 7 delete rename y delete rename The disk drive will activate and the following sequence of messages will appear on the upper right side of the display A Copying file to memory B Copy done The transferred file name will appear on the section of the display labeled MEMORY indicating that the file has been transferred to the internal memory of the analyzer T Format isk Alt used 256624 Bs SES S eno Fee MEMORY 13 lem DISE DATE TIME MEMORY delete rename men delete rename 5 Press the EXIT key to return from the analyzer menu e rta 3200 training book Page 27 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Autostore by time Before beginning an autostore operation you should select a data file in which you want the autostore data record to be stored To select the desired file refer to the previous section titled FILE operation 1 Press the AUTOSTR P
19. M Tm T Zz ri iu m H Tm c m ETS E HB TH OCIO TT A O E E TT IIT LINEAR SINGLE 24 ARR InFut 1 LIHEHE 1Hz 1BkHz RESET A3 JAN 98 995 3 55 2 3 54 E AEO ea fu ap OL A a NAS NA E NE NR FREQ AR BARAHz HSHH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL a A B F S AB I TIL IIS SED TACH 9 9 SPEED B d pi solid crear IHITIHL dB vU SPL G FT75 under under under Under 7 19 e E e rta 3200 training book Page 20 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 12 Next type 000310 using the alpha keys on the keypad to enter the new sensitivity number Then press EXIT to enter the value Press EXIT 2 more times to return to the main menu EXIT 1 PL TCI LIHEHF 10 A BARF Input 1 LIHEBR 1Hz 1BkHz RESET 64 APE 24 18 55 62 FRED FA AAAAHzZ HSRH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL s 113 1 z 55 8 46 68 88 LOC 188 an ULB l l TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 4 solid crear If a shaker calibrator was used to calibrate the RTA the same method as was outlined earlier in this note would be used In this case when the level of the shaker signal is entered it must be in ft s For our pan a 1 0 8rms shaker was used Since 1 0 g equals 32 2 ft s this would be the calibra tor reference level Follow the procedure that was previously outlined to calibrate using the shaker calibrator entering 32 2 ft s in the level field Now the RTA is ready to analyze vib
20. MAME DATE TIME SIZE RECORDS HUTE HL Hrb 16 Hormal CHAT HSH a 216 HH LH IHITI PLANT 14 394 15 ntenzitu Es Time LOC 6 Press either the YES A or NO C key to answer the mes sage Pressing YES will recall the stored data record and ana lyzer configuration to the display leaving the FILES menu Pressing NO will return you to the FILES menu 7 Ifyou answered NO to the above step and no longer desire to manipulate the files press the EXIT key to return from the FILES menu Transferring stored files to a floppy disk 1 Press the Files O key found in either the Main Menu or the System Menu AS ool 15 58 31 WORMAL Lea MIH MAH SEL DISPLAY note DETE TE I i SPL 14 5588 TH Be ce MAS ae cae tae A Se te oe E a 8 EXPONENTIAL 15 Dual LINEAR 2AHz 26k Hz i STOP 63 OCT 34 15 38 42 k mo ee o m n ee O O EROR O xx FILTER 1 oh Hz L 3 Channel 1 of NORMAL d 18 9 E 66 7 3B L NN gt PHONS BZ 3 LOC al TACH d d SPEED B d z El Hz b BK Hz elek bed crar INITIAL ROOMS usREPM STHT Mx S5rPec F TFIG SETUF FILES AUTOSTA Place a 3 5 inch floppy disk into the disk drive located in the back of the analyzer e rta 3200 training book Page 25 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 2 Select the desired file to be transferred to the floppy disk by using the T C or Y K key es SER cresta E005 2 a ista an M
21. To access RC simply press RC C in the Rooms menu S a 9 ns HC HE EC surface volume ETEB C SFL SZ 2458 ai na LITT EXPOHENTIAL a Dual LIHEHR 1Hz 18kHz STOP zl FEB 98 H 2 TES IE 1117 O E A FILTER HR 1 5 ae Hz L Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL lt d 39 2 A 44 1 P o FC 37 H TACH 8 8 SPEED B a doatted crar SOURCE RECEIVE BACK GD CLR BG Hz LAL El HSTH 130 SETS 8 37 e rta 3200 training book Page 38 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 8 38 e rta 3200 training book Page 1 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM C HAPTER Statistics and Ln Calculations Statistical analysis can be performed with the analyzer in either the 1 1 or 1 3 octave frequency bandwidths 1 Press the STAT K key from the Main menu to access the sta tistics menu K LS E ari35 135 NORMAL Lea HIH HR SEL DISPLAY note DETECTE SPL B ei I6 r S R RU dat RP cac Sat A T N Duo E E e O RO cod ewe sn GT cat rs Sac ae T AAN EXF HEHT IHL 18 Ineut 1 LIHEBHE ZzEHz zB kHz RESET 19 FEE 38 Ari31 139 79 r R RT Ge Aer R Jal R N A E o RE SN ANA FILTER 14 75 8 Hz Leo Re 1 y MORTAL r NN DIFF Ph 54 4 Sn 2 72 REM SS l TACH 6 6 SPEED B le 25 6 Hz Boh Hz zA DL HZ dotted crar POPCO FU uskPhH STAT fs Spec F TFIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 2 Press the S Time B key to enter the desired time interva
22. d 33 3 gt But AB OEC etch OE EO OK US A OE JE CROCO UN N AE Sep ie R TR R dee RIO aw A TER VP A REM TACH 8 8 SPEED 8 0 HA pin o00m 1 Tanan BARA Z A dotted crar INITIAL For Rectangular Weighting on all channels Provides the finest frequency resolution but is often accompanied by excessive leak age of energy to the neighboring sidebands For Hanning Weighting on all channels Used with steady sig nals gives better frequency resolution For Flat Top Weighting on all channels Used with steady signals gives better amplitude accuracy in the passband For Zero Pad with without Bow Tie Correction on all channels For Impact Weighting on channel 1 Rectangular Weighting on Channel 2 Impact Weighting on channel 1 Exp 2 Weighting on channel 2 Impact Weighting on channel 1 Exp 4 Weighting on channel 2 Impact Weighting on channel 1 Exp 6 Weighting on channel 2 The Impact and Exponential Weighting windows are generally used for modal analysis applications e rta 3200 training book Page 9 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 4 Press the BASE Bd O key to select the Full Scale Frequency Baseband 13 FEB 17 03 19 ieloct 3 1 3act lona short reverse SPL 41 5688 TE odd OR RUN A ae N RRR K ome Lok wo je RRR RRR e CI O A De ine Cine et N N EXPOHEHTIAL 1 48 Input 1 LIHEBR 285Hz zBkHz STOP 15 FEE 35 17 03 03 REE KE Saal qeu cer DR SN CA TS RCE
23. zd FEE 14 82 85 LIH LIH R ERF BT ESF BT LIH Bu TIM 138 SFL B ABBA 118 EXPOHENTIAL 15 Inrut 1 A WEIGHT RESET 24 FEE 38 14 84 46 56 BG Hz Se d B aT DIFF Ph WGT Sns TACH 8 8 SPEED B B dotted crar r REM SIS ROOMS 4 A Oo e rta 3200 training book Page 17 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL E EXIT EH EXIT 12 Within this menu you need to choose a detector time inte grating time that would either simulate a slow or fast detec tor rate If one wishes to simulate a fast detector rate then 1 9 D seconds should be selected For a slow detector rate 1 G second is the choice For this example we will use a slow detector rate Press 1 G 13 PEE 12 16 15 1 64 1732 1 16 1 8 1 4 1 2 CO 2 FL B ei 148 Sf NR R R RR T TDI UIT Ae A JO AA EZFOHEHTIEL 1 8 InFut 1 LINEAR ZzAHz bkHz RESET 19 FEE 95 14 33 13 ai r vL ELICIT xt Ma EE FILTER 14 75 8 Hz L MED E 1 ect eus NN DIFF Ph 65 7 Sm 5 94 ix l TACH 6 6 SPEED B A 25 Z z R z dotted crar POPCO 4 a 16 32 64 128 256 512 13 Press EXIT to return to the MAIN menu 14 During the measurement we will want to view the overall summation band for the Sound Pressure Measurement Press DISPLAYT F to enter the Display menu LEE 12 18 15 WORMAL Lea MIH MRK SEL DISPLAY note DETECTFE SFL B aiam 148 PORA E oo a o uscita E ci EXPOHENTIAL Input
24. 68 6 E Z5 Y TACH 2982 9 SPEED 4 4 HE S dotted crar DCHOTO ESTACH TACHSET F TRIG FILES z 2 Next you will increase the speed of the DCmotor until the autostored is triggered at 500 RPM Notice that TRIGGERED appears at the top corner of the display indicated that the byTACH autostore has begun 16 OCT 13 58 18 OFF ESTIME delta endstor mote FI EYTACH TRIGGERED G B 3200 ZE eR Ve ois no OK dir CR RO o Gy u Omo AR Ad U vlo ar i aie a Al tm n E OBDOBA A O Se cae ee eyes de DA e ExFOHEHT IAL 1 64 bTACH InFut 1 LINEAR 1Hz 1 kHz 1 RUH l T 94 13 58 13 i ma ARBBHz HAHA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL g 45 3 E 25 4 TACH 566 3 JSPEED 48 8 5 ist dotted crsr ESTACH TACHSET F TRIG FILES 3 As you continue to increase the speed of the DC motor spec tra will be stored in approximate 20 RPM increments until the speed reaches 3000 RPM At that point the autostore is complete and the data will be automatically stored Below is the final spectra acquired at 3000 RPM 16 Bd 14 37 35 W Fall B AWE B MHxS visEPHM KEEF Hote 117 7868 EXPONENT IAL 164 ami 1 LIHEAP iHz 1BkHz STOP 15 OCT 94 22 21 38 FEG AA ABRABHz H4AA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL 56 7 B 1 5 TRHCH 38685 8 SPEED 4 4 trecall data H Freu A Nest 12 14 e rta 3200 training book Page 15 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANU
25. CHRHHEL FRE As with the vsRPM autostore test notice that the display is gt currently viewing 6 different freguencies from the acceler ometer as they changed in amplitude during the dc motor run up The freguencies that are currently displayed are shown on the right of the display Notice also that each of the 6 traces are labeled on the display 5 Press CURSOR to activate the dotted cursor Push the right CURSOR arrow hardkey to move the cursor along the RPM axis The amplitudes of the frequencies at each RPM are shown at the right 6 When you are finished viewing the data press STORE to S store the measurement record into the DCMOTOR file STORE Notice the message STORE vsRPM Trace 1 appears at the top right corner of the display indicating that the data have been archived 16 D 18 16 31 SLOFE Hn LS note WIDTH Doa ca MIEL O quic EE E EM ls E STORE KEH frare 1 e 8 bl ER me AE ne dr EXPONENTIAL 1 64 7 e J InFut 1 LINEAR OP E CT 54 I II eh Ea a ho o a POLO Cc mm Li RH Un T a EII gt gala lalala Gn TH S ZUI I CCAM l CO TB GOAS TI A Ln ejm 2900 F CA l LA Pi MAA AA EPA UOCE CA pO Z Cie Tre n T T m Il T FN ee ma TI ra 1 Al 12 23 e E e rta 3200 training book Page 24 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Real time vsRPM Order Tracking 1 Now
26. Hotel HO EXP WINDOW LEF Gd Ele I U ausit ee ae e A A K Ae RON ces m COUNT SINGLE DIRECT LIHEBE 1 3 2kHz RESET 1l SEP 32 11 63 38 Fi NEL 00 2 INTE 141 FA BMI RSBH laiahted Time d 1 56H E 82 REAL HAN H US N ides T prs iey a p oa en Base Fresyency LOC TACH B B 5PEED 4 4 FA HHHH zlte 1 319 68753 E A datted crar HLTERH BWHORM Pa gt R ALIAS T TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTA 11 nr 11 47 51 A SPECT C SPECT FER COHER TIME DISPLAY note DETECTE MAG Le G5 LEF ad COUNT gt IGL E 4 DIRECT LIHEHFE 1 3 2kHz ESE 11 SEP 22 1 52 53 EG 242 1815Hz FSAA Transfer Function Hl D 2 H MAGHITUBE 70 E Base Freauency PE TACH d d SPEED B dB 3 Hl datted crear MISC HLTERH BlWwHORM PER ALIA TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR Advantages Shakers normally provide more accurate results Actual test time is significantly reduced Shakers provide more energy to larger structures Shakers can be driven by a variety of signals sine swept sine random etc which provides flexibility Disadvantages Requires more equipment and setup time Shakers not generally transportable not convenient for field measurements Shaker systems tend to be expensive 10 11 e rta 3200 training book Page 12 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Shaker Test Schematic elastic cables V V amplifier stat O to channel 1 accelerometer to channe
27. RESET 19 OCT 94 81 58 18 116 rs Gu See Mero CEA ELE LL RC R R I K R RRR TE Nae cap nat SER EE FILTER 14 75 4 H Leo Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d A 4 7 AA PHOWS 238 5 aa TACH H a SPEED B n 5 E z dotted crar COLOR SETUP FILES FESETS INPUT clock 2 Select the desired spectral content by pressing the PINK M or WHITE N keys e 86 OCT 15 33 38 DH OFF ON RUN OFF RUN BURST l l SPL B aaaa 115 O a chy TC DS RE E RD LLLI k EXPOHEHTIAL 1 8 i Dual LIHEAR_ 1Hz 26kHz i RESET 66 OCT 94 15 2811 a cte Mes nah v cinco uie en ay ecd a dals di AAN pou dc seront dedic igo tae FILTER 24 254 Hz Les i Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL i 55 8 A 66 7 TH P sd A o a dy v A RO UR j AT zi Vieske kc RC AC ZC FH HS 07 5 Loc l TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 4 noaize HELA DELAY LEWEL PINK M Equal energy content per percentage bandwidth WHITE N Equal energy content per constant bandwidth 3 Press one of the following keys to select the mode of opera tion B6 OCT 15 33 38 ON OFF 0NRUN OFF RUN BURST I l SPL B ABBA 11H SE X ECKE TE wash ne Ge p tsp OBEHU bann fiis E foie EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 i Dual IHEBR iHz 2BkHz i RESET 66 OCT 94 15 28 17 an mox D Lic gere ss diario qu RA y o dena ds ca TEC UA as E TOS ED A ae ce FILTER 24 75A Hz Les Channel 1 af 2 HORMAL d S A e PHOMS 82 5 T TACH d d SPEED B E oH Hz ob A Hz D ik Hz noise HRA IHITIHL PINE WHITE DELAY LEWEL
28. TA we MEET T1221 TI FILTER H 1 ER Hz Les Channel 1 af 2 HORMAL d s A 34 7 UM A CT TTO ET PHOHS 5d 3 TACH 8 8 SPEED B amp dotted crar ILES z z IMITIAL b 4TRCH TACHSET F TRIG 1 27 e rta 3200 training book Page 28 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL The message DELTA TIME XXXXXX XXXX along with a flashing cursor will appear on the upper right side of the dis play The DELTA TIME indicates how often a spectra will be stored during a measurement Ad OCT Ari43 05 118 i LALLA SPL 2B o AU O EXPONENTIAL 18 TIME Dual LIHEHR 2AHz 26k Hz RESET 64 OCT 94 a7 48 1zZ B aem ecu aec eode um REDE Ses Sat AC umu a gt GE ELSE E Set BUE Je e RD ck Sk Sm ORO RI m DE Re he FILTER H 1 ME Hz Leo i Channel 1 ges UM r a Bobe seh ad e donde Poa Eee edd ac uo Pes adie PHOMS 54 3 l TACH H G SPEED 4 4 dotted crsr 4 Use the left and right arrows keys to navigate through the EXIT time displayed and enter the desired time interval by using the numeric keys on the analyzer and press the EXIT key 5 Press the endstor D key to set the desired run time period T of the measurement D B4 OCT 975 495 17 OFF byT IME delta endstor note KL BTrABi OFF buTINE delta endstor i SFL B ABBA 2B n Up EXPONENTIAL A BTIME Dual LINEAR 26Hz 28kHz RESET A4 OCT 94 aridar12 ra AE A E E ee a a a JE LA v FILTER
29. a Ej z E ROOMS DELETE 17 Press KEEP H to get back to the Noise menu and then press EXIT 23 FEE 1l 17 55 h Fall E ALF H MAH E l Ifi 148 r qe P N R S A A L R L O E STORE Har mal A i Hote FE IELE AGED LINEAR SIHGLE H H Dual LINEAR zBHHz zBWlkHz SKK ZA FEB 55 195 22 38 FIL 14 25 0 Hz Les S Channel 1 S z HOPAL r DIFF Ph 84 8 Sns 22 35 TACH 6 4 SPEED B il recall data REM ra a El m ROOMS DELETE 18 Recall the background spectrum by pushing the RECALL hard key and locating memory 7 Now push the KEEP H key to keep the spectra and return to the main menu 23 FEE 13 38 87 HORMAL Lea MIH HAs SEL DISPLAY note DETECTE 188 x RRR 0011070717101 1171799000101 N RRR 2101170701 Hate BACKGHE m a os H SF ag r O A O E E E ci Seo ae ae A LIHEAF SIHILE Dual HE E eB SR K Ac TEA A de a go ov eR ay i Eh a eh A E o A ar eds acta dci FILTER 14 25 4 Hz Les Channel 1 of Z HORMAL SE I I EEE m BIFF Ph 55 3 Sp 2 91 EM TACH 9 9 SPEED Ha E EE zx UE d eee us EFH STHT Mx S5rec F TRIG SETUP FILES HUTOZTE t00rMS ROOMS 8 31 e rta 3200 training book Page 32 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL EE n CLEAR RECALL E BE CLEAR X RECALL H 8 32 E 19 Return to the Rooms menu by pressing ROOMS Y Enter this background spectrum by pushing the SET gt L and BACK GD O keys Exit to the Ma
30. ai E R RRR RR E RRR RR R A RRR AO K R LR RLE O O AO FILTER 14 75 4 Hz Leo Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL sa E E S es O L E a EE Ph ges 5 FEH l TACH B A SPEED Aa 485 pros 999 H mH E L pora ics 14 Press the EXIT to enter the 20 second averaging time and EXIT SCREEN then press SYSTEM to return to the System Menu SYSTEM You are now ready to make a measurement you ll start with the source room sound pressure measurement Again using the pink noise generator of the 3200 with a speaker amplifier is the ideal way to make this measurement Place the speaker in a corner of the source room facing into the room Next put the microphone on a tripod in the room Turn on the pink noise generator of the RTA 15 To enable the noise generator first press SIG GEN J or ex Z NOISE J from the System menu ex J x Cr 18 03 44 Chanlz MEE STRHDRED CROSS INTENSY UNITS FILTER CLASS SPL 148 ER D a lu ll c lx LIHEHFE SIHILE za 1 Dual LINEAR 2B8Hz zBkHz RESET 23 FEE 98 1H El ai Jd EAR EIL OE ull FILTER 14 25 6 Hz L a Aca 1 Bd ere EB UU DIFF Ph 65 9 n2 6 85 REM TACH B B8 SPEED B a A Ek Hz datted crar IHFUT clock COLOR MLS FILES FESETS Pink noise is better to use for this type of testing since it provides constant energy for all of the 1 3 octave frequency bands 16 Press PINK J to select pink noise M ion 14 11 68 ON OFF ON RUHN UKE RUH ATT gt HTT i SFL 148 r PIX EC
31. i SPL 14 5588 TH E MN RN GN VO Ae e Bo oer Tw A EXPONENTIAL 18 Dual LIHEHR 2AHz 26k Hz l STOP 63 OCT 94 15 38 42 5A nit A zl s ra a A 9 09 0 20 ox oe A A e es AO ow ROSE ee ux FILTER 4 1 NE Hz Les Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL B 66 2 d z p AA PHOHS 82 3 TACH A H SPEED 4 8 Shik Hz COT AE H DEFAULT undef Under under undet undet undef undef Press the name B key to assign a name to one of the undef sofkeys that will be used to store the analyzer setup B3 OCT 15 48 35 name E SETUF STORE B00T note SL 1554835 name R SETUP STOR i SPL 14 5568 TH w De Oa TIT EXPONENTIAL 1 Dual LIHEHR 2AHz 26k Hz i STOP 63 OCT 94 15 38 42 54 vows a a O a is a e aa y a eo ux FILTER H 1 ME Hz L Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL i g B 66 2 toal On OV PHONES 62 2 Cor ok TACH 8 8 SPEED B amp HH dotted crsr x a z 1 El z IHITIHL under under under undet unde Under Under You will be prompted on the bottom of the screen to select one of the softkeys J P B3 OCT 15 41 13 380 i SPL 14 5568 TH CI A O O EN EA EXPONENTIAL 1 Dual LIHEBR 2BHz 2B8kHz e ER TE OCT 94 15 38 42 Bi ee bettie eee eam nne e RR ES FIL B A Z id 1 E HORMAL za A A A PHOHS 62 TACH 6 8 SPEED 4 4 Li Hk H S HZ ooo ooo H du G IHITIHL Under Under under undet undet Under Under L After pressing one of the softkeys J P enter the desired setup name Pres
32. lyzer and it s capabilities Topics that will be covered range from basic operations to advanced system setups for complex mea surements It is not intended to replace but to use in conjunction with the operators manual received with the analyzer The fol lowing graphic identifies the softkeys and hardkeys used in the keyboard operation of the LD 3200 SPL EXPOMENT a U RUH A ER d 21 3 AL Z Mx Spec F TRIG Throughout this manual the following conventions will be used to denote the keyboard operation of the LD 3200 Represent a HARDKEY function The HARDKEYS are the keys permanently labeled on the analyzer keyboard i e ON EXIT R S je e rta 3200 training book Page 2 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL BOLD A words Analyzer Setup Represent a SOFTKEY function where Bold represents the text that appears either on the top or the bottom of the LCD display and can change depending upon which menu you have selected and A identifies the key associated with the function OFF ON SCREEN SYSTEM 1 Attach the microphone preamp or whatever transducer you may have to the analyzer through an input card If more than one input card is installed Channel one is the card fur thest from the power supply module 2 Turn the analyzer on by pressing the ON key located on the upper left of the keyboard Make certain the Ma
33. 1 22 e rta 3200 training book Page 1 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM C HAPTER Room Acoustics Among the many built in capabilities of the Larsone Davis Real Time Analyzers a very important and useful tool is the Room Acoustics feature Acousticians that are involved in determining decay times of rooms theatres etc or in analyzing the absorp tive qualities of walls doors barriers or partitions will find the Room Acoustics capabilities of the RTA s to be very complete These types of measurements require only a single channel ana lyzer such as the Model 2800B Using a dual channel analyzer like the 2900B or 3200 can save time but is not necessary 8 1 e rta 3200 training book Page 2 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Sound Decay Measurements RT60 s Sound decay measurements are used to determine the sound absorbtion characteristics of a room This is also known as the reverberation time or the decay time RT60 defined an RT60 is the amount of time required for a room to absorb 60 decibels of sound pressure Example Some one excites a room with a gun blast or a balloon pop and the maximum sound pressure level reached is 115 dB RT60 is the amount of time it would take for the room to absorb the noise such that the sound pressure level reaches 55 dB 115 60 Typi cal values of reverberation
34. 2 Loc TACH 8 8 SPEED 6 6 J a x m i xcu R z z R z recall data IHITIHL DELETE A Freu A Mext recall Turn the knob to move through the autostored measure ment Each spectrum displayed by turning the knob is a time slice that correlates to the autostore delta rate set at the time of the measurement The last spectrum displayed will be the last autostore performed when the End Time was reached Press the vsTIME D key to view the stored spectrum vs time al 25 g0 44 W Fali B AUE Z RECHLL By Time KEEP 1 Hate TEST 1 i SPL HB 1888 2B ecu Beirut uM A qm na aa ie uno ir AR qu e X a Rer n qi der a Le eR Qi ap va zato ke Oe a d EXPONENTIAL 18 TIME Dual LINEAR 2B8Hz zBkHz i STOF 64 OCT 94 65 6625 ra M A E a PP RNA A RAS AN FILTER 1 NE Hz Les Channel 1 of 2 NORMAL d A 46 48 PHOWS 37 8 TACH 85 8 SPEED 4 4 S S recall data IHITIHL DELETE H Freu H Hext recall e rta 3200 training book Page 31 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 5 Press the DATA M key to assign the PREV and NEXT keys as frequency selectors which will permit you to scroll M through the frequency bands 12 FEB 11 26 08 RT amp B REPLACE AVERAGE Auto FE Auto HU note Hote UE T HD B 1688 ESF HEHTIHBL 1 38 Dual LIHEHmE 2BHz 26kHz RESET 12 FEB 38 16 45 15 DATA 32 1 66kHz_ L 3 Channel 1 af Z usTIME Ld 54 8 Td 1 5868 ETEH 7 3511 ct Z
35. 26 2 1 BZ 700 A 0770127117111 5 H far 1 266 HAG Ja 3man RPT Treba _ 442 PCMOTOR STATUS HIDE TACHSET B ORDER CAL FEH CHAHNE FRED 12 22 e rta 3200 training book Page 23 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Now as you sweep up the running speed of the dc motor you can watch as the selected frequencies change in ampli tude as you run up from 500 RPM to 3000 RPM 16 2 18 15 89 SLOPE alevel TAGBARS s SFHH LIDEO ARIS note WIDTH SOURCE IS TACH IHPUT 29 2060 ERP UHEHT IAL 1 64 Input 1 LIHEBR 1Hz l1B8kHz RUM 16 OCT 94 18 14 39 PEH LEVEL FREGBLEHC k l 37 8 l 12 500 2 Z 38 1 1 21 AAA 3 B3 33 7 1 ore JH 4 Bi 28 2 1 n BH 7 Ea 29 3 1 62 500 5 g 43 9 1 268 ama JB 3066 RPM 1573 crsr d d DCMOTOR STATUS HIDE TACHSET B ORDER CAL FEH CHAHHEL FRE 4 When the speed of the motor reaches 3000 RPM press R S to RESET halt the measurement The completed measurement appears R S below 16 DE 18 18 87 SLOPE pH LS note WIDTH SOURCE IS TACH INPUT EE 4 1688 iue E O qup UE A RA x LIE MELLE EXPOMENTIAL 1 64 jir d Input 1 LIHEBR 1Hz 18kHz Q STOP 16 OCT 94 18 15 44 PEH LEUEL C FREQUENCY k Hl 32 3 1 12 506 Z B2 36 8 1 Zo AEE e Pp mM PEN AA 3 3 1 5 1 37 506 4 Dd 33 3 1 28 BH LOC 365 8 4 1 62 500 Al A A A A TP amp B amp 28 4 1 246 AAA JB 36064 RPM 3841 crsr _ 796 DCMOTOR STATUS HIDE TACHSET B ORDER CAL FEH
36. 8 8 SPEED ALA z5 H Hz Sab Hz 8 B8EkHz datted crar ABCD 1 0 HOISE IHFUT clock COLOR SETUP FILES FESETS e rta 3200 training book Page 3 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 2 To configure the RTA for FFT narrowband analysis first W press FILTER G G EE 41 32 43 Chanls STAH E CROSS IHTEHS UNITS FILTER CLASS Hate 1 SPL B etm 138 CX A A A o llc LE EXF HEHT T DL 1 E 1 DIRECT LIHERR ZB zBbkHz RESET 19 OCT 94 61 59 16 115 A A X ML A ME eso FILTER 14 z IS Hz L 3 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d H 73 7 at CI XT ul ae eat PHOHS SS 5 EE E TACH He SPEED B El 25 4 Hz SGG Hz IA ARHz datted crar AECE I O HOTSE IHFLIT clock COLOR SETUP FILES RESETS 3 Within the filter menu notice that the keys on the top of the measurement display correspond to the full octave and 1 3 octave analysis features The keys on the bottom of the dis play relate to the FFT capabilities of the RTA Keys 100line I thru 800line L are used to select the resolution of the FFT 100 line 200 line 400 line or 800 line Select 800line L to choose 800 line resolution 92 8 23 41 48 17 loct loc L lona short reverse SPL EB BEBA aj r vn cane May cide euo EVEN CN EN ia Mer ve GAP cup Mat ser eva Cay hie cues as MSX Gur ucro H E wat al VE da DD Ede EN EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 Ineut 1 LIHEHE ZBHz 2b6kHz RESET AZ JAN 38 23 38 41 rar E A O A MR A fee Mas R um FILTER 16 de H Hz L
37. 8 8 SPEED BA datted crar 7 2 Press the A minus key to create the macro 9 1 e rta 3200 training book Page 2 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL The message Define MACRO I P will appear on the upper right side of the Display 23 FEB 19 34 16 CREATE 115 r rey ras r Bs a awh a stay ONV E US a due ret ata aen claim fata rA thy dave Trac tty R rd ho ad la ti E ecg Mains al ar no easyer ET Re c DEF IHE MACRO P SPL B ABBA at r aa PES S e wow aa a MRN HER O R a EA A aa RO Ru EXPOHENTIAL 1 48 i Dua 1 LIHEAR zHHz zB kHz RESET 23 FEE 92 19 33 12 4 B H TH DE LLE Tasha an s ML Sa Sev as ia a Sint an ae Gat e aac E E R he Soo at RR IB VY VO Loo Tectia meas Cae Sat S a Suntan vet Lir vad L Mau FILTER Hl z z L 3 1 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 3735 8 A 34 3 54 r accusa Wer M pako a R al et kan A N RE Sue acu car tr cen di wl Gee ALD N e N anr o Ger waa as tee RN BIFF Fh S78 n 7 435 REM c y TACH HLH SPEED A El 25 z z z t datted crar DUUE UZ 7 7 7 3 Press a letter I P to assign where the macro will be stored For this example press the letter K Alpha characters A P will appear across the top and bottom of the display To select the rest of the alpha characters press the Shift hardkey and Q Z will appear A flashing cursor will also appear in the upper right hand corner of the display after the message Ente
38. AH HutaTH Max 2 25 48 7 4 skl Ley 72 8 Pi 56 3 DV kdot ted crar REM A 1888 DOOFUS lthresh hthresh A Freu B Mext SOLID DOTTEB BOTH 6 Press the PREV and NEXT keys to display the response of each frequency band over time The run time of the autostore lt is shown on the x axis of the display E i a 17 26 05 ETE REPLACE AVERAGE Auto RE Auto Al note Hote LP L HD B 1858 aj ur rcx Ceca crx oe a Se EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 bTIME Dual LINEAR Z BHz 2Bk Hz La RESET 12 FEE 32 15 43 15 H Bk TH uM Oke Seca u ae Ca sd a cae ee n es Se a at Cade Aa A JM o aos A 32 1 5 Hz Leo Channel 1 of Z usTIME 54 5 Td 1 54 edd Ade a Es N o da O on A zo Baz lodos le ada FTAH Taali ct z A AutoTH Max M FEM o p k IS S a ac WOO ED ee d s N cT ER LL CM ae a ai ae p ta da Lea TZ PA SH A 10506 2 HHHH gotteg crar DUUE UZ lthresh hthresh A Prev H Hext CATA SOLID DOTTED BOTH 7 Press the EXIT hardkey to return to the RECALL menu te EXIT Waterfall display of Autostored Records The waterfall display function permits the seguential display of a series of individual spectra within a byTime type autostored record 1 Press the RECALL hardkey and press the A Prev N or CLEAR A Next O keys to select the desired autostored record to be REGALL displayed as a Waterfall 2 Press the W Fall A key to enter the Waterfall display menu O n OCT 23 954 54 W Fall E AWE E MAs vsTIN
39. Channel 1 Z NORMAL d a a EE nn O BIFF Ph 92 4 5n 57 465 FEM TACH H H SPEED B d datted crar ROOMS SOURCE RECEIVE BACK GD CLE EG 22 Recall the receive room spectrum by pressing the RECALL hard key and locating memory 9 Now push the KEEP H key to keep the spectrum and return to the Main menu KEEF Hate RECIEVE AVE SPL AGED ai r NA by nad Game O oD MR tar ZU G wae cM TES MAS a Suh arca arie cee MEA a VERE uar ree Sait ca RATEN zr E SIHGLE zu H al LIHEHE 28Hz 28k Hz RESET 23 FEE 98 10 22 38 FILTER 14 25 6 Hz L 3 Lhannel 1 eh Z HORMAL d A DIFF Ph 84 8 Sn 22 35 TACH BH SPEED B a recall data 23 FEB 14 84 21 W Fall B HUE B HB B SU LAB PO RECALL Normal REM DELETE ROOMS e rta 3200 training book Page 33 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 23 Return to the Rooms menu by pressing ROOMS Y and Y O enter this receive room spectrum by pressing SET L and L RECEIVE N mE 14 82 81 HC HE RC surface volume RTEA Bib Sona M deer apie ask beau ME NEU IUE FOOM DATA SET Hate dida EHNE o SPL AGED Yo SH r DPI R R acide ARA i N poor SLIDER zB mg N RESET 23 FEB 98 18 22 28 eh r erp yardas ctas NE EDENDUM A fa Seale Si Mave ay igo CHD sero at ve at FILTER 14 25 A Hz Le 3 Channel 1 z HORMAL d A DIFF Ph 84 8 Sn 22 35 TACH B B8 SPEED a a REM H Hz Bak Hz do
40. E 16 281 20 SChanls BLA STRHDRED CROSS INTENSY UNITS FILTER CLASS GG Era Gre died a Rh ona b b AS CA iss napa Dual LINEAR zBHz z kHz RESET 19 FEE 923 16 19 16 TH TI FILTER 14 Eis L Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 23 8 H 34 SH E aa A Zena a O AL RE E ON BIFF Fh 7 SFL n REM TACH 8 4 SPEED se o E A A datted crsrINITIAL 1 0 SIG GEM INPUT clock COLOR ML Press the EXIT hardkey to return to the System Menu 2 3 e rta 3200 training book Page 4 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Calibration based on a Reference Signal Before calibrating the analyzer verify that the exponential detec tor has been selected To calibrate the system based on a refer ence signal 1 Press the UNITS F key from the System menu F 2 Select either the SPL J key or one of the user defined keys K P to which the calibration level will be assigned o 16 18 57 SLOPE name SAME k UHITS Hoise F ml cal U cal level i SPL EB ma I6 r dis Ee ET Gian VET Ba AED SU CEU WA T O TTO TE NIE OT EC cat ABA Vo UE BA Sen Seg uos DEL TECTA M Ado vn GEE e ERXF HEHT HL 1 8 Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 26k Hz RESET 19 FEE 33 16 18 05 rar M S E ra ae ELR A A RR A N NAP RR a SM cae RR Se FILTER 14 25 Q Hz L Channel 1 s Z HORMAL H d 8 SA r ya k a io a RE A wy eR E Ne NR e A m CIFF Fh 52 8 Sn 7 45 i TACH H G SPEED B B dao under Under
41. E HS OCT 15 44 46 name SETUF STORE gt BOOT note OCT 15244146 name SETUP i SFL 14 5588 TH PA CENE his a RD ee ee d dov ee Ee RT R Ps ee V E a ea vd ee ee a de Be ou EXPONENTIAL s Dual LIHEAR zHHz zBHkHz STOP az OCT 94 15 38 42 54 A REM A O O O ae FILTER H 1 ER Hz Leo Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d E Ee 66 2 tal MR A PHOH 62 7 xm TACH H H SPEED EA z x z A HE Hz dotted crar IHITIHL undet under Under undet unde Under The message Push setup to store will appear on the upper right of the display H3 OCT 15 46 13 os 14 5568 SPL Pid PEL SHG Sh Chee a JOO dd Ch DED Sd S d dek en v dok d t de EXPONENT IAL 1 3 Dual LINEAR 28Hz zBkHz PIER rua 94 15 38 42 Eid teen umb eee eta FIL i Hz L 3 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL i d 15 7 ES 66 2 za N L gt Ln PHONES 52 2 ESE al TACH 5 84 SPEED B d s z x z z datted crar IHITIAL under under under under under 5 Press the labeled softkey NOISE J to assign the current setup The current setup has now been assigned to the softkey and will remain assigned to this key until you modify it or you perform a reset setup explained later You may assign up to seven different setups and may reconfigure the analyzer at anytime to one of these user defined Setups Booting directly to a user defined setup If you desire to boot the analyzer directly to one of the user defined setups instead of the default setup assi
42. EXIT EXIT of the measurement is different change the value in sguare meters Then press EXIT to enter the new value 9 You are now ready to take the next measurement Press R S RESET amp to begin the measurement When the measurement is com R S STORE plete and you are satisfied with the Quality press STORE to store the data to memory Continue the sound power survey until you have acquired all of the area measurements for the current part and have stored them away You are now ready to go to the next part in the acoustic intensity job 10 Press part J to create the next part name POWER INTHSTY QUALITY SPL F WELOC DISPLAY note DETE TE a i ted I 2 Tu Tu R au L n TIL ae 4 HLH TOU ZT DL a Ln H 17 7 m m G Wm B E E B pig 1 LIMEAR ZAHz 1Gk Hz F 13 JAN 3923 mg 44 16 TEE 24 zob Hz LS IHTEHSI d 13 8mm 58 9 d 3 SH are RR a NN Swe AE DES A ON qus dem dup CS qun dr E NG ARN diea Riot F lJ z dE abl time i JOB gt TEZ FEM PART FE HT ad D ER E EN gal i WE E O c OFEO POINT 25 8 Hz Be 18 8kHz z A dotted crar HITEST job Crart area prste sp meter SETUP FILES AUTOSTE 11 27 e rta 3200 training book Page 28 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 11 After you have created the new part name press EXIT Con tinue the test modifying the area names and sizes as you EX
43. Either scan the probe about the measure ment surface in an orthogonal fashion or fix the probe at a single point orthogonal to the surface until the end of the averaging time is reached The first measurement is now complete 13 ant 0d 925 1 Z POWER INTHSTY QUALITY SPL F WELOC DISPLAY note DETE TE POW 58 6tdB 101 0000m JOB TEST REM l PART FRONT 25 8 Hz 588 Hz 18 8kHz Z A dotted crar HITEST jab Fart area PretrsP meter SETUP FILES AUTOSTA The 1 3 octave bands above the center line of the display denote positive acoustic intensity Bands below the center line indicate negative intensity On the right hand side of the screen the values for intensity and sound power are listed for each of the 1 3 octave bands for this particular spectra and for the overall summations If you would like to look at the power and intensity values at other specific frequencies 11 25 e rta 3200 training book Page 26 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 2 Press the CURSOR hard Key then press the left or right arrow key to move the cursor to the various 1 3 octave CURSOR bands 3 Press SPL D to view the averaged sound pressure level that T was measured D 13 Ta Bp dg2 12 POWER IHTHSTY QUALITY F UELOC DISPLAY note DETECTR 2B SER 28 SER HE 26H2 18kH2 JS marl 298 Hz Ls L d 13 nr B 1 25 8 Hz JHE Hz 1B8 BkHz z A dotted crar HITEST Job part are
44. FSET H SCHLE H OFSET FFTZ00M G rd 5609 uu P nM EXPOHEHT A TAL Inrut 1 LINERE 1Hz 1 kHz UH 14 APR 94 16 06 23 1 581 a a ada C k ta da A a Ue JE DEP a a e FEEL Bl z5HBHmnHz HS8HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 1 88E BB E 1 A4E AA 731 cr je o E L TACH 6 6 SPEED B amp E t x x dotted crsr IHITIHL C S TOR McWAIT McEEFT Battery SameREF 5SetEEF usREF Once you have returned the display to a logarithmic vertical scale notice that the calibration level is indeed 0 dB 14 N 16 83 12 SLM STAND 1 STHHD 2 CROSS INTENSY UNITS FILTER G E ROA E ERF HEHTI L Input 1 LINE STUP 14 HF EELE A EN I ET FER E Channe lni of d ALA E TACH H 4 SPEED Ae pi E DUZ Bel Siok dotted_ crar IHITIHL HOISE IHFUT clock COLOR SETUP FILES RESETS 15 Press R S to stop the measurement Now disconnect the transducer from the calibrator and then attach it to the test structure from which you wish to acquire vibration measure e rta 3200 training book Page 13 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Averaging EXIT ments Next let s change the horizontal scaling back to full scale Press SHIFT and H SCALE E to enter the horizontal scale menu AKIS Y AXIS U SCHLE U FSET SCALEJA OFSET EET ZOO G 7 9090 EXPONENTIAL 1 2 Ineut 1 LINERE iHz 1HBkHz STOP 14 APR 94 16 05 54 i 21 2566Hz HAA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL
45. I eee a ee HM A E g g SPEED B g H dotted cesr DUUE US Dig WET BWwHORM SETUSER F If you are making a measurement that requires a special weight ing curve you may create your own by pressing this key and en tering the desired weighting values For a detailed explanation of User curves see Chapter 10 of the operations manual seep maan da a am we mn Hotes SPL 2 9588 ad JI EXPOHENTIAL 18 Dual LINEAR zBHz zBkHz STOP 23 FEB 98 23 22 44 TH DORO NE Meer O ORO EE OE MENSES IERI Ed FILTER 14 25 4 Hz Les Channel Z of 2 HORMAL d a 84 7 sad aes e eae edt E R ar EE bd n DIFF Ph 84 7 Sn 22 22 Ge o NUN oD a P TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 6 d Hz dotted cese DOOFUS U SUM BuHMORM Multi H This key permits the analyzer to simultaneously display multiple channels The maximum number of channels displayed will be determined by the number of input channels configured in your analyzer i e if you analyzer is configured with four channels you may select up to four channels to be displayed simultaneous ly To return to single channel display you press the Multi H key again 23 FEB 23133124 SUM 118 REM e 15Fla Dia WGT WW SUM DOUE UZ 1 6 STOP 23 FILTER 14 25 8 Hz renonce E m HORORI r DIFF Ph 84 7 Sn 22 22 TACH note SETUSER Hate SPL Z 2500 EXF HEHT IHL 1 8 Dual LINEAR 26Hz 28k Hz FEE 98 23122144 Les 8 6 SPEED B n C dott r ed crs BWHORM
46. Ineut 1 LINEAR 1Hz 16kHz RESET B3 JAN 35 095 Zd 32 FFEU B HAE 36 Qo pP RN p E A ON M Biz HSHH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL z 115 H e Bra EE WE od ad o imc decies Del WI VB CA cul imc aut l ea ONE des WD DONC de ABD D N E o NE IOS EC abs RE De R u Ee UD Ce de de REIS TACH H H SPEED B d Bi 5 EH solid crar IHITIHL dB vU SPL G under under under under Under Within this menu you have four choices differentiation double differentiation integration and double integration The differentiation functions d2 dt2 and d dt are used in the instance where one uses a displacement or velocity trans ducer and they wish to display acceleration In this case the user should be cautious to analyze data only within the fre quency response constraints of the transducer Velocity and displacement transducers typically have limited frequency response characteristics 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 7 18 4 NOTE e rta 3200 training book Page 18 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM For this experiment let s perform a single integration on our accelerometer The result will be a velocity spectrum Press integrl D to activate the single integration feature B3 SI GIS Z95 i4 dezdtz dot sisnal dbl int E E bbe 18 LIHEHR SINGLE zB 20690 InFut 1 LIHEHE 1Hz 1BkHz RESET A3 JAN 38 09 245 se 36 EG AG 20902 HERA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL zz 115 H E B 7 56 REM i TACH 9
47. Lr A DI FEM TACH Ha SPEED Bg d EN Hz Bak Hz dot ter crar ROOMS SIHE PIHK WHITE DELAY 19 Then range up by pressing the up arrow hard key until the overload indicator disappears 18 15 18 OH OFF OH RUH OFF RUH amp HTT gt HTT SPL AA BA NNN m ree LINEAR SIHGLE SA ABBA Dual LIHEHE 2BHz 26k Hz STOP Z FEB 98 18 14 48 A o o FILTER 14 25 0 Hz Les 1 vada 1 of 2 HORMAL REE te Wy a at SRE a Eg A bin D le ete ao ee DIFF Ph 188 1 5n 64 61 RENE TACH 9 9 SPEED B d H Hz 5 51 Hz H dotted crar ROOMS SIHE FIHK WHITE FUL gt DELAY You may also need to adjust the output level of the ampli fier speaker in order to insure that all of the frequencies of interest are being excited equally The spectrum displayed on the RTA should be fairly flat within this frequency range The output level of the speaker amplifier should also be loud enough such that there is a significant difference between the background ambient level and the excited level for each frequency of interest in both rooms Leave the noise generator on 8 26 e rta 3200 training book Page 27 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Making Airborne Sound Transmission Loss Measurements RESET R S STORE RESET R S You are now ready to make a measurement in the source room Verify that your speaker and microphone are both located in appropriate lo
48. ON A Turns the noise source on OFF B Turns the noise source off 2 13 e E e rta 3200 training book Page 14 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL ON RUN C OFF RUN D BURST E DELAY O LEVEL P Will activate the noise generator when the analyzer is in the RUN mode Will de activate the noise generator when the analyzer is in the RUN mode Selects the burst mode The repetition of the burst key is set by pressing the Delay O key and using the horizontal keys to ad just the rate in seconds FE OCT 15 34 36 DH OFF DH RUM OFF EUH BURS ithe eee err ren Tee ee ey Niger WO CA a he eee os PIHE HOISE IS OFF W RUH SPL B AA EXF HEHT IAL 1 Dial HEHF 1Hz 26kHz RESET 66 OCT 34 151281171 FILTER amp z4 256 Hz L 3 Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL A 646 7 lt PHONS 82 5 TACH H H SPEED H H 99 H Sg 9 H A Ak Hz E LAS IHITIHL FIHK WHITE DELAY LEVEL The Delay function permits you to set a delay for when the noise will be turned on Typically used in conjunction with the ON RUN C function Level is used to set the output level of the noise generator The noise generator output is located on the top of the instru ment identified by the label source output located on the back of the instrument This output is typically used to drive a loud speaker for room acoustics Option 11 Signal Generator The OPT 11 Signal Ge
49. REAL G Bd JE XT COUNT MANUAL ACCEPT Dual LIHEHE 1Hz l1BkHz STOP ar JAH 93 22 04 38 o ooo ene TIME 98 156215 ESHA 1 1Je1ahted Tim D Z d 3 456 Eta REAL JE moron mom p m hoa Roa n om as a 9 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 03 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 n n 03 on Baze Freaulec HZ He EE TLS T td 26 Ch2 ad ir TACH 5 8 SPEED 4 4 Bi BEBE z M 1 157 543 Z A tris level IHITIAL ALTERH BWwHORM Poor T TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 41 Press CH1 to view the input time history for channel one It should also look similar to the display below The impulse CH1 from the hammer should be fully captured 1 de T A SPECT C SPECT O A FER COMER TIME DISPLAY note DETECTRE REAL LBF DE e COUNT MANUAL ACCEPT Dual LIHEHE 1Hz l1BkHz STOP ar JAW 93 22 04 38 AB 2 2 0 2 cc CC TIME i 1562m5 ESHH 1 1J21a2hted Tim d 2 408 Eta REAL 58 Pane R R NR NR NN P 711010 Baze Fre3 uencuaz AA EE 1647 td z Che Ba REM TACH BH SPEED B B AG BEBA z oti 1 193 8437 Z B hL level IHITIRL HLTERH BlWwHORM FEE T TRIG SETUF FILES JAUT STR 10 26 e rta 3200 training book Page 27 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 42 Press X FER C to display the transfer function This is the S averaged transfer function sometimes called a frequency C response fun
50. key Z Bd OCT 16 23 26 create RECORDS t disk t format Memoria Used rz Disk Used J Memory Free 193024 Disk Free MEMORY ISK HAME DATE TIME SIZE HAME CATE TIME SIZE MEMORY mem delete rename 7 delete rename The following message Enter new name will appear on the right side of the display B3 OCT 16 81 17 A E E D E F B H Memoria Used 2445 Disk Used Hemor Free EDU Disk Free Enter new name PLANT DHTE TIME DATE j TIME 4 Enter the new file name ROOM by using the alpha charac ters on the display Ed OCT 16 21 1 Memoria Used Erb Disk Used Hemor Free n ooo Disk Eres Enter new names ROO DATE TIME DATE TIME 1 21 e rta 3200 training book Page 22 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 1 22 EXIT 9 Press the EXIT key The new file ROOM has replaced the old file name PLANT 4d OCT 16 23 26 create FECORDS T disk t Format Memor Used erar Disk Used Hemor Free 19824 Disk Free HEMOR pIE K DATE TIME HAME DATE TIME SIZE MEMORY 7 delete rename mem delete rename Deleting a file 1 Press the FILES O key found in either the Main Menu or the System Menu 2 Select the file name ROOM or a desired file to be deleted with the T C or Y K arrow keys A4 OCT 16 23 26 create RECORDS disk T Format M br
51. optional floppy drive is attached If no floppy is attached the analyzer will display a message indicating that no floppy drive was found HS OCT 15 51 26 create FECORDS T disk t Format Memoria Used iraz Disk Used Hemor Free Eto Disk Free MEMORY 7 delete rename mem delete rename Press the create A key Memoria Free 250304 Disk Free ISK DATE TIME SIZE MEMORY 7 delete rename menm delete rename e rta 3200 training book Page 20 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 1 20 EXIT 3 Enter the desired new file name for this example use the name PLANT by pressing the alpha keys appearing on the display Ed OCT 16 14 76 H E C D E F a H Memoria Used 66516 Disk Used Memoria Free S Disk Free DHTE TIME HAME CATE TIME MEMORY F 4 Press the EXIT key when finished entering file name The file name PLANT will appear on the left side of the display with the associated date time and size a OCT 15 54 18 create FECORDS T disk T Format Memoria Used Disk Used Hemor Free zona Disk Free ENOS gt gt gt DISK TIME SIZE HAME CATE TIME SIZE MAME DATE ey L MEMORY 7 delete rename men delete rename After creating a few files you may select which of these files you wish to use to store your data into To do this use the T C or Y K arrow keys to highlight the file PLANT and
52. 1 DRAW 2 START EHD DELTH Een PRESTITI LI D Fen ae Ri TT r dei DH i E n r G 4 5608 Hey A ui T EAPOHEHT IAL ad bTACHER Input 1 LINEAR 1Hz 16kHz b y b STOP 15 OCT 22 21 38 NCL FREG 66 OAAaHz H4AA LEURS r Channel 1 of 1 NORMAL i WATERFALL PLOT SBadB BES asy START Boal aginst Dee END 8113 Loc Ps Suus h DELTA 0663 Zdi k pi A pii HHHH OFF CCMOTOR EXIT 6 Press EXIT vsRPM Graphics Another useful way to view byTACH autostored data is by using the vsRPM graphics display feature of the Model 3200 This feature allows one to view either frequencies or orders in an amplitude vs RPM format 12 16 e rta 3200 training book Page 17 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 1 Press vSRPM D to enter the vsRPM Graphics menu 16 Du 14 486 38 SLOPE alevel TAGBARS s SFHH LIDEO pH LS note WIDTH SOURCE IS TACH IHPUT F 0024 ERP UHEHT IAL 1 6 Input 1 LIHEBR 1Hz l1B8kHz STOP 15 OCT 94 22 21 58 PEH LEUEL C FREQUENCY k Hl 56 7 1 12 506 Z B2 59 6 1 25 BBE 3 Bi 49 8 l Jr Jee 4 Bd 38 28 1 JE Bac 9 85 27 3 1 62 290 6 B 33 7 1 ra 888 BEE oddal RPM 206 crsr Bi DCHOTOF STATUS HIDE TACHSET B ORDER REDRAW PEH CHAHHEL FRED The data that is displayed in the vsRPM graphics displayed is the data that you just acquired during the vsRPM autostore measurement of the dc motor run up If the hori zontal scaling is diffe
53. 1 LINEAR 2BHz z kHz RESET 19 FEE 55 12 16 25 sa ie 6 Sut aie R RT N A ROR E vk dae ats es Sa A A AAA eae as 9 FILTER 14 25 4 Hz L 1 Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 34 2 A 46 1 eh r 3029 n Am cur Fan cad I A fan Wie ea NR NR O A ISO CEP aan TN qu O Ja NU QU TATE TED TEC ZE BIFF Fh GB r cn Fa aq REM uj I TACH HLH SPEED a El 25 4 Hz Bae Hz zA HE HZ datted crar PORCO ROOMS usEPHM STAT x Spec F TEIG SETUF FILES AUTOSTR 15 Press SUM E to enable the linear summation feature At the right of the display you will see a sigma symbol followed by an sign in 12 13 25 1 1 143 SUN SETUSER note Multi PL 9 0092 PIA gt n n n n n n eR RR ee a EXPOHEHNTIAL 1 InFut 1 LINEAR ZEHZ ZAkHz 1 RESET 19 FEE 38 12 16 26 SA r Sy A he Tae Z NEO S du z pad O o L N c REUS Dx lUe oby l V PUO o aha da i FILTER 14 25 5 Hz H 1 anne a d 34 2 46 1 EA r TTL DIFF Fh amp B B 5 a4 REM I TACH H G SPEED B B z z z L dotted crzr POPCO Dia GT WW SUM BWwHORM 16 Press EXIT to return to the Main menu e rta 3200 training book Page 18 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Sound Pressure Level measurement To make a Sound Pressure Level Measurement 1 Press the R S to initiate a measurement Notice on the dis RESET play you will see an A Weighted 1 3 octave band spectrum R S that is being integrated over a one second duration Notice also th
54. 1 of 1 HORMAL d 15 3 E 2 Loc l TACH BH SPEED B A FA HAHA z H I Sada a dotted crar IHITIHL 19 Press EXIT to enter this scale factor EXIT 20 Press EXIT again to return to the System menu EXIT 21 Iypically with vibration measurements one is interested in low frequency information Let s modify our high and low pass filters from the current 20Hz to 20 kHz selection Press INPUT K to enter the Input menu 15 OCT 19 58 54 SLM STAND 1 STAND Z CROSS IMTEHS s UNITS FILTER CLASS Rmn S Sae STO Z OS ea amp 2B K Ae la om GE sae SEU GR ae e UE dee A A D A a a RS CE Der e de RD UNDO DAL TEL me EXPOWEWT IAL 18 Ineut 1 LINEAR 28Hz 26kHz RESET 15 OCT 94 19 55 12 44 Eaa Ch A E Sa IA A ae aE Re NE des JY A AE a i A OE FREQ DD ARRAHZ H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 95 2 1 4 LOC TACH 6 8 SPEED dot te EA d crar SETUP FILES FESETS 22 Choose 1 10k M to activate a high pass filter at 1 Hz and a low pass filter at 10 kHz a 20 F ee O TTL a 1 8 Ineut 1 LINEAR 28Hz 26kHz RESET 15 OCT 94 19 55 12 44 po FREQ DD ARRAHZ H4HH M Ense 1 of 1 NORMAL LOC TACH 5 8 SPEED 4 6 dotted crsr z 18k SAME 4RHHGE EXIT 23 Press EXIT to return to the System menu 24 Next you need to modify the exponential detector integra tion time to a faster rate than the 1 8 seconds that it is cur EXIT rently set at Press EXIT to enter the STAND analysis menu
55. 11 1958 148 SS ea fo Ber terno at EXF HEHT T DL 1 Dual A WET T STOP 19 FEE 95 17 41 25 r a o au n dap cec D c OX ham du QE o 0 RR UR EEEE EREE ERE NL K ok FILTER 14 25 Q Hz Leo Channel 1 of 2 SEL i d 439 7 184 3 NN ue KK lt lt DIFF Ph W6T Sn REM TACH d d SPEED B a HA Hz H H Hz Q bik Hz a dotted crar F UPC ROOMS usEPHM STHT Mx 5Pec F TFIG SETLIF FILES AUTOSTR e rta 3200 training book Page 20 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 4 20 e rta 3200 training book Page 1 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM Defining macros Macros The operation of the analyzer can be simplified by the use of the user defined key macros Each macro permits the user to define up to fifty sequential key presses and when executed will simu late the manual key press operation of the analyzer SPACE MACRO It is recommended to begin from the Main Menu of the analyzer Press the EXIT hardkey until you have returned to the Main Menu 1 Press the MACRO hardkey to enter the Macro Define mode The message MACRO Select 0 9 or Create STO Store will appear on the upper right side of the display l FEB 23 85 44 CREATE HTIBL ve Dual HEAR 26Hz 26kHz RESET 16 FEB 98 26 43 33 FILTER 31 1 25kHz L 3 aa 1 of 2 HORMAL FREE Ph 66 4 Sn 6 28 TACH
56. 225 7 H E D E ie RRR OWE Sait NN A A NR N M ow ecc WU N a o RU a aie ta es de AA nn n RR RR RR Res nnn rn LIH Fa A BB InFut 1 LIHEHE 1Hz 1BkHz FESET 63 JAH 92 601301726 188 ie ae aad Ge ae ate ie ae ae Sime SRR Se I NI NE ae es Se a ieee aa 20 FREQ Ae HARAHZ HSHH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL s 152 9 E 125 14 1 H Ge ARA Joe Wis d AEDEM ERE NR NE cet E A Sin ST S e l l TACH Ha SPEED B d gi s solid crear IHITIHL I J K L MH H U F e rta 3200 training book Page 19 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 8 Notice the newly created label FT S at the bottom of the dis play az e Bid 32143 SLOFE name SAME ER LUHITS Hoise F mU cal U cal level 1 s EE Soci o DEUS EL MC JEL ca PAS Senne SRO NS A BC TR E UNT JE SO Cab NE cin VENETA RC rir E ont oat RR Nara adt AQ x cue VE ox LIHEHFE ELE z Ha DG HFH LINEAR 1Hz 1 kHz E H i JAH 98 095 32 1488 ARA N ds Seer ce Q A DGH HSDD Channel 1 of ORM s 152 9 Fer 1 H N Guy O duly a VES RO RR ANN RN FEM TACH Ha SPEED Bg d Bi 27217 D gt O solid crzr under under under Under ga des Aer 32143 SLOPE name SAME R UMI TS Hoise F mi cal U cal level r 9 G H 6 ciat EE vc convoy O AS vys GE Tee NN NONE un der ci uar Die VES xa Wee fay NEVER Ss Valve Give ES JE Wowie le de err N LIHEHE INGLE zB BRR Ineut 1 LINEAR 1Hz 1bkHz FESET H3 JAN 98 995 325 ZH 148 s NUI We tw Woo
57. 25 8 Hz 588 Hz LS Bk HZ A dotted_crsr AITES S JOB S PART SAREA SEDIT CI F4 2 C24F4 2 F3 F2 On the display you will see the total sound power spectra of the specified part 13 zn 81 35 38 Power F2 P I F3 HPP FA FHU note Hate dE ell AAA LIHEHE SINGLE ZA 1515 Dual LIHEHRE ZBHz l8kHz Dis 13 JAM 3 ses Mu 1 B HEEHT T 25 8 Hz 5aa Hz 10 OkHz Z A kdot ted crar HITEST S JIUB S FART Z AFEA S EDIT CitF4 2 sFd F3 FZ At the right of the display you can read the values of the total overall sound power Linear amp A Weighted of the part plus the sound power at each 1 3 octave band SS e rta 3200 training book Page 31 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 21 To view the sound power of a specific area of a part press S EDIT L Enter the desired area and press EXIT note STEST FEDHMT POINTI dE FU zB m LIHEHE SINGLE Dual H EE FILTER 25 215 Hz Les wr POWER 1 d 13 8mm d rB rt dd mamme a r3 56T A YES 6tdEP JOB_ TEST PART FRONT ARE x 566 Hz 5 dotted crar HITEST SJOB S FART gt gt HREH CitF4 2 Czx Fd z F3 FZ 22 Press Power A to perform the sound power summation S TEST sFREOHT POIHTI dE Pl zA Bi LIMEAR SIHGLE zA Bi Dual LIHERE Z AHz 1BkHz RESET 13 JAM 55 a 42 41 FILTER 25 215 Hz Les wr POWER 1 d 13 8mm d rB rt dd mama PA RR EAE 79 BT Hz T BT dRe JOB TE PART FRONT ARE
58. 42 36 FEH LEVEL C FREGQUEWCY 1 Al 58 7 1 12 588 Z H2 5 5 1 25 002 3 13 42 8 1 ar Jee d d 30 8 1 5B AAA B H5 2 3 1 z Jee k g 47 8 1 290 HHE Inn L E anpER 306 RPM 506 Ff reauerics DCMOT OFR STATUS HIDE TRHCHSEN E O EDEE FEDRAL FEH CHAHNEL FREG 2 The next screen will ask you to SELECT THE MAXIMUM ORDER Press 400 C 16 SET 16 11 53 199 zag 468 O U SELECT MAKSIMUM ORDER E SOURCE IS TACH IHFUT G B A288 V xy ups EXPOMENTIAL 1 64 Ineut 1 LIHEBR 1Hz 146kHz RESET 16 OCT 94 15 42 36 PEH LEUEL C FREBLIEHC k Hl 56 7 1 12 5061 Z H2 596 1 27 HE O bad doe Dad ota tl eae ae be A alk T Bz 49 1 37 504 4 Ad 38 2 1 3H H 2 Bn 27 3 1 BZ v OE Sean Bod ee ilis cu Uu quali cus Lua eee E B amp 47 8 1 266 AAA Jan RPM 366 corer B1 306 DCMOTOR The vsRPM graphics display is now viewing the first 6 orders harmonics as they changed in amplitude during the de motor run up The orders that are currently displayed are shown on the right of the display Notice also that each of the 6 traces are labeled accordingly on the left side of the display 16 Bel 16 12 25 SLOPE aleuel TAGBARS 3FAH WIDE A H IS note WIDTH SOURCE IS TACH INPUT B 8268 E EE EXPOMENTIAL 1 64 Inrut 1 LINEAR 1Hz 16kHz RESET 16 OCT 94 15142136 FEM LEVEL L ORDER k l 56 6 1 B1 aam Z Bz2 26 6 1 B2 mam QPPL 1125 Il 3 1 3 SA 4 1 B3 aad d Bi 32 5 1 Ad aam Jg Bg 32 5 1 B5 ga
59. 5 A Hz LYS Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 9 B 56 5 FH HS 64 4 TACH 8 8 SPEED H H Trigger MAHLIAL RE HEHM OFF level 2 Setup the desired trigger criteria trigger frequency and the trigger level a Press one of the following keys to setup the trigger criteria gt 1 Triggering will occur whenever the level in a specified frequency band equals or exceeds the programmed value lt L Triggering will occur whenever the level in a specified band is less than or equal to the programmed value Slope J Triggering will occur whenever the signal in a specified band has both the appropriate trigger level and has a positive slope Slope K Triggering will occur whenever the signal in a specified band has both the appropriate trigger level and has a negative slope A OCT 19 27 45 an 29 SHH Hz 1850 A 14 5658 EXPONENTIAL 1 8 Dual LINEAR 28Hz zBkHz STOP AZ OCT 94 15 25 56 FILTER 4 1 88 Hz L 3 p nanne 1 gf HORAL FHOM 64 4 TACH A H SPEED a a 26 2 Trigger x x E m E E eee IMITIHL MANUAL RE HEN OFF level b Turn the knob to select the desired trigger frequency By turn ing the knob you can page forward and backward through the available frequency range as indicated by the changing value on the display See figure below A OCT 15127146 an INITIAL I I I I SBr ONU qut e dun ve aat RAS E TRIB d BB o OS A A LOC p 145 se RN R AER A A A
60. 64 Input 1 LIHEBR 1Hz l1B8kHz STOP 15 OCT 94 22 21 58 PEH LEWEL C FREQUENCY k Hl 56 7 1 12 506 Z B2 59 6 1 Zo AEE 3 Bi 49 8 1 ore 990 4 Bd 38 28 1 JE Bac 3 B 27 3 1 62 290 amp B 33 7 1 77 888 JHE Jaaa RPM T06 crsr Bi DCHOTOF STATUS HIDE TACHSET B ORDER REDRAW PEH CHAHHEL FRED 12 17 e rta 3200 training book Page 18 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 12 18 4 Push the right arrow hardkey to move the cursor along the RPM axis The amplitudes of the frequencies at a particular RPM are shown at the right 16 B uu o eae alevel TAGBARS SPAH VIDEO ASIS note WIDTH l SOURCE IS TACH INPUT rn PETER PE A mM EXPOHENTIAL mda sm ZV dy o Eran a ap Wr TW d TN SAM et UA A Cau 134 PEH LEVEL FREQUENCY RY k Hl 48 6 1 12 500 2 B 24 2 1 25 888 BH A AAA MO E 3 AS 6 1 1 Ar 55A 4 Bd 3 7 1 J8 mad LOC gt Ba 13 8 1 52 380 24 AA E 5 H 12 4 1 T5 DDD 388 J FPH 2762 crsr oq DCMOTOR STATUS HIDE TACHSET B RDER REDRAW PENH CHANNEL FREH You are currently viewing the following frequency bands in the vsRPM mode 12 5 Hz 25 0 Hz 37 5 Hz 50 0 Hz 62 5 Hz and 75 0 Hz To change these values so that you can view other frequencies first select a frequency that you wish to modify For example if you would prefer to view the 200 Hz frequency band instead of the 75 Hz band you can make this change by first p
61. 7 at pg Qc c l ILL LE PHOHS E 5 la 7 TACH d d SPEED B El z5 H8 Hz SGG Hz 15 BRA datted crar ABCD I O HOISE IHFUT clack COLOF SETLIF FILES RESETS 1 K 2 M 3 EXIT In general vibration data of interest tends to be in the lower frequencies Let s modify the high and low pass filters to reflect this desire by pressing INPUT K o 23139143 Chanls STHHDRED CROSS INTEWSY UNITS FILTER CLASS SPL B BREE ELE e T EXF HEHT T DL 1 E Input 1 LIHEHE z26Hz z kHz RESET BZ JAN 58 23 38 41 rar By O RR RR O y Gt de K OK Gas A NEL oku ie NR NE A O RRR a FILTER 16 de H Hz L 3 Channel 1 1 MOF de r 28 E S A V Ba tite Se d ae abes DIFF Ph 22 8 Sn R 2 43 REM si TACH BH SPEED A F 25 6 B OFF IHITIHL clock COLOR MLS FILES RESETS Press the 1 10k M high low pass filter option This estab lishes the high pass filter at 1Hz actual roll off starts at about 0 8 Hz and the low pass filter at 10 KHz aes 62144145 Bu z8 U zi LI AUTO RA HInrFuts TEST SPL B BREE BE r K R KN RRR NNN RRR R a OKO OK R N N N RR K RRR a Ga R ERXF HEHT HL 1 E Dual LIHEHR 26Hz 2HkHz RESET 11 FEE 98 81 57 51 rar O OOP AA O o A I FILTEF Hld 25 Q Hz L 1 ME Channel 1 Z S r 56 TIMIDI AN DIFF Ph 52 8 Sn 2 43 REM TACH B B8 SPEED B a A AE LE dotted crar 1 Bk 29 20 SAME aFHHGE Notice that this selection is now reflected on the right por tion of the measurement display Press EXIT to leave t
62. 9 SPEED B d p solid crzr IHITIHL This selection will be reflected in the upper right side of the LCD az on 68 23 31 SLOFE name SAME ER LUHITS Hoise F mU cal U cal level E bebe 2 O sate Ro T ceo CE Jr a N E ee ae Ge T de e ak RPR N N e DS RO E ac ae A E O T DE Io n v LIH u zb ARR InFUt HR 1Hz 16kHz RESET A3 JAN 38 09 2295 324 188 IL PP T ERT R P M A E T IUIS E TELLLPSTIT FREQ Aa ARRAS HSHH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL a 152 Ez 125 7 1 H O HR ec Ue gu ts V CO A E ORC US AA E Jak e REM o TACH 9 9 SPEED B d p s solid crear IHITIHL dB vU SPL G under under under under Under We now need to modify the calibration value and label to read in velocity units We are currently calibrated to display the data in g s Since the integral of a g is meaningless let s create a velocity unit labeled ft s Press name B to enable the label unit feature B3 2 pa z9 31 s SAME K UNITS Hoize F ml cal W cal level G 1 AE EE z l a A N Cie jdi O ea ad dj Se dd Vade N LIHEHE P E zB mig Ineut 1 LIHEHE 1Hz 18EHz SET H3 JAH 38 60 29 64 148 UE LAT fn ESO SE EP at tah ies Tah bee oe Sara cR ARA gt He GHz HSHH Channel 1 af 1 HORMAL 22 152 a 125 7 TACH d d SPEED B a i E solid crear IHITIAL dE HL SPL under under under under Under Press the undef L to edit the label Press SHIFT then CLEAR to clear the label Type FT S Then press EXIT to enter the new label E JAN BR
63. ALTERH BwWwHORM PZ gt R TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 10 6 e rta 3200 training book Page 7 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Impact Hammers Frequency Range e The usable frequency range is determined by the tip and the mass of the hammer e Soft tips such as rubber provide a long impulse and yields a lower frequency range centered at low frequencies e Hard tips such as steel or hard plastic provide a short impulse and a short frequency range at higher frequencies e Heavier hammers will lower the frequency but increases the amplitude of the force spectrum e The useful frequencyrange of an impact hammer is from DC to where the spectrum rolls off 10 to 20 dB Impact Hammer Tips ii SE di d2 17 D0 EH T ZPL T FCR LLIHEP TINE LILA LE noka OLTLETE EN Soft rubber tip E E S pte TI c Base n TACH 6 6 EPEED B B MAPE LIA STE BOL FOOL rrsrz HI S ALTERH EMHDPfH Pak ALIFS T TRIB SETUP FILES HLTOSTR 1i SIF 11 d1 0d D EH T SPECT FER LIHLE TING b IEHL LG noba DETE TE BE FLASTIC TIF Plastic tip T HERR E A Dh sas E AE TALH GG CPEED B E JOA FTE a EID STP Ebo rrzrz ALTERH EAIHDFPfH PER z SETUP FILES AUTOSTR ii SE itd D0 LACT C SPECT FTR LLIHEP TINE LILA G nnb2 DK TRE TR Hora STEEL TIF TL HERR E Bor Aes ii S TALH 6 9 EPEED Steel tip B IM ES d FILA KOL r
64. AS REM a TACH d d SPEED A El 25 5 Hz 636 Hz zH BHEHz L dotted crar INITIAL The RESET will be performed if you press the YES key If you press the NO key the RESET will not be performed and you will be returned to the Reset menu 4 Press the EXIT hardkey to return to the System Menu EXIT e rta 3200 training book Page 28 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 2 28 e rta 3200 training book Page 1 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM Shift Menu Defining a reference spectrum In some applications it is desirable to compare two spectra or to display spectra relative to some user defined spectrum The spectrum which is to be defined as the reference spectrum must first be displayed on the analyzer In most cases this would be a spectrum that has been stored to the memory of the ana lyzer If the desired reference spectrum has not been stored to the memory do so now by pressing the STORE hardkey then press the RECALL hardkey to bring the spectrum to the display E 26 18 27 W Fall E AWE B MA E SUM KEEP EXPOHENTIAL 1 8 Dual LIHEHE 2BHz 26k Hz STOP 23 FEE 98 201131239 FILTER 14 25 8 Hz Lora Channel 1 S Zz HORMAL d E wl DIFF Fh 83 2 Sns 28 65 TACH 6 8 SPEED B a hrec all data E HZ E DUUE UZ DELETE 1 Press the SHIFT hardkey to activate the Shift Menu This SHIFT
65. B d SA koko AA A E A E l g 25 6 Hz 638 Hz ZU OkHz OFF IHITIAL 1Baline 288l1ine 4Bbline SAHline FFTZ00M BHSE Bd 2 The Hanning window is the most common choice for gen eral vibration measurements so press HANNING B icd 23144155 RECT FLAT ZER FAD IMPACT EXF 2 ERF 4 EXP SPL E mia SR STR ok ah Ci RR E N MR NR E TAER op O A ees A d a a E S EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 Ineut 1 LIHEHE 28Hz 26kHz FESET z JAN 3 23 42 48 ro A A RAN RR A FREQ H6 5 Hz HSHH Channel 1 af 1 HORMAL d 15 3 B 12 4 REM TACH d d SPEED B El Bi i EH dotted crar INITIAL 3 The last item of interest in the filter menu is FFTZOOM We EXIT will delve into this powerful function later Press EXIT to leave the filter menu e rta 3200 training book Page 6 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Selecting the High and Low Pass Filters The default high and low pass filter setting for the RTA are typi cally 20Hz and 20kHz as can be verified by looking in the appro priate field on the right of the display KEF LS 38 434 lhanls STHHDED CROSS IHTEHSY UHITS FILTER CLASS SPL 138 SABO E KEAR LL LT cL LL EXF HEHT T DL Hote E ma 1 8 DIRECT LIHEHE 28 7ekHz RESET 19 OCT 54 Hl du i4 11H A NN O dh EHE iN Ni ant Z ci EU faf ca t ay saa EN a ab dec i ra val An Ref t RR N Coat PR dee De FILTER 14 s IS Hz Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d H 73
66. DISK 7 delete rename menm delete rename A listing of the stored data records will appear on the right side of the display The record listing will show the TYPE of record stored i e Normal Intensity by Time SLM etc and a note if any that was attached when the data was stored gi OCT 16 66 24 create T T note KEEF Hemor Used zZ6624 Disk Used Memoria Free ERER E Disk Free Ter DHTE TIME SIZE PE RECORDS LI INITIAL freee 34 16151122 ZE E PLOU eE 531d E RECORDS 7 delete rename delete Press the T E or Y M key to scroll through the stored records until the desired record to recall is located az OCT 16 66 24 create T note KEEF Hemor Used zZ6624 Disk Used Hemor Free 252471 Disk Free ORY TIME SIZE DATE OT INITIAL D 29 90 EE 2 EE 5525 4 LOC delete rename 1 23 e rta 3200 training book Page 24 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 1 24 I X EXIT o Press the KEEP H key AS OCT 16 86 24 create t T nate kee Memoria Used ZEE Zd Disk Used gt gt TSK Memoria Free 2235472 Disk Free EMORY TIME SIZE DATE IHTTIAL DC EC ER ERO CIS 26368 LOC RECORDS 7 delete rename delete The message KEEP record and exit will appear on the right side of the display HS OCT 16 07 29 ES HU Memoria Used d GAK Used Memoria Free Disk Free KEEP record and exit MEMORY
67. E This will perform a reset of the user defined Weighting curves only R MACRO F This will perform a reset of the user defined Macros only R STATS G This will perform a reset of the Statistics tables only After pressing one of the above mentioned keys a message will appear on the upper right side of the display ARE YOU SURE to make sure that you really want to perform the RESET ZB FEE 1B 559 3T YES HO 126 r Ll c ro ae PRE WH SURES a cn bD BEBE LAB L errr rnnr EXFOHEHTIAL 1 Dual LINEAR 2B8Hz 1BkHz RESET 26 FEE 98 1H 10 46 sa A PE 282 OBE LIE ORE ADA EE SEK VE ARCO NACA BCA S Ey u SEP CBS RO PEG cen R VEL A A ZE sn O cii vi FILTEF 14 zh A Hz Channel 1 of z HORMAL d 34 4 eh r R ZA T Uo e Sa Ute Aa OM A ow ow ar E wo cr Ao TRO Cn CRX Dr RTRC A Sade WD CAD CD CEU dr cc OTI IDA ee TED RO TY BIFF Fhz 55 S Ssh E AS BEN l TACH HG SPEED ALG 77 6 Hz GiBH zB BkHz dotted crar IMITIAL 3 Press either the YES A key or the NO C key MU 16155137 VES HO ARE YOU SURE B BBB 148 r g K E 08 N RN 12710711 TEX EXF HEHT IHL 1 Dual LIHEHE ZzAHz 1BGkHz RESET ZB FEE 55 16 47 46 SH r de uet pa Gee te va EU CSA E A V sake cae Ni Co al prv rv say ay ey cdo CES v Nd EE Tn FILTER 14 25 H Hz L Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 34 4 i eH r Wie fae deir WOOD TAS ecce x a dd Ce e COCOS ARS DE NT AO E UE Oo dd Het Do V zbo R Des OON AO ds a E BIFF Fhz Bo a gu E
68. E k Gm TAN ENV NANO EXPONENTIAL 1 Ad bTACH Ineut 1 LIHEHE iHz 1lHBHkHz RESET 15 OCT 94 28 11 27 44 K Sate ec A A ROR A NR E ER A o RN FEEL HA ARRAHS age Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 95 2 71 0 ED K E A A S eats CILE Ep E TACH 6 6 SPEED H H AA aaa Z nM 1 f SHBG HAHA dotted crar IHITIHL s scale s sran s amin z amax RADAR RADAR m x cal is a feature that allows you to calibrate a tachometer from a known reference You feed a known tachometer sig nal into the TACH INPUT of the 3200 For example a signal at 1000 RPM exactly is fed into the 3200 Within the x cal field the 1000 RPM factor is entered as a reference signal The 3200 would then be calibrated for this tachometer You will not use this feature for this exercise Please refer to the 3200 User Manual for more details on this feature 6 As established earlier you will acquire data from the dc motor plate as it sweeps up runs up in RPM You first need to let the 3200 know that you want to trigger the autostore e when the speed RPM reaches 500 RPM as it sweeps up In other words you want the autostore to trigger on the posi tive slope If you were doing a rundown measurement you would establish a trigger on the negative slope Press SLOPE G and toggle through the choices until STORE SLOPE is chosen 15 Pg ZLISAIZL tescele tomm toamin S boa CES E ach input Jack O Zz B mia ZE Uv Ter cial 1 5 bTACH Inrut 1 LIHEHEF
69. G key 19 5 B2 56 12 HIGHHz 1kHz A 2kHz 16kHz 2BkHz 32kHz 146k Hz SPL B ABBR TIED waste te we sega O eas waynes eub iur peg d EE EXPONENTIAL 1 8 PREAMP LINEAR 26 26kHz RESET 19 OCT 94 B2 4B8 B5 A FILTER 4 iB BkHz L 3 Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 44 1 m 55 4 a Wow dme Jw N RO A Re Eh RES CE DANT ET EO UR DLE d 9 N DE A DELL des Et mat efc Ja DET OECD E TL deo A ute de d FHOH S2 2 LOC TACH 8 8 SPEED H H 25 14 Hz BAe Hz 15 BkHz noise a A ABCD LOW Hz gt 1 Hz 5 Hz 18 Hz z Hz 26 Hz 166 Hz The analog filters selected are identified on the right side of the display 14 5 02 56 35 DIRECT PEEHHMF AUTO RA Hi LoHz SPL B AA 114 LC 222 RTM K a A o O O a O gR NTR x EAF HEHTIHBHL PREAMP LINEAR 26 26k Z RESET 19 OCT Er au W at Doe onm E SW IELONC OC CADO O CRIT Wen N a R To A a ow o FILTER 44 18 HBkHz Leo Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 44 m 58 4 O RO NR galerie O ia S PO O EEE PHOWS 72 3 Ea TACH H H SPEED ALA 25 14 Hz Sab Hz IBn BkHz noise a m ABCE R S T C WGT LINEAR Pot dtdt bscHHHL AUsIO 4 Press the EXIT hardkey to return to the SYSTEM menu 2 23 3200 TRAINING MANUAL e rta 3200 training book Page 24 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM Setting the Clock EXIT The analyzer has a built in internal real time clock for time stamping measurements 1 Press the clock L key STHHDED CROSS IHTEHS
70. H B SPEED B B CDA did 4 Usethe left and right arrow hard keys to establish the 1 0 second delay S Z z B ROOMS SIME FIHE WHITE PULSE z Ee 13 45 88 OH OFF OH RUH UKE EUH lt HTT gt HTT SPL AAA TH r a da iwi aw ihe Gal oar eae O A O TA A A DA db ee EA LIHEAR FEPEHT D Hm bT IE Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz RESET 246 FEE 38 13 31 27 SH r E RR OR RR NE FILTER 14 75 4 Hz 5 5 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d f B 23 4 Ab r N itn te Ske SRE o Bac Ga Ga H ca V Sa GR RA a ae R RN Wet VK Gwe SH Ga R B V a Se Se Ede Y DIFF Fh m 1 n E dd UE TACH 9 9 SPEED Bg d s z z i dela2s 1 5 FO SIHE FIHK WHITE FULSE DECAT 5 Press EXIT to return to the SYSTEM menu EXIT Making the RT60 Measurement You are now ready to make the RT60 measurement Verify that the speaker and microphone are placed in the desired positions 1 Then press R S to begin the RT60 measurement RESET R S 2 After the measurement is complete press the RECALL hard CLEAR key The first spectrum at 0 05 seconds into the measure RECALL ment that was captured during the autostore process will be displayed 28 5 15 87 19 W Fall B HUE E F B S5UM vzTIME KEEP Hate SPL B aad sp a oa GEED STOP ZB FEB 93 15 86 87 FILTER 26 469 Hz 53 dd 1 H 2 ae T DIFF Ph 89 3 5n 38 65 TACH 8 0 SPEED 4 6 H Hz 524 Hz trecall data ROOMS DELETE H Preu A Hext 8 12 e rta 3200 training book Page 13 Mon
71. H Hz dotted crar IHITIHL ROOMS usRPH STHT Mx REL F TEIG SETUF FILES HUT STFE 3 Press the R S key Note that how the current data are being RESET compared to the reference spectrum If the data in any of the R S frequency bands are greater than that of the reference spec trum the level will be above the 00 db line If the data in any of the freguency bands is less than the reference spec trum the level will be below the 00 reference line Za 46 26 23 06 NORMAL Lea MIH MB SEL DISPLAY note DETECTA Hate vsREF SPL 3 4758 ZE REA Mate Gun N EAZA Elen TRECE A at Sux sa kasy n b Ga tui EINE des CUT TRE TES Wad Gus certas ae aAA CIE TES V VUES t VES ce V UE oy ERXF HEHT HL E Dual LIHEHE 2BHz 26k Hz STOP Z FEE 98 26122116 r 505 F EP NE eko lon Bhce FILTER 14 25 Q Hz L 1 EL Channel 1 S z kc a PA A OA OA A AN Ro lt ooo o NO cuit O BIFF Ph GS 5 n j Tazi FEM TACH H H SPEED Bg d H Hz Eod Hz dotted crar DUUE UZ ROOMS usEPH STHT Hx pec F TEIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR If you desire that both Channel 1 and Channel 2 have a refer ence spectrum assigned at the same time press the N SameREF N key This will assign a spectrum as a reference 3 2 e rta 3200 training book Page 3 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL to ch 1 and ch 2 As new data is analyzed you may switch between ch 1 and ch 2 and view the comparison of the
72. Hate SPL WERAGED LINEAR FEPEAT a d Dual LIHEHR 26Hz 16kHz RESET 26 FEB 38 15 17 55 DATA 33 2 BBkHz_ 583 Channel 1 of Z usTIME 1 1568 Lite am be bed dod ee bo cy Li ETEB B 218 ct 1 1688 HUEOTH T 7 4 AK Ta FEM de EA o vales ee S aii det v BN v E Vat o O suc V ma AD i e LIEB BE 7 5 r 56 0 B dam Z HERE newy data ROOMS lthresh hthresh A Preu H Hext DATA SOLID DOTTED BOTH 17 Continue this process moving the cursors to the linear areas of the decay curves and pressing REPLACE C for each of the frequencies until you get to the 5 kHz band Once you have finished press RT60 B zH FEB 15 55 53 REPLHCE AVERAGE Auto RE Auto Al note RUERBGED ama EAT HEBR _26Hz 16k Hz FEB 98 15 17 55 Channel 1 af 2 vsTINE Td 1 1566 18 ct 1 165 z 25 0 7 4 B G 56 5 x 2 HHHH new data ROOMS lthresh hthresh A Prev H Hext DATA SOLID DOTTED BOTH 8 20 e rta 3200 training book Page 21 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 18 Below is the completed RT60 register For this example you are only concerned with the frequencies from 400 Hz to 5 kHz ZH FEB 15 84 32 R RT B Auto RE Auto AL nate RT B Hote SPL AVERAGED 18 or rc n c o5 50 A o LIHEHE FEFEAT A ASA bT IME Dual LINEAR 28Hz 18kHz RESET 26 FEE 35 15 17 55 12 o A a af 75 4 m 5 El Hz S r ET amp e8 DATA RT6H 8 276 AWG Hi BE L l l
73. Hz Bok Hz s z H Ln cursor F FCU STO TBL RCL TBL HMEG TEL H CHHHHEL 7 Press the N N key to select the desired Ln to be calculated o N 19 CEP WSS 225 d9 ON OFF S Time dBE 5FHH F STAT HIDE CLEAR REDFEHl SPL EB bebe 188 ER A at SR RA ow TELE MOOR ALO mie HUC ORE et IO DEC N RP A LN Bo RT R A EXPOHENTIAL 1 48 InFut 1 LINEAR zBHz z kHz STHT FESET 1 FEB 98 mH2 11 17 oh ru aree Gan T NTN ces Aa An ot CE VE svat VE va uer ay at au acai COPIER M at Sat Gen n Tr ZA ra R oat See het ee Gaver oe FEH Fl Lr 14 25 D Hz 1 166 Bor UK zB i Feo Lmin H H AH cd Re RT a TUTTI 2H An LED vd H gH 29 0 MEAN H E FEM 5 rd 29 0 STOEN B d dt a aa a A DTI Tm 5 zi ZLUHDEF He H S z z H H value POPCEO STO TBL ECL TBEL MEG TBL CHHHHEL A Select the trace number 1 6 via the numeric keypad whose parameter value is to be changed a gt gt will appear next to the selected trace number B Press the horizontal keys until the desired Ln value appears The analyzer is capable of calculating Ln values between 1 and 99 e rta 3200 training book Page 3 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL CURSOR RESET R S RESET R S 10 C Press the Cursor hardkey to re assign Ln control of the cursor to the right and left arrow keys Press the R S hardkey to begin the analysis The state of the analyzer will change to RUN which is indicate
74. Hz Les i Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL i d 15 B 5 3 3B L pH NOU i l FH H Sz Ad 3 Loc X TACH 6 4 SPEED B d 15 uu RN eee eU ae 54 H ob D Hz Hz datted crar IHITIHL ROOMS usEFHM STHT Mx E eC F TEIG SETUF FILES AUTOSTR 2 Select the desired averaging method by pressing one of the following keys Averaging type Octave Filters LIN S A Linear Single seconds LIN R B Linear Repeat seconds EXP C Exponential seconds BT EXP D Constant Confidence with Exponential Averaging e rta 3200 training book Page 11 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL BT LIN E Constant Confidence with Linear Averaging AS S 15 16 32 LIN S LIH F EXP BT EXP ET LIH HU TIME Hote TEST 1 1 7458 TH see aR a Se cle fab ier eae RE E EXPONENTIAL 1 75 Dual LIHEHE 2AHz 26k Hz l STOP u OCT 94 14 35 46 o Ix FILTER 4 1 A oh Hz L 3 Channel 1 of NORMAL i d B 0 3 za oo m PHONES 64 3 ED TACH H H SPEED B d S dotted crar IHITIAL Averaging type FFT Filters LIN S A Linear Single seconds LIN R B Linear Repeat seconds EXP C Exponential seconds EXP N D Exponential averaging based on number of spectra Count S E Spectral Single spectra Count R F Spectral Repeat spectra B3 cet 15 17 74 LIH S LIH R ERF EPU N COUNT gt COUNT E RU TIME Hate TEST 1 2 928 ERP HEHT IAL 1 5 Dual LIHEBR 2B8Hz 2B8kHz
75. La STOP az OCT 94 15 17 14 FREQ AG BBBAHZ H4AA Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 45 1 59 9 TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 4 dotted crsr IHI 3 Press AV TIME I to select an averaging time B3 a 19 18 32 LIH S LIH R EF BT EXSF BT LIH RU TIME Hate TEST 1 1 7458 EXPONENTIAL 1 8 Dual LIHEHRE ZElHz zBHkHz STOP a3 OCT 94 14 35 08 FILTER 1 BA Hz Les Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d Su B 57 3 FHUH 64 3 TACH 6 6 SPEED B amp dotted crsr If you selected a Linear type of averaging Lin S or Lin R you will be prompted to enter an averaging time in seconds B3 OCT 15 21 25 380 DETECTOR TIME Epoca goga EN A A k LIMEBR SIHGLE B AG ual IH STOP 63 OCT 94 15 28 53 FILTER 4 1 SH Hz L 3 Channel 1 of 2 NORMAL d B 59 3 FH HS 73 4 TACH 5 84 SPEED B d dotted crar e rta 3200 training book Page 12 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL If you selected an Exponential of averaging a display with 16 different values of averaging times will be presented B3 i 15 22 56 1 64 1432 1 16 i SPL 2 4568 TH ge se Ll ccc yes eae ee SE EXPOWEWT IAL 18 i Dual LIHEHR ZAHz zbk Hz i STOP 63 OCT 94 15 21 58 54 p peses nue dele q a EL SE l d vee Seo ee val a v ae 6 FILTER 1 s Ba Hz Leo i Channel 1 of Z HORMAL i d a B 58 1 Taleb II PEDE PHONES amp 8 4 EE adn TACH 8 8 SPEED H H 4 Press the EXIT ha
76. March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL PULSE L The Pulse Generator Menu shown below is accessed from the Signal Generator by pressing PULSE L JA OCT 035 0355 AS DG 1 HA Sieb AA REAL Hotel PULSE SIGHAL M L 5A UM Em HA IU HA o UHT FEFEHT 1 Dual LIHEHR iHz zBkHz STOP 6 OCT 94 2 42 24 AE TIME 46 1718m5 ESHA Time D 22 1 664 E AGE D R ei ak O as VE eG TENUIBUS O Cat Car TTP ize 25x 28 e P A NY Base Frea3uenc y Aa AAA e i TACH d d SPEED Ha MN zn t 1 153 9218 E A znlid crar A series of either positive or negative pulses can be gener ated from this menu The status of the generator is indi cated briefly by a message on the upper right of the screen whenever one of the keys is pressed The key POS NEG B will toggle the polarity between positive and neg ative going pulses as indicated on the upper right of the screen The time increment for which the pulse is Positive or Negative in milliseconds is set by pressing T on C entering a value using the numeric keypad and pressing ENTER The time increment for which the pulse is to have a zero value in milliseconds is set by pressing T off C entering a value using the numeric keypad and pressing ENTER The LEVEL E key is used to set the output in cm the same manner as explained in the preceding sections Selecting Analog Input Filters The analyzer has the capability
77. Mo CU AS ARAS AA AAA A AA NA AAA AS AAA CARACAS AAA A MA S A E AA O A DA O A A A O A N i O ASAS m Hz 250 1 25K 5K 10K EZ ME Lu TE ll lil i i i l i LL ll T i 12 for accuracy of 1 dB Large spacer large microphone diameter for large wavelengths Small spacer small microphone diameter for short wavelengths Spacer Errors High Frequency Underestimation at high frequency spacer dB 2 e rta 3200 training book Page 10 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Intensity Probe Directivity Pattern e Off axis measurements will result in measurement errors Measurement Considerations e Acoustic Intensity measurements can be performed using FFT narrowband or octave bands Measurement should be made in real time e Acoustic Intensity is measured by spatial averaging Spatial averaging is achieved by either taking measurements at a number of fixed points or by scanning the probe about a sur face The Acoustic Intensity for the area tested is the average of the fixed point measurements or the value determined during the scan e The Acoustic Intensity measurements are done across a mea surement surface The standard measurement surfaces are Parallel piped or box 11 10 e rta 3200 training book Page 11 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Hem
78. Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Option TESNA Generator us dece aa 2 14 SINE I 2 15 PINK J 2 19 White K 2 21 PULSE L 2 22 Selecting Analog Input Filters ooooocccnnnnncnnnnnnoccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 2 22 Setting the Clocks Maltebudion MET addis 2 24 Activating the External Color Monitor LD Model 2500 Color Vid GO Adaptor tequila 2 24 KSS O 2 26 Shift M T i PA ea 3 1 Derio a references peca ii 3 1 Changing from a logarithmic scale to a linear scale 3 3 Changing the Vertical and Horizontal Zoom 3 4 Basic ACOUSTIC S iind inii cid 4 1 Using the Model 3200 as a Sound Level Meter in Standard Analysis JV OG isi Mata ei meten dem ane 4 14 Se MIMS phe 3200 cis 4 14 Sound Pressure Level measurement eee 4 18 Mile fmt 5 1 Derne MaC Seen E 5 1 Execute Te isis 5 3 SLtorin MacOS ias 5 4 A O 6 1 Vibration Measurements sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssss 7 1 Creating a Measurement lG sese eee 7 1 A an a o o 1 2 Background on FFT Windows lt lt lt 7 4 Selecting am FET Wind Wiener nala Zach 7 5 e rta 3200 training book Page iii Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Selecting the High and Low Pass FilteTS nu 7 6 Selectino Unai lll 7 7 CANORA LOM say osada eno 7 8 PV CLA
79. Now use the block averaging capabilities of the RTA to compute an averaged source room measurement and an averaged receiving room measurement 9 To average them together first press the RECALL hardkey The last receiving room measurement that you acquired will be on the display You can display the 5 other measurements by pressing the left arrow key hardkey 10 Now let s average the source room measurements together Normal 1 thorough 3 Press B AVG B me EE 16 42 26 W Fall B MAK E SUM KEEF i Hote SPL EE LIHEHE SINGLE He Dual LIHEHE 2BHz 26k Hz STOP FEE 55 1 4 FILTER 1 z5 H Hz Channel 1 of Z HORMAL 41 4 A 6 DIFF Fh iRH 1 5n 64 61 REM E TACH HH SPEED B d H Hz hrec all data ROOMS DELETE 11 In the field on the top right side of the display type in 0001 0003 This tells the 3200 that you want to average the 3 source room spectra 23 FEB 18 43 47 Last H AVERAGE GaB1 ge 2 LINEAR SINGLE 2B ABBA Dual LIMEHR 26Hz 26kHz STOP 23 FEB 98 16 14 42 FILTER 14 25 8 Hz L Z ge ranna 1 of 2 EOM r DIFF Ph2zi8B 1 Sn 64 61 TACH 8 8 SPEED AGA hrec all data REM ROOMS 8 29 e rta 3200 training book Page 30 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL STORE 8 30 EXIT amp 12 Then press the EXIT hardkey to initiate the calculation The new spectrum that appears in the display is the average of the
80. R iat R HR LRT IE R RL TTE FILTER 14 75 8 Hz L Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 23 0 H 34 9 JA r C perc Eque S T LEX BIFF Fh 02 5 Sn 7 45 REM TACH 8 8 SPEED B A A Ek HZ dotted_ crar IHFUT clock COLOR MLS FILES RESETS Since you want the noise generator to turn off after the mea surement has begun you will use the Off with Run feature 2 Press OFF RUNID Q m T c M zu E cC EI T w Al C zH ane 13 43 25 OH lt ATT ATT 1 SPL B BREE TH un O o E LI EA oe LIHEHE FEFEAT B Em bTIME Dual LIHEHRE 26Hz 14kHz RESET 26 FEB 98 13 31 27 SH Ll rp c c c IL a nee FILTER 14 75 8 Hz 573 Channel 1 S Z MOF ja ZA r TIT en Sel a OA A AR o eee DIFF Pns 28 1 gt ne dd l TACH d d SPEED B a dotted crar DELAY Since you want the pink noise generator to automatically shut off after 1 second into the Autostore you will use the delay feature of the noise generator e E e rta 3200 training book Page 12 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 3 Press DELAY 0 zA S 13 43 25 OH OFF OHSEUH OFF RUM ATT ATT SPL 1515515 TH XE CIL O LU UL ne LIHEHFE FEFEHT BH Hm bTIME Dual LIHEHR 26Hz 14kHz RESET 26 FEB 98 13 31 27 SH PED Sp ROB TE EEE DI EO I clc FILTER 14 25 4 Hz 54 1 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d a 3 H AB pos KO pa cedat a desti nung v v one d qe acne deiude BIFF Fh sm 1 n P dd REM a TACH
81. RC meu m OE ae d Ga Swe ca O rc A ANDO IMP OE Ba d 2101 tme i TEST FEM FART FRONT AE l A A e BF B 25 8 Hz S d Hz 14 OkHz E A hr anase au HITEST I J K L H H U F 7 After you enter the area name you will be prompted to enter EXIT the area in square meters of the test area Type in this te value and then press EXIT to enter this value te SQUARE METERS 81 2622 Epll n B BEBE SH K RRR NR R RRR N RR RR NT NR RR RR R NR RR NN NR RR K RR N RR R NN 0 R 1 L m i Dual LIMEAR Z26Hz 16kHz i RESET 12 JAN 38 21 15 49 15 FILTER 24 z258 Hz L 3 i D r IHTEHSITY 1 d 13 8mm i 9 44 AZ SH E I ge PO NE IHD Se PR A A drev Fa d all BAe i JOB 5 TEST REM i PART FROHT aj gR SK RR DOES A de ah NR E Tc PN UL X RCM RR NE E NE HREDS GU L NT 1 25 8 Hz aH Hz 18 8kHz z A panae 38 AITEST Selecting a Linear Detector Prior to performing a measurement adjust the input range of the 3200 so that it is optimized for the test that you are perform ing To do this first make sure that your test item is on and is generating noise 1 Then press R S to begin a measurement Adjust the input RESET range of the 3200 using the up and down arrow hard keys R S 11 23 e rta 3200 training book Page 24 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 2 The proper input range would be at the range setting one or two steps above the setting where the 3200 overloa
82. RR RRR K ME CENTRE AE Gar KOSA Gah qf TRR K LRR R FEEL AR s AARAHz H4AA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 47 9 B 60 48 REM TACH 4 8 SPEED B B i E tebe crar 1BBline 266line 466line SAALIne FFTZOOM WINDOW BASE Ed Be IMITIAL 5 Press one of the following keys to select the upper band edge Your selection will be identified on the lower right side of the frequency axis 19 OCT BH2 35 53 ORDERS 7HkHz 14k Hz ak HZ zZ J3kHz 1 29kHz B29Hz 2o6Hz NICE IN UIT SELECT UPPER BAND EDGE SPL B ARR 114 m S A RR NE LT EATEN EAF HEHTIHBHL 175 PREAMP LINEAR 2A 2HkHz RESET 19 OCT 34 A2135145 an m WO uw CR aa As deb UE AN AED OUR UR dec ETE RA A UO Ru Cet TL US FEEL 10425 BARRAHAZ HER Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d a B 43 1 a joe E RA a TACH H H SPEED ALA Ae 0900 O0mM 1 20006 00090 Z A dotted crar ABCD Orders A Highest order in Hz 20kHz B 20kHz upper band edge gt 10kHz C 10kHz upper band edge okHz D 5kHz upper band edge 2 5kHz E 2 5kHz upper band edge 1 25kHz F 1 25 kHz upper band edge 625Hz G 625 Hz upper band edge 250Hz H 250 Hz upper band edge NOTE When performing a baseband analysis if the selected full scale frequency is gt 10kHz using two channels the analysis will not be performed in real time 2 9 e rta 3200 training book Page 10 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 6 Press th
83. RUM OFF RUH amp HTT ATT SPL sl SIHGLE ST z FILTER 14 25 6 Hz L 3 Lhannel 1 E Z HORMAL d A DIFF Fh 96 7 5n 31 26 TACH d d SPEED B a8 H Hz Eod Hz A Mk Hz dotted crar ROOMS SIHE FIHEK WHITE PLILSE DELAY REM Once the measurement is complete press STORE again to save the data to memory 8 27 e rta 3200 training book Page 28 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL For this exercise make one more measurement in the source room at a different microphone location then store it you now have a total of 3 measurements in the source room Before you average them together let s perform the mea surements in the receiving room 5 Leave the speaker in the source room and move the micro RESET phone to a desired location in the receiving room Assuming R S the pink noise generator is still turned on press R S to begin a 1 3 band octave sound pressure measurement in the receiving room 23 PEE 18 23 29 OH OFF OH RUH UKE EUH amp HTT gt HTT SPL ZEB 20690 2H kR E gt a E OR NN RAE LINEAR SINGLE ZA ABRA Dual LIHEBHR z amp B Hz zBkHz STOP 23 FEB 98 14122138 Al wo AO ACA O O A AA FILTEF Hld 275 A Hz Les Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL 45 2 A 467 8 RENE BIFF Fhz 24 8 Ens 22 357 REM E TACH 9 9 SPEED B d H Hz Eod Hz E El doatted crar ROOMS SIHE FIHK WHITE FULSE DELAY 6 Press STORE to save this first receiving room measurement
84. S R DU dee s x SU wl odk c a UE Us A p c cede s ter cur lie e OE Ste CREER C FREE He ARARAH HSHH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL s 152 9 E 125 1 H ET IP sme br Sy RT m CA E E p s do oo DL AE dat a CERES S T Ge AE E jp TACH H H SPEED Bg d HE solid crear INITIAL dE HL 5 under under under Under 10 FT S has now replaced G in the unit field of the display ga aah 4433141 SLOPE name SAME FE UHIT Hoise F mi cal U cal level eque B 0090 TH IIT pP O PE rue SIMGLE zb 9002 PEUT 1 LINEAR 1Hz 1bkHz RESET 3 JAN 98 40 33 23 54 Sue RD A a O RR A A Se ei EL Qe E a RU CO EQ A BAAHZ HSHH Channel 1 af 1 HORMAL A 2 AB EDT REM lt TACH 6 4 SPEED B d pi F solid cree IHITIAL dE HL SPL ETS Under Under under Under Next the calibration value sensitivity needs to be changed When we calibrated originally we did so in g s Recall that we first calibrated the RTA by typing in the calibration value from the accelerometer calibration paperwork directly into the mv cal field In the example we discussed 10 mv g was the value entered In this case we need to convert this sensitivity value to mv per ft sec 10 mv g x 18 32 2 ft s 0 31 mv ft s 11 Note that the integral of ft sec will be ft s Press mv cal F V to change the calibration value B3 JAH BB 335 41 39H Rus duc A Gaeta JK gat Jm DAL ONU Rc ce Ln Fr a n m a iu Tm Lr n m a 4 ui a
85. STORE Perform two additional measurements at different micro phone locations and store them to the memory of the RTA 7 Turn the Pink Noise Generator off by pressing OFF B Now it is time measure the background noise of the receive room Press R S to begin the background noise measurement Store the measurement when complete memory 7 xui rs 18 33 53 OH OFF ON EUN DEE KU ATT ATT SPL zB Haag SH RA OBR O r A LL cU LI ee LIHEHFE SIHGLE 7H EE Dual LINEAR HHz 2Bk Hz STOP 23 FEE 95 18 33 11 A Hz Le Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 44 36 8 o O OO DIFF Fh 55 3 5n 7 31 l THCH H G SPEED B EB dotted crear DELAY REM Bd Hz SIHE PINK WHITE P LS ROOMS 8 28 e rta 3200 training book Page 29 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM CLEAR RECALL 8 3200 TRAINING MANUAL If you wanted to keep the memory records straight you could go to the FILES menu in the SYSTEM menu and attach notes to the records The first three could be labeled sendx The next three could be labeled receivedx Record number 7 could be labeled backgnd Fo FEB 13 18 05 crea Me Used mora Disk Used Le addat Memory Free 695808 Disk Free Hate MEMUR RECORDS T rename lete x You should now have 3 source room measurements 3 receiving room measurements with noise and one background noise mea surement in the receiving room
86. TE A a N FREQ AS 1258Hz ESHH Huto Spectrum D i d 11 3 Ee 17 7 ae GN APERIT A O OR OR Baze Freauenc z AA AAA i 1644 td Ba Ch2 Ba BE TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 68 AA GREE Z 00mM __1 2300 0660 Z A ktria level IHITIRL HLTERH BllORM PRE SLOPE LEUEL DELAY 2 DELAY OFF e rta 3200 training book Page 25 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL EXIT RESET R S 35 Press the left arrow hard key to increment the desired nega tive delay 20 samples for instance This value may need to be experimented with to make sure that the time domain impulse has been fully captured If this signal is not fully captured unclipped measurement errors will result er JAM 20 50 58 ASPECT TIME note LBF ae moron p m oa 3 ON RO 2 2 a m n a 9 3 3 9 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 3 5 03 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 end MANUAL ACCEPT EAR i1Hz 18kHz RESET P JAN 98 20 43 53 ro P ame Gash oa a OS a Sa Uae v ee ue N at 87 at she aes ae ae INCOM xo Wh e C CN EU a AE LI ORTOS te FREQ Hi 1z5H8HBHz ESHH Auto a H D 1 Base Freauencuz AA em 162T td z Chz TACH H H SPEED 5 HA m zU UM T 2500 eee amp A tris delas INITIAL HLTERH BuO FEE SLOPE LEWEL DELAY 2 DELAY OFF 36 Press EXIT to return to the MAIN menu 37 The 3200 is now set up to make transfer function measure ments Press R S to arm the trigger eee 21 04 21 A SPECT C SFECT amp FEFE COHER TIME DIS
87. This yields the intensity at a given location and direction for all frequencies 11 4 e rta 3200 training book Page 5 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Frequency Domain e The Acoustic Intensity in the frequency domain is computed using the cross spectra between the two microphone chan nels I C1 pwAr Im Gay p fluid density w angular frequency Ar microphone spacing Im Gap Imaginary part of the cross spectra e This computation is the acoustic intensity at a given location in a given direction for a single frequency Measuring Sound Power Method 1 Acoustic I ntensity P a Method2 COR EL J N EX W ooooo5 oo oo Sound Pressure e rta 3200 training book Page 6 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Sound Pressure Method e Performed typically in an hemi anechoic or reverberation room e Background sound pressure level should be at least 10 dB lower than the noise generated by the test article e Test procedures are outlined in ANSI 51 34 ISO 7779 ECMA 74 etc e Measurements in free field are taken in a parallel piped
88. and structural testing i e Modal analysis This topic will be covered in the Modal Testing section in Chapter 10 Storage and Recall of instrument setups The analyzer has the capability of permitting the user to define a number of setups other than the default setup that was config ured at the factory 1 Setup the analyzer as desired Then from the Main Menu or System Menu locate the SETUP N key a3 Ej 15 36 11 HWORMAL Lea MIH MAA SEL DISPLAY note DETECTE i SFL B BEBA TH mes a a e o PLI ITE TIPP WESS TTE EXPOUNEHT T DL 18 Dual LIHEHR 2BHz zBkHz i STUP 63 OCT 94 15 31 46 5A a O EE EN PR FILTEF H 1 ER Hz Leo Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 18 Z 66 4 Aro A PHOH5S 75 43 LOC p TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 4 18 IJ SH Hz A H Hz A Bk Hz dotted crzr INITIAL ROOMS wskEPM STAT Mx Srec F TRIG SETUP FILES HUTOSTE 2 Press the SETUP N key The softkeys I P along the bot tom of the display are where you may define up to seven dif N ferent setups These keys are originally labeled undef for undefined You may create a specific instrument setup and e rta 3200 training book Page 16 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL store it under one of these keys labeled with an associated name The DEFAULT I key is a default setup delivered from the factory and can not be modified B3 s 15 35 56 name E SETUF STORE gt BOOT note
89. bands z or 15 17 02 ETEB FEFLHCE AVERAGE Auto RE Auto HU note Hate SPL B ada LIMEAR REFEHT B asma Du on LER NR nm Channel 1 T zm newy data ROOMS lthresh hthresh A Preu H Hext DATA SOLID DOTTED BOTH 9 Press EXIT to return to the amplitude vs frequency Press EXIT again to return to the SYSTEM menu Note that the measurement display is cleared It is almost always desirable to make a number of Autostore RT60 measurements within a room and average them together to come up with a single averaged measurement This helps reduce errors caused by background noise room modes dead spots etc Move the microphone to a different positions and repeat the measurement 10 Press R S to acquire the second Autostore measurement For this exercise take 5 additional Autostore records at different microphone positions 11 After the 6th measurement is done press RECALL z SN 15 89 49 U Fall E RUE E MAK B SUM wsTIME KEEP Hate SPL 1 8868 r LINEAR FEPEAT B moi bTIME Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz STOP zH FEB 98 13 86 67 A DIFF Ph 98 B Sns 32 16 REM TACH 8 8 SPEED B a z z Bak Hz a hrec all data ROOMS DELETE H Freu A Next e rta 3200 training book Page 15 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM EXIT 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 12 To average the 6 Autostored measurements together press B AVG B Block Average z FEE 15 49 43 U Fall E
90. baseband by pressing BASE Bd C 15 S 17 08 34 1lrloct 143act lona short SPL B aaa Bh T EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 Inrut 1 LINEAR ZAHz zbk Hz RESET 15 OCT 94 17 82 18 4 E A ay ay S aa Sp ge a RR N E Ede E Sky ae oe co Ec a SS FEEL H HARAH H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 15 3 2 SNN Ea TACH H a SPEED H H db Led crar IHITIHL jmmuline 2BBline 4GBline 26Gline FFTZOOM WIHDO BASE Bd 12 3 e rta 3200 training book Page 4 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 9 Select 5kHz C as the upper band edge frequency 16 OCT 11 32 25 zBkHz 19 Hz Sk HZ 2 KHz A o E dae om Gi o eee ee B SPL B mia EXPONENT L HL 1 8 Ineut 1 LINEAR zBHHz ZbBkHz RESET 16 OCT 94 11 29 53 ae NIU N R Yasin a ES Re a eG A AA e iis GO a A a FREQ DD ARRAHZ H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 15 3 2 EDO ns l TACH H H SPEED B a He dotted crsr DCMHOTOR 10 Notice that the frequency scale has changed to reflect this EXIT baseband selection Press EXIT to get back to the System menu l n cU a PPP NS PONE BINE Ea o O AN E Ea Fed 1 8 Ineut 1 LINEAR zHHz zbBkHz FESET 15 OCT 94 19 23 61 ae cC ec FREQ AeA ARRAHZ H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 15 3 E 2 0 ED i TACH H G SPEED B E Bn TOO BET UND dotted crzr IHITIHL lBbline Bbline 40681line 290 ine EET Z00 WINDOW BASE Ed 11 Next let s establish a units label and cali
91. book Page 17 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 8 Now calibrate the Channel two microphone First remove the channel one microphone from the calibrator and insert CH2 EXIT the channel 2 microphone Press CH2 to activate the channel two display Repeat the above calibration procedure for channel two Press EXIT Programming remote control keys The next step is to program the remote control keys on the 2260 or 2250 acoustic intensity probe Notice on the probe handle that there are two keys or buttons one on the front of the handle and one on the back of the handle The key on the front is KEY A the one on the back is KEY B KEY A and KEY B can be assigned any function or keystroke of the 3200 RTA Typically one assigns KEY A the task of initiating and terminating a mea surement and KEY B the task of storing a measurement Let s go with this convention 1 Press I O I to enter the communications menu 12 JAN 20 32 82 HChanls STHHDED CROSS IHMTEMSY UNITS FILTER CLASS 125 a SPL 1 6388 148 un ae ot CK OA non OKO OKO O lll TI EXPOHENTIAL 18 Dual LIMEAR Z6Hz 18kHz STOP 12 JR 28 20 28 16 z TACH 6 8 SPEED B a Hz doatted crar HH E Hz H E IHITIHL SIG GEH INPUT clock COLOR MLS FILES FESETS 1 17 e rta 3200 training book Page 18 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 2 Next press the RS1 INT G
92. book Page 18 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Dual Tone The signal generator has the capability to activate a second tone that will sweep simultaneously with the original tone To look at the signal generator output on the screen you will have to put a cable between the Sig Out on the back of the 2900B to one of the 2900B inputs I Press the 2 tone N key to activate the dual tone O o N 0 FEB 63 01 08 Fstart Fend R se Fes Lse Les HATT gt ATT B piana 188 KX URDU RR Re CR R N N Y NR RN N A A TROU e ko de CE a N ee OV EXPOHENTIAL 148 1 IHEBR zB8Hz 2BkHz RESET zh FEE 38 DS 65 2 ea r PEERS E EE RR O RN FILTER Hld 25 D Hz Les Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 4 4 44 3 eh r Lr Exc d k d r M a A dr at ede T R eee A A TEN A A aE E e BIFF Fhz 65 4 Sn 6 85 REN ge TACH BH SPEED a a 255 Hz 531 Hz zH BEHz L dotted crar IHITIHL as TART aEHD SHEEP LIH 2 tone auto L FILTER J Press the L1 G key to adjust the level of the first tone G mall 92 03 45 56 Fstart Fend k Se k eS Lee Les aF SPL 116 7858 145 RE Ed o ee RE EE nor EXSF HEHT T DL zB Dual LIHEHRE 2 amp 8Hz zBkHz STOP ZH FEB 98 H9 48 165 12H Wok dw UR N N N DENT EISE FILTER 14 75 8 Hz L enano 1 Pu ue e 101808 Mo Noo DIFF Phz121 2 Sn 273 87 RE a THCH BH SPEED B B z z dotted crar IHITIHL as TART aEHD SHEEP LIH 1l tone Huto L FILTER The Sum Of The Relative Amplitudes Of The Two Ton
93. confused with Max D see above Max Spec displays the spectrum corresponding to the highest broadband level that occurred during a measurement 2 After selecting the desired display parameter the analyzer will display your selection on the left side of the display and on the center of the right side See figure below a S 15 62 63 WORMAL Lea MIH MES SEL DISPLAY note DETECTA i SPL 1 7458 TA E em v nnde eta A oc u Rm et Ve y ey Se ome NR N ER i ae Ra ie CR de dtum V EXPOWEWT IAL s Dual LIHEHR ZAHz zbk Hz lm ere STOP 03 007 g 14 55 86 WELL rs 1 ECT 9 l o AERE PHONS 59 1 ci ER TACH H a SPEED H H ab Hz 2H H Hz Hl kHz dotted crar IHITIHL usREPH STHT Mx S5rFec F TEIG SETUF FILES AUTOSTE e rta 3200 training book Page 5 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM Display weighting V F 1 1 A 1 3 B NOTE SUM E 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Your analyzer has the capability of digitally weighting the dis played data This feature is independent to the input signal ana log weighting that is selected from the Input menu 1 Press the Display F key to access the digital display menu 03 GET 15 05 04 NORMAL Lea MIN MBR SEL note DETECTA SPL 1 7458 TH ie cae hrdo dd a DA da od er dy iat doc NANA DI AES TE A KS cles tay gues EXPUNEHTIOL 1 E Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 26k Hz STOP H i T 94 14 35 88 54 R o A A 0 ee at ae fe R OLTRE Sa can Oe DA XE CC eR S e ak a FILTER H 1
94. d A d 8 3 TACH 6 8 SPEED B n LI E 5 P McSTOP McWAIT McREPT Batters A dotted crs SameREF etREF us REF 16 Change the scale multiplier to 1 by pressing 1 A SELECT Horizontal Scale G T 4868 EXPONENTIAL JS Ineut 1 LINEHE 1Hz 18EHz STOP 14 APR 34 16 11 68 K 21 25 6bHz HSHH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 1 E BH 3 TACH B B SPEED B a dotted crar When possible vibration measurements should be acquired using a linear average over a finite amount of time Averaging will improve the quality of the measurement by negating the contribution of nonlinearities and external random noise Nor mally the longer that you average the better the measurement quality 1 To establish linear averaging press EXIT twice and then choose DETECTR H zl Ham S s HORAL Lea MIH MBPS SEL DISPLAY note DETECTE Ta 2008 G w E FU HEHTIHL 1 8 Ineut 1 LINEHE 1Hz 1 6kHz STOP 21 MAR 34 09 46 24 FREQ 61 2586Hz HAA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d A d E AL TACH BH SPEED EA dotted crar SETUP FILES HUT STE 7 13 e rta 3200 training book Page 14 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 2 Press LIN S A to enable linear single averaging Q zl S ala a LIH R EXP EPU N COUNT gt COUNT E HU TIME a T 22806 EXPONENTIAL 1 8 Ineut 1 LIMNERE iHz 16kHz STOF 21 MAR 94 9295 d65 Zd S 51 Z590uZ HSHH Channel 1 of 1 H
95. di I IS de PRU E RU ed p cod MRE qe PR CS EXPONENTIAL 1 8 Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz RESET 12 JAN 93 13 58 ee ET ees o k FILTER 24 254 Hz Lez ELIT 1 gs pore gp EMT DIFF Ph 62 8 zns 7 88 FEM L TACH H H SPEED B d dt IJI s dotted crar IHITIHL 11 14 e rta 3200 training book Page 15 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM EXIT SCREEN SYSTEM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 3 Then press AV TIME H averaging time I 24 15 11 LIH 5 LIH R ERF BT ExP ET LIH SPL EB ABB 148 Eu TEE x EILEEN KE unc a V M cay ee saa SBS SNC Zar R RE N EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz RESET 12 JAN 38 19 58 53 ai rU A IY FILTER 24 z756 Hz Leo Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 35 3 A a By R a JR cfd TR RT ant tua oi a A A a vd VIXIT DIFF Fhz aa Q n T He im L TACH 6 4 SPEED Bg d p doatted crar INITIAL 4 Next select 1 8 D sec den 20 16 63 1 64 1 32 1 16 1 4 1 2 1 z SPL EB ma 140 ih Wee Jemu AE ay dus Abed vista qe teow Ea Z ia Cal dls Si pause R Er lots oho Malye S ar VE Mur ives ee ee eon O a EXPOMENTIAL 1 8 Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz RESET 12 JAN 93 19 58 59 ai a Sa out he NT ah Slat do A OA SIMI A R v Se ine Gee RT NTR 79 Ste FILTER 24 z756 Hz L y Channel 1 S Z NORMAL 5b E O A Wea RC e aul CL TES DES NR AUT VE WES METRE A SU BIFF Fhz 68 4 Sn T He REM B p TACH B B SPEED B B z dotted crear INITIAL 4 a 16 32 64 123 256 212 Press EX
96. dotted crar IMITIHL Pink noise has equal energy per percentage bandwidth e g octave or 1 3 octave As with the sine generator the level is set using the softkey LEVEL E and entering a value between O and 9999 using the numeric keypad 2 19 e rta 3200 training book Page 20 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL The keys ATTEN G and gt ATTEN H will produce attenuation or reduction in attenuation in 20 dB incre ments also as described for the sine generator When 1 3 octave digital filters have been selected the generator can also produce 1 3 octave bandlimited pink noise From the Broadband Pink Noise Menu the Band limited Pink Noise Menu shown below is accessed by pressing 1 3 A ZR 18 82 11 WIDE OH OFF LEUEL ATT ATT SPL 12 42548 EXF NEHTIHL 1 8 Dual LIHEHE 2BHz 26k Hz STOP zd FEB 98 11 11 43 FILTER 24 z258 Hz L73 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d g DIFF Fh 143 3 5n 54 56 TACH B B8 SPEED B a dotted crar EUTH SOLID DOTTED As with the wideband pink noise the key LEVEL E is used to set the relative output level of the signal and the keys lt ATTEN G and gt ATTEN H are used to add and remove attenuation at all frequencies in increments of 20 dB The keys ALL I and NONE J are used to turn On e or Off the noise in all 1 3 octave bands simultaneously The On Off status of the noise in indivi
97. dotted crar IHITIHL s scale s sran s amin z amax RADAR t FADAR m Type in the desired RPM range as LOW HIGH 00500 0 03000 0 15 OCT 21 36 22 AG as a ae TEIL O AAA 2p NA EXFOHEHTIHL Led bTACH Input 1 LINEAR 1Hz 1BkHz a 15 OCT 94 295 11527 48 Bi Sens um x cR A A A d d d P ee AA AAAaHz H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 95 2 Fl ED R R A RT US A AA dae OB TE BE E l TACH 6 6 SPEED B amp HA 0000 Z 0H I tama Ba dotted crar IHITIHL Press EXIT to enter this span As discussed for this exercise you would like to capture spectra during the autostore at 20 RPM increments Unfortu nately it is nearly impossible to capture data at exactly 20 RPM steps because of the difficulty to precisely control vari able speed machinery Because of this you need to establish a range for the autostore delta that you would accept a spectrum using the tAmin and tAmax parameters For t Amin you will use 20 RPM What you are telling the 3200 here is that the minimum increase in speed of the dc motor is 20 RPM before you will capture a spectrum t Amax estab lishes a maximum change in RPM that you would accept Normally one would choose a large number such as 1000 RPM to insure that something is captured Setting these delta values is particularly important when testing things like chain saws whereby it is extremely diffi cult for the operator to control the running speed e rta 32
98. file you may either press the FILES O key or by pressing the RECALL hardkey To recall a file with the FILES O key refer to Recalling a previously stored record in Chapter 1 To recall a stored Autostore file with the RECALL hardkey 1 29 e rta 3200 training book Page 30 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL CLEAR RECALL U Press the RECALL hardkey to recall the Autostore measure ment The recalled record number is identified on the upper right side of the display n OCT 23 58 44 W Fall B HUE weTIME F LUD SSS RECHLL By Time 1 i SPL B 1888 H SA A E A a xac OASE VIERE SE e AR EXPONENTIAL 18 Dual LIHEBR 2BHz 28kHz STOP 64 OCT 94 G 96 29 ra sod TON R RN I NO EO Ede Vedi qun I FILTER H 1 NE Hz L Channel 1 of 2 NORMAL d 23 A 46 4 r oo ES aa PHOHS rS Loc TACH 8 8 SPEED 6 6 J xa v xx x m z z 3 z recall data IHITIHL DELETE H Preu RH Hext recall Press the A Prev N or A Next O to scroll through the autostored records until the desired record is displayed n OCT 23 58 44 W Fall B HUE weTIME KEEP 114 EE EECHLL By Time 1 i Hate TEST 1 i SPL B 1888 2B Ro RR AA nb TAT AA EXPOHWEWT IAL 1 8 BTIME Dual LINEAR 28Hz zBkHz STOP A4 OCT 94 65 0625 ra DA A ce v FILTER H 1 ME Hz Leo i Channel 1 of 2 NORMAL 25 A 46 4 ae ob n SSS Ps P LL Pl d ky PHOHS BZ
99. formance with international standards NR is obtained the same way as Noise Criterion and is found in the Rooms menu SE Bpriziful HC HE RC surface volume KT H SPL 6 8958 ad lE cp llc llc EXPOHENTIAL 18 Dual LIHEHR 26Hz 20kHz ANM STOP 21 FEB 95 Wr 13 48 Ad LL LL x E FILTER 15 21 5 Hz L 1 Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL a SL e ee oe Z HOISE EITERIOH 39 5 T EH 6 8 SPEED B a B HH Hz Hz doatted crar EDS SET gt OURCE EECEIUE BERHCK GD CLR PG Room Criterion RC C The Room Criterion procedure is can be found in ANSI S12 2 1995 In addition to producing a single number rating of the steady background noise the quality of the spectra is described in terms of one or more of the following Neutral Spectrum N Rumbly spectrum R Hissy Spectrum H tonal Spectrum T and Acoustically Induced perceptible vibration Va and or Vb As with the NC and NR rating procedures the steady back ground noise spectrum is displayed in the 1 1 octave band widths format The main difference is the low frequency needs to be set with a low limit frequency of 1 Hz This is done by T pressing INPUT K in the System menu and setting the fre K M quency limits to 1 10K M If this low limit isn t set the instru ment will give you an error message 8 36 e E e rta 3200 training book Page 37 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL
100. gt gt d 5d 67 0 MERAH 65 4 REM 5 rd 62 0 STDEU 9 6 dt 4 Woo oa a CgmeETUETT 4 x wow xw e o x G al LI M n at S20 SUNDER A A 24 8 Hz 636 Hz zH BHkHz Z A Ln cursar POPCO Merging Statistics Tables 1 Press the MRG TBL K to merge a stored Stats table into ee with the active stats table K 19 FEE 08 51 55 OH OFF 5 Time dE SFHH E STAT HIDE CLEHE FEDFAM 125 O cwn acia cac seb R R Ra R RR RR A Seah UC cce N STORE Ln Trace SPL 11 6668 140 N feria wide lah Tl sa tas UE al CRI US d Dae ede d t ae Saw alg a R cm id eae de ay ak Sing Ro Da cs N Ride die RD wide ce Me oat tan EXPOHENTIAL 1 8 Input 1 LIHERFE ZBHz 24kHz STOP FEB 99 88 39 54 n 13 ai XIX X n in uae EE TRE PP TEPOV XE A n L zd 1 QG Fre Lmax H z l Yee Lmin 20 7 ee ana T K x O RR en Fea tae 3 zu Yoo LEG LE s 224 58 ro MEAN Ed FEM n rea 62 0 STDE 6 Se S H Vm TE x x O E ST T x S E a at 2 0 SH AS da S Z z z n cursor POPCO STO TBL FRCL TEL MEG TB H CHANNEL 2 Enter the record number via the numeric keypad to be merged 19 FEE 995 d d 128 148 RI E AE DES ES uc DENEN ETE SIRE N LR R TE EXPUNEHTIOL 1 8 InFut 1 LINEAR ZzAHz zbk Hz STAT STOP 19 FEB 98 65 39 64 asi E A PE TENES m EH n Ln zd 25H Hz 1 166 Fre Lmax B z 16 Yes Lmin 45 72 ee ana x T T d e dok A V A AA QE CREDO OE a 3 za Yoo LE 5 zed 560 rzo MEAN 6g d FEM B rd 62 0 STUE amp dt d a caria ST T DY Pla ah a T O at ud adieu Si at 2z ZLUHDEF az Q 2o 8 Hz B36
101. is controlled by pressing R se C and R es D z FEE 69162134 Fztart Fend T se T es Lee Les lt HTT gt HTT 125 r C Lv mec c cac rcu I cp Sine UERBF OFF Lime HH SPL EB cia 148 r wc c r a EEA EXPOHENTIAL 1 8 Dual LIHEHE 2BHz 26k Hz RESET 26 FEE 93 H3 36 51 ai r R RR A A OR RA RR ER FILTER 14 25 4 Hz L 1 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 34 4 A 3 By r SNN N RE R E A RE ee v BIFF Fh 65 9 Sn 6 85 REM ae TACH Ha SPEED B d 5 4 Hz Bae Hz TE HE HZ dotted crar IHITIHL VZ THET alEHD SHEEP LOG COLUNT z tone Auto L FILTER 2 16 e rta 3200 training book Page 17 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Lin Mode When the Lin mode is selected the sweep rate is still controlled by pressing the softkeys C and D but in this mode the sweep rate is in time seconds instead of a rate EE 63 01 08 Fstart Fend R se Fes Lse Les HATT gt ATT 1 SPL B BREE 148 A ID M LIED PIX LLL EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 Dual LIHEHRE 2 amp 8Hz zB kHz RESET 26 FEB 398 AH 36 51 ai X p X X EEE p X XI C M LEE FILTER 14 75 8 Hz Leo Channel 1 of Z NORMAL d 34 4 H 3 5L X WD pL BIFF Fh 65 A n 6 85 REM g THCH BH SPEED HL 23 50 Hz Bose Hz 20 BEAZ L dotted crsr IHITIHL as TART aEHD SHEEP LIH Z tone Huto L FILTER As mentioned above press T se C and T es D to enter the desired start to end and end to start sweep times F Press L se E and L es F to adj
102. key found in the Main Menu az aor 15 43 64 HOREMBL Ley MIH MAK SEL DISPLAY note DETECTE i SPL 1 7451 TH o a Mc eee Gee E de ai EV Sc geno See see tae ae eae fig EER ee Sei ca Se zk ee Bde TR A tk a oe d EXPONENTIAL 1 78 Dual LIHEHRE ZBHHz zBHkHz i STOP a3 OCT 94 14 35 08 5A A r FILTEF H 1 ER Hz LA Channel 1 af 2 HORMAL d 5 A 56 6 za L e IA A FHOH 73 1 a TACH 8 8 SPEED B amp I4 HL H P S z s Z Q k HZ dot crs INITIAL STAT MHs Spec F TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 2 Press the byTIME B key A bTIME indicator will appear on the middle left side of the display This indicates that the Autostore by time is activated j So uridE lr OFF ESTIME delta endztar note i SPL B did n C O V6V6V6V T T T T TTTT T T EXPONENTIAL 18 La z z bT IME Dual LIHEHR ZElHz zBiHkH i RESET 44 OCT 94 m7 485 12 B ME A RN aR A L K ae ei a FILTER H 1 BR Hz LAS i Channel 1 af 2 HORMAL i d 23 8 A 34 7 3H X z eA FO a kk te ea IITTDP TCU FHOMS Sd 3 da TACH 8 8 SPEED B amp z E dotted crsr A z a IMITIAL b 4TRCH TACHSET F TRIG FILES 3 Press the delta C key to set the desired time interval S between successive spectrum storages 6 04 QT MR Gee ne gelta endstor note I i SFL B ABBA 2B S Rc dat age cay cele dec wt dere lee eng ae ED e Ue UE de em amp ed EXPONENTIAL 18 BTIME Dual LINEAR zBHz zBkHz La i RESET 64 OCT 94 m7 48 12
103. left arrow key until the dotted cursor is at the left side of the display as far as it can move 6 Next press SHIFT and the H SCALE E E E 13 43 85 AXIS YARIS U SCHLE U OFSEK H SCHLB H OFSET FFTZ00M SPL B BREE aii EET 017v 121017 N R NR N R R NR A R N m EXF HEHT IHL 1 E Dual LIHEHRE 2 amp 8Hz zBkHz RESET 12 OCT 94 13142158 ro a a o e E ie AD o A ne fa cap ir O CES HR RET E AT E EO Si FFEL He HRREHS HSHH 1 Auto SrEectrum D 1 d 15 3 B 12 6 B EIE A E A a NNN RR TRE IK RR RRR NNN N R RRR NR RRR RN NN N 8 Baze Frealulec HZ Ae AA LOC TACH BH SPEED B B AA REE Z nM 1 2500 6000 Z A dotted cram IHITIHL Nc STOP McWAIT McREPT Battera HORMSET HORMALZ SetREF UusREF 7 The 1 A 2 B 4 C and 8 D keys will expand the display by the associated numerical multiplier Press 2 B to expand the display by a factor of 2 B JAN Bl146 29 1 C 2 4 a 1iB e A o SELECT Harizontal Scale SPL B GRRE BY ee RER ETE EEEEEEEEEEREE EXPOHENTIBE 148 LIHEHR 2BHz zBkHz RESET ar JAN 98 01 455 23 7B EE IIIS IS311 sh a Sy ie iy ER R R R AD A 5 FREQ A ARRRHS HSRH Auto 5rEectrum d 15 3 Ee 127 4 51A vc ses V oo es eect ans cave oi boot e alo ou ae ete O Base Frea uencu HA ABBA REM TACH B B SPEED 9 9 Ban u EA dotted crar IHITIHL 8 Press EXIT to return to the filter menu EXIT When making FFT measurements windows often need to be applied to the data to prevent a phenomena called spectr
104. new spectrum to the respective reference spectrum mE 24114133 SARKIS YARIS U SCHLE U FSET H SCALE H OFSET SYSINFO SPL 1 2256 38 r o R css lols San es k CONS INS ONT LOL ans E Sa E DONO de K MCN te ir R Sa m CES ie Pe A a d EXPOHENTIAL 178 Dual LIHEHE 2BHz 26k Hz TOP Z FEB 98 201131239 FILTER 14 25 8 Hz L 3 de Channel 1 one z de DIFF Ph 83 2 Sn 28 85 REM TACH 6 8 SPEED B a ponru McSTOP HCWATT McREPT MCST T GaneREF bet Ree cs REE 4 Press the SHIFT hardkey then the vsREF P key to return to 6 T Ln SHIFT a normal display format 2815 zB 14 33 ARIS YARIS U SCHLE U OFSET H SCHLE H OFSET SNYSIHF SPL 1 2258 BE r A a Gao E O ky dy 7172 EXPOHENTIAL 1 B i Dual LINEAR 2B8Hz zBkHz i STOP 23 FEB 98 28 13 29 rar A VE cin wy v d FILTER 14 zh Q Hz Leo Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 49 2 A 81 7 aig wo om omo as moa n c n n ci 2 o l Ol o orn BIFF Fh Ba z n za 05 PEM TACH d d SPEED HB B t z E z dot fed crar DUUE UZ Mc STOP MCWAIT McEEFT McSTART SameREF SeLEEF Changing from a logarithmic scale to a linear scale 1 Press the SHIFT hardkey to enter the shift menu SHIFT 2 Press the Y AXIS B key to change the y axis zu iE 24114133 AKIS W As1IS JU SCALE U FSET H SCALE H OFSET SYSINFO 5 EE E aa AO SPL 1 2256 290 r AA R A NT ATTULIT EXPOHENTIAL 1 3 Dual LIHMEBHR 2BHz 26kHz STOP 23 FEB 98 28 13 29 r RR RAR RR A A FILTER Hld r A Hz
105. o E A ob Uk A ER a a E Oy Sn ll We a RR a HA GHz H4HH 1 Channel 1 of MAL 95 al 6 dv ut Voda Sah Obs R DARE we ri e NR A A LUE V R TACH 6 6 SPEED B d FA rm Z 00mM I SHAH a doNLed crar IHITIHL ba THCH THCHSET F TEIG FILES e 2 Next press create A e Q 15 T zz 18 18 create RECORDS disk T Format Menor je create E Disk Used A Memoria Free 229984 Disk Free RM ZZ BI SE DATE TIME DATE TIME SIZE bTACH MEMORY 7 delete rename mem delete rename 3 Typeina name for the measurement file such as DCMOTOR 15 OCT 225155 dc A E D E F a Memoria Used n Disk Used Hemor Free 229984 Disk Free Enter new name MEMORY L MAME DATE TIME SIZE HAME CATE TIME SIZE bTACH MEMORY F 12 12 e rta 3200 training book Page 13 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM EXIT EXIT 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Press EXIT to enter this filename Notice that the filename and creation date and time appear in the MEMORY file win dow 15 OCT 22 26 6 create RECORDS t k t format e 3 dis Memoria Used alz Disk Used Memoria Free 22599584 Disk Free EOR ISK DATE TIME MAME DATE TIME SIZE ANN MEMORY delete rename menm delete rename Press EXIT to return to the Autostore menu Notice that the filename appears at the lower left corner of the display This indicates that it is the active file where measurement records will be s
106. od ake Yaka ate SE tae A vk amo a EXPOHENTIAL 1 Dual A WEI GHT STOP 19 FEB 98 12 41 25 oh N we RE SE Wee ie Ae i Ge Re ISTITUTI FILTER 14 25 8 Hz Les Channel 1 of 2 MINIMUMS d 35 7 B 54 4 AH A abd Rai K PDT PT BIFF Ph WET Ens REM TACH BH SPEED 4 8 S z z R z H datted crar F UPC FIO usEPHM STAT Mx Spec F TEIG SETUF FILES HUTOSTE e rta 3200 training book Page 19 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 4 To view the MAX during the runtime press MAX D You T will notice the MAX spectrum on the left This is a spectrum D showing the maximum value that occurred in each 1 3 octave bin during the time of the test The overall MAX value on the right of the display is the summation of all of the MAX bands 15 FEE 1z 45 81 H RMBL Lea NIH MAK SEL DISPLAY note DETECTE Gs SPL 11 1958 148 r fa at at ar 06 vR A A A O VO TTIE od ERXF HEHT HL 1 1 Dual H HT STOP 19 FEE 33 12 41 25 r KR TR a R R E R a CUR rm A lou FECE ES FILTER 14 75 Hz L Channel 1 af 2 MBRIPLPP d 182 1 ts n DIFF PR 2WGT ne TACH 8 8 SPEED B a xp ec EM SAY NA ciate H Macr UN F FC ROOMS WSRPM STAT Hx 5Fec F TRIG SETLIF FILES AUTOSTR 9 Last to view the SEL during the runtime press SEL E You U will notice the SEL spectrum normalized to 1 second on the left and the overall summed SEL value on the right of the display e m M ette ueri ee Ne ere SFL
107. of 2 HORMAL d i B 23 14 AB c p b AS r BIFF Fhz vm 1 5n M dd ua mE l TACH BH SPEED B B dotted crar ROOMS 5 For the RT60 autostore measurement you should select a very short averaging time Type in 0 05 seconds as shown z FEB 13 31 23 ad r Pe oa m on s oh o3 3 3 2 3 2 3 aom m as NONI gsm onm n DETECTOR TIME aBaaeae ad TH JJ 1 FEPEHT LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz RESET 26 FEE 38 12 35 25 JA r wd PM u a j IE o c Mu PI ER S NTN FILTER 14 zh A Hz 5573 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d Bu B 23 4 e DIFF Fh 28 1 5n dd REM g l TACH 9 9 SPEED Bg d dotted crar ROOMS 6 Press EXIT to enter this value Notice that the established EXIT detector parameters appear on the right of the display z FEB 12 35 18 LIH S LIH R EXP BT ESF ET LIH AU TIME 98 7a RESET 20 FEE 98 12 pj 5E JA r M E M EE NA ZE Eve a PE FILTER 14 zh A Hz Tr 3 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d t 23 0 To DIFF Ph z 28 1 Sn dd REM l TACH 8 8 SPEED H G dotted crear ROOMS 7 Press EXIT to return to the STANDRD analysis menu EXIT 8 8 e rta 3200 training book Page 9 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 8 To enter the Autostore menu choose AUTOSTR P zA PEE 13 33 52 H RMHL Lea MIH MAX SEL CISPLAY note DETECTR SPL HERE TH PAE ee EO a a LIHEAR FEFEAT BH Em Dual LIHEHR 26Hz 14kHz RE
108. plus the sound power at each 1 3 octave band 13 Z 86 53 35 Power F2 P I F3 HPP FA FHU note Hate dE ell ZE m LIHEHE SINGLE ZE 2690 Dual LINEAR 26H2 18kH zd Hz wr PONER 1 d 13 6mm Ed des DELE Z A r9 9TdBrFlNW Q HZ E A tted crar F2 EB 1 28a Hz 1 do AITEST S2JJE SPART S AREA S EDIT CitF4 2 Cz Fd 2 Fi 17 Press CURSOR and then the left or right arrow keys to move the cursor to view the sound power levels at the other 1 3 EXIT octave bands Press EXIT 18 To generate sound power totals for an individual part of the job press S gt JOB I older note 13 JAN 81 80 51 Power F2 P I F3 HPP F4 FHU t i Hote dB EM SH RRR RR RRR NN NLR ko OKO C Llc X x C E LIHEHFE SIHGLE Dual LINEAR 28Hz iBkHz ET 13 JAN 92 A 18 FILTER amp 24 250 Hz LS BB Fonk 1 45 13 0mm d 159 41 103 B nde SH xR RR RR WS N N N N N EEE E G 3d Ede Hz 32 E Eber JOE TEST REM BRT TTTTTTT Nene i ates MEM li ciis e Ra dox on A ed ac ee ss RES Y L IS 1 25 8 Hz mna Hz 10 OkHz E A doatted crar HITEST CGD S2FHET S AFEA S EDIT CitF4 2 Czx Fd z F3 FZ 11 29 e rta 3200 training book Page 30 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 11 30 19 Next press SS EDIT L Use the arrow keys to move to the desired Part field Enter the name of the part for the sound power calculation a3 gua 16 42 87 Power F P I F3 HPF F4 FHU
109. press R S to halt the measurement RESET ee 22 05 30 A SPECT C SFECT FER COHER TIME DISPLAY note DETECTA H S LEF E ae WX ETE R R al Gav Sui ae Rd O ae ja A A Ges E Pe A ITE COUNT MANUAL ACCEPT STOP ar TAH as zz Bd 38 ro ie Wik Vo R R v R vv VE ARRE RR A AR NNN N a N ERE Hi 1z258HBHz ESHH Auto Srectrum D 1 d 39 6 B 65 4 Inr EID TT E ine ine ges ne ae cae Ghee N a l R A i as i a E Base Frees uenc y Ae AA 162T td 29 Chz Bd REM s TACH H H SPEED a d pi E 5 theo level IHITIHL ALTERAN BUWNORM FEE T TEIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 39 You are now viewing the input autospectra for channel one It should look similar to the display above Notice that the CH2 spectra is somewhat flat across the frequency band rolling off at the higher frequencies Press CH2 to view the channel 2 autospectra PARE 22165154 H SPECT C SFECT FER COHER TIME DISPLAY note DETECTE i RR Rc ea KORR E E AA noh xn Ch E A A ADR ue cn Rd G B4 106 O AN En HAHLAL HCCEFT LIHEBR lHz l8kHz STOP ar 2 35 22164138 Bis u al Ea cn o LLL Base Freauenc a 14x td B aei TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 6 an E 5 r JE tris level IHITIRL HLTERH BWHORM Pick T TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 40 Now press TIME E to view the response time history for U channel two The signal should decay to zero as does the E measurement in the display below ud JAH 22 85 25 H SPECT C SPECT FER COHER TIME DISPLAY note DETECTRE
110. press the EXIT key to leave the FILES Menu Bi OCT 19 24 18 create RECORDS G disk T Format Memor Used 2048 rk Used Hemor Free 259042 Disk Free Eno 5 BI TIME HAME DATE SE ATE TIME SIZE MEMORY mem delete rename delete rename The file name PLANT that you selected will appear on the lower left side of the display This indicates that this is the active file and all subsequent data storage will be placed into this file oo ea nate a Ba 15 55 85 WORMAL L MIH MAH SEL DISPLAY L DE TEC TR i SPL 14 5568 TH A Me Se d Gi eR a a nay RR Rec ee EXPOWEWT IAL 18 Dual LIHEHR ZAHz zbk Hz i STOP 63 OCT 94 15 38 42 54 oa LEM A ae et ES ae 1 ow FILTER 1 lt ZH Hz L Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL i g i B 66 2 za p On o PHONES 63 2 eb al TACH 8 8 SPEED H H S S Z Hl ek HZ dotted crar PLANT STHT Mx S5rFec F TEIG SETUF FILES AUTOSTE e rta 3200 training book Page 21 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Renaming a file 1 Press the FILES O key found in either the Main Menu or the System Menu 2 Select the file PLANT or a desired file to be renamed by using the T C or 1 K key a OCT 15 59 37 create RECORDS A disk t format Memoria Used zada isk Used Hemor Free 25545 Disk Free MEH FY gt DISK HAME DATE TIME SIZE MANE DATE TIME SIZE MEMORY 7 delete rename men delete rename 3 Press the rename J
111. program the beeper func tion 19 FEB 17 23 11 HOHE ALL KEYS DVEF EKK ae EMEN Beeps KEYS DUER ERROR SFL B HHHH ro A A RR E R ER LRR A CD ea de RR ae ee A a Dei CS 6 EXPOHENTIAL 1 8 1 InFut 1 LINEAR 2BHz 26kHz RESET 13 FEB 338 11 63 36 JB m oras 7 RC deb m Ue cm s cows e e as d OG C ee E TRT de ELSE EE OR A cR UR Ue e hee E F ELI Ae OEHEHZ HSHH 1 HORMAL Channel lo x S dec 3545 E 6 6 REM g TACH HL SPEED B El HA m Z 0M 1 TA 009p Z A DC outrut IHITIHL NONE A No beeper signal at all ALL B Beeper signal for a key press an overload condition and an error condition KEYS C Toggles On Off the beeper signal for a key press OVER D Toggles On Off the beeper signal on an overload condition ERROR E Toggles On Off the beeper signal on an error condition e rta 3200 training book Page 13 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Operation of the Noise and Signal Generator Opt 10 amp Opt 11 Option 10 Noise Generator The Option 10 Noise Generator has the capability to produce Pink noise or White noise and control the mode of operation of the noise It is accessed in the System Menu 1 Press the NOISE J key from the System menu Ton 411358143 Chanls STHHDED CROSS IHTEHSY UNITS FILTER CLASS J Hobe SPL B BBR 136 E CEL RR R E AS MENU E AR RR NOEL cae ia ch E EAF HEHTIHBHL 1 DIRECT LINEAR 28 28EkHz
112. ra RE RR wi cL E RA AE DEATG E umu EPA ds E EE FHONS 28 5 LOC TACH BH SPEED B B 75 8 H SGG Hz 15 DL Hz dotted crar ABCD I O HOISE IHFUT clack COLOF SETLIF FILES RESETS The softkey selections at the bottom of the measurement dis play relate to the unit name that we would like the measure ment amplitudes to be displayed The softkeys K thru P are undefined fields You can assign any unit label that you like to each of the six keys Let s assign the unit label G to softkey K To do this first push name B i SPL B AB ab EXPONENTIAL 1 8 Input 1 LINEHE 1Hz 1 kHz RESET 18 MAR 94 17 86 64 TE Sue obs io So oie Qa we wk O boa a RN he ce NA Wk EE a A a Se I O AL FREQ HA ARRAHZ HSHH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 15 3 B 12 8 L TACH 6 8 SPEED 4 4 AAA z H I 2506 AA Z A datted crar UIEi dE oU SPL Under under undet unde Under Under You are then prompted to select one of the six undef name keys Press undef K Push units Lo name SPL B ABBR EXPONENT L HL 1 2 Ineut 1 LINEHE iHz 1HBkHz RESET 15 MAR 94 175975 51 FREQ 8886Hz HSAA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 15 3 B 12 86 18 MAR 11 07 56 118 TACH 6 8 SPEED 4 4 dotted crsr undet under Under You will now see a number of alpha character choices above and below the display Since we will be measuring vibration in G s type in the
113. records that are measured will be stored in this measurement file After turning on the power to your RTA press FILES O eu 11 17 50 WORMAL Lea MIH HAs SEL DISPLAY note DETECTE SPL B OBH an mR ER TM Doce mene ce ig onde A M pude iren ete ETE Tc dins EXPOWEWT IAL 18 La WEIGHT RESET B3 MAR 95 Bi 18 55 TA EE lll x DE RP RADA FILTER 14 75 48 Hz Leo Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 25 A 777 E GEL pie O E A O TERE E M a ah RT E PHOHS GT L l TACH 8 8 SPEED H H Si und Cee eee ee ee ee eee ee eee ee eee d v 25 5 Hz Sab Hz TG GLC HZ H Ned crar IHITIHL FOM usRPHM STHT Mx S5rFec F TEIG SETUF HUT STE 2 Within the files menu press create A to make a new data Q file A 15 MAR 16 83 33 FECORDS T disk t Format Hemor Use M Disk Used Disk Ho Drive Installed Hemor Free PAZO Disk Free HEMOR 55 D ISK MAME DATE TIME SIZE HAME CATE TIME SIZE MEMORY delete rename mem delete rename e rta 3200 training book Page 2 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL EXIT Setting up the FFT 3 You are now being prompted to define a name 8 characters or less for the data file For this example type in VIB1 To do this press the softkey above or below the display To access alpha keys beyond P press the SHIFT hardkey once then the desired letter 4 Numeric entries are entered using the numeric hardkeys on the keyboard After
114. rect angle or a hemispherical dome around the test item e Sound pressure is measured in 1 3 octave bands at each of the microphones e Sound pressure level is averaged for 8 32 seconds Sound Power Setup using the Sound Pressure Method measurement surface Tv microphone positions e rta 3200 training book Page 7 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Sound Power Calculation for Hemi Anechoic e Step 1 Calculate the total averaged sound pressure level 2 Lp 10 log 1 n y 10 0 1 Lpi n the number of microphone locations Lp the total averaged sound pressure level L pi the sound pressure at each microphone e Step 2 Calculate the total sound power level Ly Ep 10 log 5 5 Lw the total sound power level S the total area of the measurement surface S the reference area 1 square meter Sound Pressure Method pros and cons e Advantages good repeatability standards are well documented instrumentation is relatively inexpensive and easy to use e Disadvantages anechoic and hemi anechoic chambers are very expensive field measurements are difficult or impossible testis very time consuming setup is very time consuming background noise air conditioning voices etc may invalidate the test e rta 3200 training book Page 8 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM
115. subcomponent of the job Again press the various alpha soft keys to create the part name that you wish Then choose EXIT to enter the part name EXPONER L a Dual LIHERE Z AHz 18kHz i RESET 12 JAM 32 21 15 49 18 FILTER 24 258 Hz LS pD isi auis d 19 42 pe 32 mI ee A F l g 141 An JOB TEST REM PART at ECRIRE ELE KE edu ae duod hada k E dinde ce AREA 25 8 Hz HE Hz 16 8kHz E A trange 20 RITEST I J k L M H D P e rta 3200 training book Page 23 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL B Press area K to enter the name creation field for the area name K 12 JAM 23 18 14 POWER INTHSTY QUALITY SPL P UELDC DISPLAY note DETECTR I Elmo A paga SH PA a Ge Merce cas a a joe EXPOHENTIAL 18 Dual LINEAR 26Hz 18kHz RESET 17 JAN 98 71 15 43 18 FILTER 424 2506 Hz L73 A we INTENSITY 1 d 13 Bmm d 19 41 AS SH al at ib lah ar ave aa RS a ole o R 0 Ge tee E eae TE F lJ dE 21101 tmm l JOB TEST REM PART FRONT JA ko I ene CI AFEA 25 8 Hz 392 Hz 18 8kHz z A panae a RITEST job rari area prates meter SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 6 The area would be a subcomponent of the part Once again EXIT press the various alpha soft keys to create the area name Then choose EXIT to enter the area name H B aiam a L 1 8 i Dual LIHEHRE ZzBHz l8kHz i RESET 12 JAH_99 21 15 49 18 FILTER 24 z258 Hz L 3 A e INTEHSITY 1 d 13 8mm i 13 44 JZ SH
116. than 15 dB for the measurement to be deemed acceptable 11 26 e rta 3200 training book Page 27 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 6 If you wish to continue the sound power survey first store this initial measurement to RAM by pressing KEY B on the K probe or the STORE hard key Before beginning the next measurement change the name of the area by pressing area K 13 ah BES 355 ZZ POWER INTNSTY QUALITY SPL P UELOC DISPLAY note DETECTE Hote dBaual lt A OBEH T uder iO o LINEAR SIMGLE zb BHAA Dual LINEAR zBHz 18kHz STOP 13 JAM 98 905 33 17 oe fe FILTER 24 255 Hz Les rr QUALITY 1 d 13 8mm 1 3 dE 2H RARE RT R R R TR R AE CAS a RR uae Yee Se dee ca Mano din Se T ATR VR Lota wah avon ay lt n CATR es A JOB TEST REM PART FROWT 5H oe O IRA VEB NR ES ERA A E NEN A AS E tits N o Xd HEEH F IHTi1 H Hz z A Ek Hz dotted crar AITEST PLS meter SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 7 As you did earlier type in the new area name using the alpha soft keys 13 a BEE 37 5 32 A E C D E F B H AREA POINT dea 28 0009 NE a lll SLE ZA ABBA Dual LINEAR 28Hz 1BkHz STOP 13 JAM 93 99 325 17 A gB FILTER 24 258 Hz L 3 QUALITY 1 d 13 6mm d 9 dB VIII z 1 111 ARE JDE TEST REM PART FRONT VIII ARE POINTI artesi p DUMP E er Then press EXIT to enter this area name If the surface area
117. times are 0 1 to 3 5 seconds Highly reverberant or reflective rooms such as a gymnasium or a tiled bathroom have longer sound decay times Setting up the RTA for RT60 measurements 1 From the System menu press STANDARD C and Chanls A in order to activate a single channel measure ment 19 FEB 16 08 17 Chanls STHHDED CROSS IMTEHMS UHITS FILTER CLASS SPL A BABA atr r NA def CCS ET E ce OE UE eee EXPOHENTIAL e 1 Dual LIHEHE ZBHHz ZB kHz RESET 13 FEE 98 16 65 45 TH r E V o VE O E O RT TN A R E E DES vli VES See oe FILTER 14 25 Q Hz L 1 n l dE HORMAL A DIFF Ph 52 28 Sn 2 4z REM i TACH HL SPEED A El 25 4 Hz Bae Hz zA HE HZ datted crar IHITIHL 1 0 35156 53EH IHFUT clock COLOR MLS FILES RESETS 2 Since RT60 measurements are typically done in 1 3 octave W bands press FILTER G to enter the filter menu G 19 FEB 16599 17 Charnls STHHDED CROSS IMTENEY UNITS FILTER CLASS JR 16106617 cene ze cms g SPL B GRRE 3H E ES EXPOHENTIAL 1 48 Dual LIHEBHR 2BHz zBkHz RESET 13 FEE 58 16 85 45 TA A CPI I EE o O EOS FILTEF Hld 25 8 Hz Les Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d z3 H A 34 3 54 EEE Mp SL LLL BIFF Fhz 7 5 Ens 2 45 SED TACH B SPEED H B 230 6 Hz Boe Hz 20 B HZ dotted_crsr INITIAL 1 0 315 GEH INPUT clock COLOR MLS FILES FESETS e rta 3200 training book Page 3 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM EXIT 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 3 Choose 1 8
118. tion menu H 28 FEB 12 30 43 NORMAL Lex MIH MA SEL DISPLAY note SPL B em TH r a Sue Mas a Cen d usas a EN sine cis a s tum tale rais Vs A No un sae Calle ed CS dl ube ir fa eae aj PA v EXF HEHT HL 1 8 Dual LINEAR Z26Hz 16kHz RESET 26 FEE 986 12 29 56 JA r NOE FILTEF 14 75 8 Hz Er Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 8 m2 23 8 3A r aL AE A A NT RO E D BIFF Fhz z8 1 Sn dd FEM TACH H 4 SPEED B 4 15 o A A E O a N N s z z dotted crar ROOMS ROOMS uzEPM STHT Hz Spec F TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 8 7 e rta 3200 training book Page 8 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 3 Choose LIN R B to select linear repeat averaging SPL EB BEBA 79 r M W T R M iuc TEEN N A WO T T RT Q nal R IN JL URS ee URL ku ERXF HEHT HL 1 E Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz RESET zd FEE 98 12 23 56 JA r VoU dub al han yas Mat Gem Pe Urge REA ROA NR FILTER 14 zh Q Hz Er 3 1 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d B 23 4 SH r iit detent RIN ae R LA could aie set eH R E a ota ale Uic ak a UR oars tal ae O RT eine tae 44 DIFF Phz m 1 n dd REM l TACH 9 9 SPEED Bg d dotted crar ROOMS 4 Press AV TIME H to establish a linear repeat averaging time H zA BBS 12 35 59 LINH S LIH R EXP BT EXP ET LIH HU TIM SPL 6 0000 TH url p ll X D IM PE ne O eee NE A LINEAR FEFEHT A 2554 Dual LIHEBR 28Hz lB8kHz RESET 26 FEE 98 12 35 25 54 X Z O M c FILTER Hld 25 D Hz a4 Channel 1
119. uses velocity imparted to diaphragm by sound pressure to move a coil through a magnetic field This induces a current proportional to sound pressure Basic Acoustics LD HOW A CONDENSER MICROPHONE WORKS Sound pressure deflects the diaphragm which causes a change in capacitance between the diaphragm and electrode backplate Change in capacitance is converted into an electrical signal by maintaining a constant charge on the electrode via a polarization voltage Advantages good acoustic sensitivity good frequency response low self generated noise low sensitivity to mechanical vibration Disadvantages fragile diaphragm easy to damage susceptible to humidity Basic Acoustics 4 6 e rta 3200 training book Page 7 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL L NEAR FIELD AND FAR FIELD Near field the distance from a noise source less than 1 wavelength of the lowest frequency of interest away from the noise source or 2 times the dimension of the test item Difficult to make measurements in the near field Far field the area beyond the near field composed of the free field and reverberant field Basic Acoustics LD FAR FIELD Free field the area between the near and reverberant field this is the area where measurements should be made this area is characterized by a 6 dB dr
120. you have typed in VIB1 press EXIT 12 MAR 16 84 34 H E D E F G Hemor Used reS Disk Used Hemor Free 202420 Disk Free Enter new name MEMORY DATE TIME HAME DATE TIME MEMORY F Notice at the lower left corner of the display the VIB1 file name appears This indicates that measurement records stored in the future will be placed in the VIB1 measurement file 18 MAR 16 06 13 NORMAL Lew MIN MAX SEL DISPLAY note DETECTR E SPL B aaa ae EE R KTR a E 17 clc EXPONENTIAL 18 Input 1 LINEAR 28Hz zBkHz RESET 18 MAR 94 16 51 35 re R 90 N memo ER x oky m EVE UE UM UR CU Rr VKV M dm OE R R R GR EUER VE m K dm R NT EIC RRR R R R L R FREQ AHAAHZ H4HH Channel 1 of 1 NORMAL d 3 2 ES 21 1 pa i ake fie Ue BA Z Aap ooo ae hs cae A A E cine oat ae tal ae ts SR A ARS R ad as dale Ga tee tae eB E LOC TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 8 GEN BABE 00m __1 10600 0066 Z A dotted_crsr UIEi ROOMS vsRPH STAT OHx pec F TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 1 The next step is to configure the RTA to acquire single chan nel FFT data First press SYSTEM Select Chanls A to enable the single channel capabilities of the Model 3200 e GLS 525 dL Chanlz STHHDED CROSS IMTEHSVY UNITS FILTER CLASS SFL B ma 138 p LLL TD M xL ILC I ii EXF HEHT T QL 1 2 DIRECT LIHEHR 2 amp 8 zBEkHz RESET 17 OCT 94 1 58 10 115 A IL ME Il FILTER 14 25 A Hz Leo Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 81 3 A 3 7 J4 TII LC LA Lu E IE PHOHS 5 5 E TACH
121. 00 line FFT 800 line FFT 19 FEE 17 43 13 1 loct 1 3oct BB IHITIA lona short reverse SPL vat 5664 EXPOHENTIAL InFut 1 LINEAR Hz Zak Hz A oo z Lhannel 1 of 1 HOR d 47 9 n B TACH 8 8 SPEED B a datted crar j FTZO0M WINDOW BASE Ed 2 f e rta 3200 training book Page 8 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 2 8 RECT A HANNING B FLAT C ZEROPAD D IMPACT E EXP 2 F EXP 4 G EXP 6 H 2 Press the Window N key to select the desired time weight ing window 13 n 18 43 13 1lrloct 1 3act lona short reverse SPL 41 5688 ro 2010 A NR N N RR K RR N RRR K N NR N NR R K RR RRR R K N EXF HEHT HL 1 8 Input 1 LINEAR 2b6Hz 24kHz STOP 19 FEE 98 _ 17103103 ARR RR RET e cece A N iy E AR d A a ae Sea a FRE Ae Eb Hz H4HH Channel 1 of 1 NORMAL d 4 3 B 85 8 REM TACH BH SPEED HL E datted crar 166line 299 1 1ne 466line S6bline EET ZOOM N WIDOW AASE Bd BB IMITIAL 3 Press one of the following keys to select the time weighting window 19 FEB 17 05 59 RECT HANNING FLAT ZEROPAD IMPACT EXP 2 ExP 4 EXPOS l SPL B AABA TE DUPLI cae San xc tat Ter fds wep Pda dei Abs ASA OE vba EA E A ARA Sop E SET cee can ata Se EXPOHENTIAL 148 Input 1 LIHER 28Hz 28kHz RESET 19 FEB 95 17 54 15 B Tc Tcr a A We ee ee TTIE 71220272025 FEEL AA BARRAHAZ HSHH Channel 1 of 1 NORMAL
122. 00 training book Page 10 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 1 Press t Amin C to enter the minimum tach delta entry field 15 S 21 51 12 t scale t sran Ganin De amas l t inrut C al SLUFE HUD Tach inFut jack OW B mid ZE o O O Rae ed RBT RER Gi Ja Gecko 3 EXPLUHEHT IAL 1 Ad bTACH Ineut 1 LINERE 1Hz 1i kHz RESET 15 OCT 94 28 11 27 44 UE Ue ode A E A A a A e xy GET Jm N RR FREQ DD ARARAHZ H4HH Channel 1 of 1 NORMAL d 95 2 E 71 9 NN xe TACH 8 8 SPEED B amp Bn GREE 00m 1 DEBE 02006 dotted crar IHITIHL s scale s sran s amin s a4max RADAR RADAR m 2 Type in 20 RPM as 00020 0 to establish this minimum delta value 15 d zi 51 47 AMINIHMLI HAHA t B didi ZE owe A CB dn VU A Rs V OK cm v ce a V Dye Tel des er Um N m a B DR A we E Um N EXPONENTIAL 1 Ad bTACH Input 1 LINERE 1Hz 1i kHz FESET 15 OCT 94 28 11 27 44 cT FREQ HA ARRAHZ H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 95 2 71 0 ED G va RA a TTE EOE l TACH 6 6 SPEED H H ab dotted crsr IHITIHL 3 Next press t Amax D to enter the maximum tach delta entry field mm m pun cl Fi e LH KA E Fi ct l ri U m m M T a ce L a E x G a T Z l n m SLOPE HUD a inrFut jack z0 Ode We a Is De S D TNT ME D DC kc ak Smeg E cnl WIUEOOAS A fa ante qw CORE gs Dec de dence ca H E cae A UE EEXF HEHT T DL B B
123. 05041 MA B sum SETUSER nati SPL 2 8588 at ER ro A Tr EE EH E Channel Z of Z HORMAL d 45 7 ri DIFF Ph 54 7 Sns 22 22 TACH 9 9 SPEED B d dotted crar EHF i Dual LIMEAR 2BHz Zz kHz l STOP 23 FEB 98 23 22 44 NN MM FILTER 14 25 8 Hz L Z DOOFUS 2 Dig VET 4 S M Alpha characters A through P will appear across the top and bottom of the display To select the rest of the alpha charac ters press the SHIFT hardkey and O through Z will appear A e flashing cursor will also appear in the middle of the display this is where you can enter the desired note A3 OCT 15 88 43 A E C D E F H EXITl done CURSOR J delete RAHGEl newline SPL 1 7458 EXPONENT IAL 1 8 Dual LINEAR 2 amp 8Hz zBkHz STOP m3 OCT 94 14 35 88 FILTER 1 88 Hz L73 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 15 7 57 3 PHONS 64 3 Loc TACH B A SPEED 4 4 INITIAL I J K L M H np 3 Begin entering note TEST 1 in the text field If you make a mistake entering the text you can highlight the character by moving the cursor with the PREV or NEXT keys then press the double arrow CURSOR hardkey to delete the wrong character If a note has been previously entered and you desire to mod ify or delete it and start new press the SHIFT CLEAR hard keys and the entire text field will be erased ready for a new entry e rta 3200 training book Page 10 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MAN
124. 0ct B to activate the 1 3 octave band digital fil ters of the RTA Choose short g or for the short response time choose reverse H zd ice 12 11 89 lrioct lona short reverse i SPL A Em 148 r rw AR TX EN E ERXF HEHT HL 1 8 Dual LINEAR ZzBHz 1BkHz 1 RESET 26 FEE 98 17 00 45 SH r We dca Gar Mont MR AA eae RT oa EA gs SO ET A i Map Tap EE R LR o ROTE RT Ora EN T d FILTER 14 25 Q Hz L 1 ed lr 1 on ie r EB UU DIFF Ph 65 9 Sn 6 85 REN a TACH d d SPEED B 4 5 8 Hz 630 Hz zA BLC HZ dotted crzr IHITIHL 196 l 1ne 26bline 466line 20991 1ne FFTZOOM WINGO BASE Ed 4 Press EXIT to return to the System menu Creating a Measurement File E EB Now create a measurement file for the measurement records that will soon be acguired 1 Press FILES O to enter the files menu o 16 85 18 HEhanls STHHDED CROSS INTEHSY UNITS FILTER CLASS SFL EB Ela aa r E fe sas Tote cay da tev eh o gop at Dah NR O O CET o e fas an rin s S RT TRE AR AL EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 Dual LIHEHE ZAHz zbk Hz RESET 19 FEB 98 16 65 45 TH r A A A 5 R 0073107 oa v n VM CMU Ge NT RBT ie ee es ae a eae e FILTER 14 75 8 Hz L Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 23 H 34 9 54 r E a E VCI DEL piu SE AB Ses Hee ADR MR EX QC dah E E dE cane AAA Jaren BIFF Fhz az 5 n 7 45 REN a R TACH d d SPEED B El 25 4 Hz 6360 Hz zH BHEHz E datXed crar INITIAL I SIG GEH IHFPLT clock COLOF ML S FILES RESETS 2 Press create A to create and name a measurement
125. 1 SH Hz L i Channel 1 of 2 PARDAL r d T E uotis LM ba eee A PHOHS 54 3 l L TACH 5 8 SPEED 4 6 S z i z dotted crsr ESTACH TACHSET F TRIG FILES INITIAL The message END TIME XXXXXX XXXX along with a flashing cursor will appear on the upper right side of the dis play The END TIME indicates how long the measurement will run Upon reaching the selected END TIME the ana lyzer will stop the measurement B4 OCT 87258 ZE 118 w RL Ur okt ue dw sues age dee ciel fee a2 omo der v Sa Meal ee RR d Ue Tae EDO RADI Rm EXPOWEWT IAL 1 8 Dual LIHEHE 2 amp HHz ZBkHz RESET 64 OCT 34 875 465 1 2 p c RA A A RR te es SA FILTER 1 SH Hz L o 1 of 2 ST r DN OSP L O COA S VE ee PHONS 54 3 E TACH 8 4 SPEED n H dotted crsr INITIAL 6 Using the numeric keys of the analyzer enter the desired EXIT value in seconds for how long you want the analyzer to store data Then press the EXIT key 7 Press the EXIT key to return from the AUTOSTOR menu EXIT e rta 3200 training book Page 29 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 8 Press the R S key to begin the Autostore The message RESET R S Recalling an Autostore Autostore in progress will appear on the upper right of the display ad OCT 8752582 NORMAL Lea HIH HR 5 COLS ELE dE k a a b isa DE sv cuu Siva eo NO NA A AR RT
126. 1 lona short reverse I SPL B anas 148 KR TRU TOC D 24 R a UE AE DA qu irons dores quic O EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 i Dual LIHEHE ZzbBHz z kHz i RESET 12 JAH 93 13 55 53 ai a PEE L AR E AA ic FILTER 24 z756 Hz Leo i S Channel 1 gt z Pb r BE o E a O R AN DIFF Pns 85 8 Sn 7 84 I REM ag l TACH 9 9 SPEED 0 9 z z s Z dotted crar IHITIRL 16Gline 266line 4 line SBBline FFTZOOM WINDOW ERSE Bd Press EXIT to get back to the System menu Next we need to select the high and low pass analog filters For this example we will set the high pass filter at 20 Hz and the low pass filter at 10 KHz To do this press INPUT peu 15 57 82 Chanls STHHDED CROSS IHTEHSV UNITS FILTER CLASS I SPL B anas VEA iat k ifr dried a B EXPONENTIAL 1 8 i Dual LIMEHR 2BHz 26k Hz i RESET 12 JAH A8 13 55 53 BB ee on B FILTER 24 250 Hz Lez i a P 1 Brus Doe EE aa duc E pep E AN DIFF Ph 68 8 zns 7 88 EE TACH Ha SPEED Bg d z doatted crar COLOR MLS FILES FESETS s s IMITIRL 1 0 Sia GENC INPUT D lock 11 13 e rta 3200 training book Page 14 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 6 Then select 20 10k N to activate the 20 Hz and 10KHz fil o JA ters N 12 M 28 18 23 HORMAL Lex NIH MAH SEL DISPLAY nate DETECTE SPL 6 ca OOM PRO E US rp AR S dd EXPONENT IRL 148 Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz RESET 12 JAN 93 19 52 53 BEIC Doce des ae ie aca ha k KA Gp ah andy S
127. 1 3 octave band measurement in the receiving room and an RT60 data measured in the receiving room Following is a procedure to determine the Transmission Loss and STC of a partition wall between two adjoining rooms You will use the RT60 data that was just acquired as the receiving e rta 3200 training book Page 22 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL room RT60 All that needs to be done at this point is a SPL mea surement in a source room and one in a receiving room Setting Up the RTA for Sound Transmission Loss Measurements 1 Press SYSTEM STANDRD C to get back to the SYSTEM menu SCREEN SYSTEM 2 Then EXIT to the Main menu EXIT Press AUTOSTR P to get back to the Autostore menu gt o al 11i49 23 NORMAL Lea MIH HB SEL DISPLAY note DETECTA Hate SPL AVERAGED Bh r t wanes Se dab Go cael AA NE A el cw cL 7 Cue les cus NO Sat Seat cuca cn END I kecu ES Yes See et A LIHEHFE FEFEAT DG bTIME InFut 1 LINEAR ZEHz zt kHz RESET T 94 15 82 54 By ve aI Se ON N IE II E E S O E FILTEF 37 5 Ell Hz L Channel 1 of 1 vzTINE d BZ A 65 5 dt consc oco so o OU FHUH 2 aT TACH Ha SPEED B d s Eod Hz A k HZ Ee A C ROOMS FOM uzREFHM STHT Mx Spec F TEIG SETUP FILES Turn off the Autostore option by pressing OFF A baTIME delta endstor note a I u m ea e m KA 2 A G tl hi Hote SPL WERAGED Bi Gee A
128. 10 dB range difference Press EXIT to leave the INPUT menu a 15 Press EXIT again to enter the MAIN menu EXIT 16 Next press DETECTOR H to set up the measurement aver X aging method AF JAM B1 53 55 A SPECT C SPECT X FER COHER TIME DISPLAY note DETECTR SPL B ABA 188 at AO VON I o AE ja zl cus RON SOR E Ran Sent tay cies rip ES TENIS VELIE a Slee o SU EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 ua LINEAR 1Hz 18kHz RESET AP JAN 98 01 52 26 Se Wd aia A A eh dl do Sina VB Ol RD OEC lg CIS M e E A a iy Sa E RAS amie ID Sats Gad Sa a aw FREQ He ARARAH ESHH 1 Auto SrEectrum D z l 11 3 E 17 7 eh E MK NA KK NO Cab OKA QU LE qi VES AE SEL A CC AS AA Gap KO RC I Ns dis tt SENT SETTE Baze Freaulec HZ He BRB REM TACH 8 8 SPEED 8 8 HA BEE 00m 1 Iz4e6 8758 E A kabange 1 INITIAL ALTERN BWHORM P lt oR T TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 10 20 e rta 3200 training book Page 21 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 17 Select COUNT M G averaging B aiam m c I Gl m an E F m r E Ln H a m Ax m m x n a O e i 4 Ln C elk jm O ag Z x gt oo L c H m SFL L C EXPOHEHTIBL 1 Lia LINEAR 1Hz iBkHz RESET Hr JAH 35 015 525 ZE Bg ecce NER o uU a O E FREQ QG A ARRHRAHz SBH 1 Auto Srectrum D 2 i 11 3 17 7 eh WIE T114 A A AR A AA a Se N Baze Fre uenc y A EE REM ct TACH 5 0 SPEED B HA
129. 14 75 4 Hz rs Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 6l A 73 AA PHOWS 8388 5 ma TACH B H SPEED Bp n 5 H BAe Hz 15 QC HZ dotted crar ABCD 1 0 HOISE IHFUT clack COLOR SETLF FILES RESETS 2 10 e rta 3200 training book Page 11 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM EXIT 2 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Select the desired baud rate by pressing one of the keys J P The message RS232 XXXX BAUD SELECTED will appear on the upper right of the display The XXXX indicates which baud rate you have selected 19 OCT 82 41 06 S2BBRC KEY A KEY B Beerer RSi INT IMPUT M SPL A 0608 115 aa CE Je UR a ER M RC AD e Gm Rd O DAD ONT RH EE ES Se E EXPOHEHTIHOL DS JA O FILTER 34 14 AkHz Ls Channel 1 of 2 NORMAL d 44 1 Za 58 4 V mehr hor or hon mon hoa a no ror ror n n rn T FHOHS T2 Loc TACH 8 8 SPEED 0 8 Bae iH sh er ABCD 690 1288 24608 4588 9688 19206 Press the EXIT hardkey to return to the System menu The analyzer is ready for communication to a peripheral device I O port control Key A and Key B control U A The most common use of these keys is in conjunction with the Larson Davis Model 2260 Intensity probe which has two keys thumb and forefinger on the handle These two keys can be programmed such that a press of each of these keys simulates a press of the softkeys or hardkeys on the analyzer To program either of these keys perform the fol
130. 18 a I l OCT 94 AS AS 25 14 25 6 Hz LS l 1 Z HORMAL Press the EXIT hardkey the display sequence will begin immediately You may repeat the display sequence by press ing the DRAW 1 D key 16 OCT 935975 as DRAW 1 DRAW 2 START EHD CELTA ar rs CRED eae s SPL B 158 ESP OHEHT TAL 1 5 PREAMP LIHEBR 29 29 HZ RESET 16 OCT 94 SS 055 25 FILTER 14 25 8 Hz s Les Channel 1 of 2 NORMAL WATERFALL PLOT START Baal EHD nga DELTA B i OFF INITIAL e rta 3200 training book Page 33 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM EXIT 3200 TRAINING MANUAL There are two formats available for the presentation of the waterfall plots In the two dimensional format produced by pressing DRAW 1 D as described in this step the spectra are simply overlaid one at a time without any offsets in the vertical and horizontal directions In the three dimensional format produced by pressing the DRAW 2 D key an offset in both the vertical and horizontal directions is added to each successive spectrum curve pro viding perspective to the view EHD DELTA SPL B 1558 DHEHTIBL 1 5 CT LIHEAR_ 28 28kHz E F 13 OCT 54 905 235 ae TER 14 25 6 Hz Les bannel 1 of Z HORMAL ERFALL PLOT ET 6641 TA 6001 fdas ae E a oM Rus eg 0506 LEE r b H gum Hz 16 8kHz A OFF H Hz INITIAL 5 Press the EXIT hardkey to return to the RECALL Menu If you are finished vi
131. 1Hz 18EHz RESET 15 OCT 94 28 11 27 44 A A A AA A A As A FEQ B ARARAH H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 95 2 1 4 A uu l TACH 8 8 SPEED H H AA GREE Z nM 1 Sana BARA dotted crar INITIAL amp scale s sran s amin z amax RADAR RADAR m X AVG is used to average out the errors in the tachometer signal that might be caused by DC jittering DC jitter is caused by vibrations on the surface of the device that the tach signal is coming For example someone is using an opti cal pickup to capture a tach signal on a rotating shaft which 12 11 e rta 3200 training book Page 12 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL is vibrating due to looseness imbalance etc You will not use the X AVG feature for this exercise Please refer to the 3200 User Manual for more details on this feature You have now established all of the parameters necessary to EXIT perform the byTACH Autostore measurement Before you begin the test let s create a measurement file where the data records will be stored Press EXIT to return to Autostore menu Creating a Measurement File 1 Press FILES O to enter the Files menu 15 SR 22117 1 OFF ESTIME delta endstor nate B 0000 ZE EE ROD NER qoe Rue dE E CaN Nine CEN ay REP Nen ES M AAA AS a RUP EO ten ZENU EC IE BS EO VE PEDE EXPOHNENTIAL BTHCH neut 1 LIHEHF iHz l5BkHz E T 15 OCT 94 17 1 46 Wc a E day Ao
132. 2 1998 11 00 AM Chapter 11 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Setting up the Model 3200 for Modal Testing 10 16 Setting up the Model 5200 ainia 10 16 AC OUSUC InIB nSmy ini 11 1 Why use Acoustic Intensity 11 1 Sound Pressure versus Sound Power esse sese 11 1 Sound Power ANIOS Vi o E EEES 11 2 Acoustic Intensity What is 107 000 eee 11 2 Advantages of Acoustic Intensity esse eee 11 2 Acoustic Intensity measurement hardware eee eee 11 3 Acoustic Intensity nuts amp GTS A Ra Tao Ranar T 11 4 iridBouE PE PO S P RO O O O tara 11 4 Prequency DOMA ars o een tienes eek vla 11 5 Measuring Sound POW CF i n 11 5 Sound Pressure Methods ani iR oer e o ye rur etate ever 11 6 Sound Power Setup using the Sound Pressure Method 11 6 Sound Power Calculation for Hemi Anechoic 11 7 Sound Pressure Method pros and cons uuuusse 11 7 Why Use Acoustic tease 11 8 The Acoustic Intensity Probe disease e ra ere gras 11 8 Intensity Probe Spacer Selection nersierseitannan ena 11 9 Spacer Errors High Frequency sees eee eee 11 9 Intensity Probe Directivity Pattern eee 11 10 Measurement Considerations sss eee 11 10 Measurement Techniques ados 11 11 Fixed Point or Scanning cerrar ie 11 11 Setting up the Model 3200 for Acoustic Intensity Measurements 11 12 Selecting an Exponential detector eee 11 14 Microphone Pse
133. 2 u s E a MANUAL RE RHEM OFF level F 23 S68 Hz 45H A 5 14 6658 EXPONENTIAL 14 8 Dual LIHEHRE ZAHz zBbkHz STOP gai OCT 34 15 25 56 FILTER amp 1 BA Hz Lea Channel 1 of Z HORMAL F PHONS 64 4 TACH 8 8 SPEED 8 0 Trigger e rta 3200 training book Page 14 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL One step beyond the highest available frequency band you will find Spectrum Y which means that the measurement will trig ger based on the level or slope of the overall level c Press the level P key to input the desired trigger level Upon pressing this key the following message will appear on the upper right of the display AS ot aes iere ei Ce ee d dud da TRIGGER LEVEL 080 5 E t I rar A A R e Rs AAA AAA EXPONENT IAL 1 5 i Dual LINEAR ZAHz zbik Hz i STOP 63 OCT A4 15 25 56 s s jE s s s s s s s s s s s ss sss ss sss s sP sss sss s s sss ss sss w 2B FILTER 1 au H Les T anre T TRIG Ch 1 1 af 2 HORMAL i d 16 4 E 56 5 zal EEEE AC AE ns PHONES 64 4 LOC p TACH H H SPEED A A E Trisaser INITIAL Enter the desired level using the numeric keypad and press the 3 Press the R S key to ARM the analyzer B3 OCT 15 31 62 380 RESET R S r 23 506 Hz 6026 a SPL B aad p S s RR A ABA b CE o bov va E FOHEHTIAL E 1 3 LINEAR z Hz kHz 63 OCT 94 15 38 43 SH Gs A Pee es eine a ar Sa AA es
134. 3 source room spectra Notice that the word AVERAGED appears on the right side of the display next to SPL 25 B8 16 48 11 W Fall E AWE E MAK E SUM KEEP Hote SPL AVERAGED _ LINEAR SINGLE Sere Dual LIHEBF OHZ PA Hz STOP 23 FEB 98 18 19 66 FILTER 14 25 8 Hz L 3 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d i 0 Ls 81 8 TACH 8 8 SPEED B a hrec all data REM k EIS H Hz E ROOM S DELETE 13 Press the STORE hardkey to save the data to memory Note that this new averaged spectrum is stored in the ROOMS file as Normal record 8 23 FEB 11 13 18 W Fall E AWE E MAK E SUM KEEP 188 r she daly Tule Gat fb AAS SE AKO SEP Sap wer RA BN AEN Vins DELE dis AE Sana A CES ERU URS ToU E Vd ER RE E UBL UMS fe DP d RECALL Hormal B Hate SEHD SPL AVERAGED LIHEHR SINGLE zB 20690 Dual LIHMEBR 2BHz 26k Hz RESET 23 FEE 98 18 15 FILTER 14 25 8 Hz L 3 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 47 5 A 81 8 DIFF Ph 98 4 512 57 46 REM E TACH 9 9 SPEED B d H Hz E hrec all data ROOMS DELETE 14 Now let s average the 3 receiving room spectra together Press B AVG B 23 FEB 11 13 17 W Fall E AWE B MAK E SUM KEEP FEB s Ta ere T TC RECHLL Hormal Hate SEHD SPL EFAGED LIMEAR SINGLE ZD HAR Dual LIHERE ZBHz zBkHz 93 10 19 56 ESET Z3 FILTER 14 25 8 Hz L 3 Channel 1 pe Z HORMAL d E DIFF Ph 98 4 Sn 57 46 TACH 6 8 SPEED B B hrec all data REM zak E z ROOMS DELETE In the field on the
135. 5 a TACH 8 8 SPEED H H s recall data IHITIHL Press the numeric keys and horizontal arrow keys to enter the range of record numbers of the autostored records to be averaged together Press the EXIT hardkey Upon pressing EXIT a single averaged autostored record will be created and stored into the next available record number The word AVERAGED will also appear on the right side of the display indicating that this autostored record is an aver aged record Press the B SUM D key to select the desired records to be summed together o 10 54 68 U Fall B HUE E MHx B SUM J usTIME KEEP Hote SFL BABA 36 ESPOHENTIAL 1 2 bTIME Dual LINEAR Z BHz 2bBk Hz STOP zd FEB 98 18 44 65 FILTER 27 BDG Hz Lea Channel 1 A HORMAL d E E DIFF Fh 4 1 Sn 18 63 REM TACH B B SPEED B B z z 3 recall data DUUE UZ DELETE H Freu A Mest The message RMS SUM 0001 0002 will appear on the upper right side of the display zd FEE 205 42 15 Last H EN SPL B 1888 JA M EXPOHEHTIBRL 148 bTIME Dual LIHEHE ZzAHz zHk Hz STOP zd FEE 98 26 16 15 hererorrrrrrrrrrrrrn rnnr nrne enra FILTER 14 25 8 Hz Lez nn 1 ri am O DIFF Ph 65 8 Snz 5 66 TACH 6 6 SPEED Bg d recall data 27 DOOFUS e rta 3200 training book Page 35 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL EXIT O 0 EXIT Press the numeric ke
136. 5 295 Dd FEH n Ln 24 251 Hz 1 166 rre Lmax H hZ 16 Yee Lmin 38 3 28 Yo LEG 2 5 4 ZA 67 0 MEAN 61 4 reo TAH 6205 STDEU 9 6 n 6 9n Zn UHDER Bi A 250 6 Hz 638 Hz zBH BkHz Z A Ln cursor POPCO STO TBL RECL TBL MEG TBL H CHHHHEL 1187 To un hide a trace select the trace with the asterisk next to it and press the HIDE F key The will disappear and the hid den trace will re appear Storing the Ln Trace Prior to storing an Ln trace it is recommended that a descriptive note be attached to the trace for future reference See Annota tion of a Measurement in Chapter 1 1 Press the STORE hardkey to store the data associated with amp the statistics parameter table presently displayed The mes STORE sage STORE Ln Trace N will appear on the upper right side of the display 17 FEB 85 47 13 ON OFF S Time dE SPAN E ZTAT LL AR FEDRAN on 0s n d PRICE INE v ERST ui REN QU EL Ed TS GTORE Ln Trace SPL 11 6668 mor om m on n m n n n n n n n n Be f n n m rr RR ko on or om on oho hom on oh om os m om m on m on on EXPUNEHTIOL E 1 Input 1 LINEAR ZBHz 24kHz STOP 1 13214 A FEE 35 88 39 Dd Soc ow cw Ao x x x wx xo xoderv e cs ane coal pee R fae aed 67 CX CE ES ie we e E NOU CUN XO Ee E E n Ln zd Hz 1 H Fre Lmax ad 4 z 16 Yes Lmin 38 2 ocu 1608 Cui Gee ces ES DT Ee SETTE a ed Ha n No Es Mae ac se 3 zu Yoo 72 5 bed 56 67 0 MEAN 6g d ra 620 STDEU 3 5 5 l amp UH 520 UHDER Ln cursor POPCO
137. 5 53 A SPECT C SPECT FER COHER TIME DISPLAY nate DETECTE Hote zk F LE A4 BG ES ee ee 1261858 Goo og Sat E san OE dh v COUNT SIHGLE 4 i DIRECT LINEAR 1 3 2kHz RESET 6l JAN SA 66 24 13 au mra c c ia ee TIME 34 BH625mS ESAA i lHieiahted Time D 1 i d 45 8rYr E 39E ar n n n n n I sa Base Fraauenmnca EOT us TACH W B SPEED H H ed cear BB BABA gb0M _ 1 152 6972 E A dotted c SHSBERM HLTERH BWHORM P lt oR ALIAS T TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR A3 SEP 18 17 36 A SPECT C SPECT X FER COHER TIME DISPLAY note DETECTR REAL Hobe 15 LEF COLIT SIHGLE DIRECT LINEAR 1 3 2kHz RESET Al JAH 98 005 245 1 3 TIME 24 8625m5 ESRB ad lleiahted Time D 1 d2 5 856 E B4E Base Freauency L TACH d d SPEED a Ba z H 1 A dotted crsr SMSBEHHM HLTERHM BlWwHORM P lt oF SETUF FILES AUTOSTR 13 zc 18 84 45 H SPECT C SPECT FER COHER TIME DISPLAY nate DETECTE Hohe 25 BF Ad AR SAA e d COUHT SINGLE 4 DIRECT LINEAR 1 3 2kHz RESET Hi JAN ZA 66 24 13 SERTE A SE FREG 170 Z125H Esha Base Er aueness TACH 6 8 SPEED dat ted TRIG SETUP FILES AUT on ALIA HLTERH EUMORM P XR 31 an BHIBSI15 A SPECT C SPECT FER COHER TIME DISPLAY note DETE TE Hote ik Gs Ad COUHT STIHGLE 4 DIFECT LINEAR 1 3 kHz RESET Hi JAN 34 66 24 11 FEE HA ABBBHzZ ESHH Auto SrFectrum D z d 36 5 Base Freauencu TACH d d SPEED a A Bd A dotted crer SMSBEA
138. 65 20 Press SYSTEM to get back into the SYSTEM menu SCREEN SYSTEM 10 21 e rta 3200 training book Page 22 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 21 You now need to define the measurement units that we wish to work with Press UNITS F to enter the UNITS menu Note that Channel 2 is selected ar AER 61 56 10 Chanls STHHDED CROSS INTENS UNITS FILTER CLASS g SPL AA 1588 A H ee te A COUNT MANUAL ACCEPT 1 Dual LIHEHE 1Hz 1GkHz RESET Ar JAN A8 61155134 BB E Ee drei Suh Sts oe QE DONC ST 08 Fan UA TE WEE BORD Z i SEAT day CET ORO E obs DE CES SALTED SEC ESAE CERES d dui UTI A Aa Y bu Pott id UNI i Auto Spectrum qe 11 3 E 17 eh amp Jus RI Ue e wo A A A Ue Ct Sa a AO CO CES V Tao PCT CI CONT Dac cuc dio CAD CES Cer V ACC OO cl Ge E Baze Fresuenc y Ae AE REM TACH HL SPEED B El HA m zm 1 Iz246 2758 E A datted crar INITIAL 1 0 SIG G3EH IHFUT clock COLOR MLS FILES RESETS 22 From within the UNITS menu press name B so that you can create the label for the response channel accelerometer We will use g s oe 1 56 36 SLOPE SAME E UMIT Hoize F ml cal W cal level SPL SIS 106 i aR a RN NN N RRR NK NR NR RR NN NR A RR A a LR R A COUHT HAHLAL HCCEFT Dual LIHEHR 1Hz i1BkHz RESET Hr JON 98 81 55 34 ea at X dR RA XXV RN V SRY Ube cage seco io aw J RR K al VES le E wm casti Faber val By dee NE Pose vate NUS an K N FREQ HB AAH
139. 8 8268 TIAL LIHEHR 1Hz 16kHz l OCT 94 15 42 36 VEL C FREQUENCY e T 1 12 500 9 6 1 25 888 2 8 1 ore 300 4 3 1 29 BBE Pad 1 62 300 Da 1 268 mid B8 SHE x freauencu DCMOTOR STATUS HIDE TACHSET E ORDER CHAHHEL FREH The 6 freguency traces will be redrawn on the display PEN 06 now contains the 200 Hz freguency band PENS 01 through 06 can be modified in this fashion to display any fre guencies that you wish 16 SET 15 45 87 SLOPE alevel TAGBARS SPAH VIDEO X H8IS note WIDTH SOURCE IS TACH iir ERPUHEHT IAL 1 64 Input 1 LIHEBR 1Hz 18kHz E 6 OCT 94 15142136 C FREBLUEHC y eS T Kek Kh Ked Kek Kk Kek me CHSCHn CH Cy Ios n zt 17 rm Aras e 3006 DCMOTOR STATUS HIDE TACHSET B ORDER REDRAW FEH Post Process Order Tracking The vsRPM graphics display also allows us to view orders rather than frequencies in the amplitude vs RPM format The orders for the byTACH autostored data are calculated using the tachometer information that is appended with each of the fre quency spectra that were acquired during the autostore 12 19 e rta 3200 training book Page 20 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 1 To change the display to orders Press B ORDER L 16 SSL 15 453 u7 SLOPE alevel TAGBARS SFAH WIDEO a AsIS nate WIDTH SOURCE IS TACH IHFUT L A 8208 EXPOHEHTIAL 1 64 InFut 1 LIHEHEF 1Hz 16kHz RESET 16 OCT 94 15
140. 9 FEB 16 11 25 SLOPE SAME R UNITS Hoise F mU cal W cal level l SPL B ABA aa prp Ta Se ds RT EXPOMENTIAL 1 E Dual LINEAR 26Hz 20kHz RESET 19 FEE 98 16 85 48 79 r R R Ste RRR i il ECCE cl A dee KC dc ANE ELAR GA RO NO A SCC e CR c e C TRT E c FILTER 14 Ze H Hz L 3 E Channel 1 SL z Ea e r 5A Nat ut r nn no n E O E K BIFF Ph 52 8 5nz R 2 43 REM TACH 8 8 SPEED A B 25 6 Hz 638 Hz ZH Bik Az dotted crar INITIAL dE vU SPL under under undef under under under The message Push setup to name will appear prompting you to press on the undefined softkeys K P that are labeled undef 114 Mus VIET tee hak orale uis gc VSV ve spa Sah KM ride TEX Stan dde Gara uar E URBI A nde lat er AE sine vel mi E RR SNS Wee lass 0 PUSH UNITS T HAME SPL EB ABB BE r NS Gi ET IK A dea SR a ee Ade Cate er SS BTR RD A Me RR N NN EXPOHENTIAL 1 E Dual LIHEHE 2bHz 26k Hz RESET 15 FEE 98 16 13 19 rar TE qq RR RR RA NE RR FILTER 14 zh Q Hz L 3 1 v Channel 1 v Z a He Se KT o E NE to DIFF Ph 52 8 Sn 2 43 FEM TACH Ha SPEED B d 38 i Tas das Gay ae Mile yet Vo OS Vo ta AO e TE E darc ate a RRR ces car TE vertat Ges dak se del Z OSV aa 9 INITIAL Under undef under Under under Under e rta 3200 training book Page 3 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL EXIT EXIT T Press one of the undefined softkeys to be named The mes sage Enter unit
141. AHZ ESHH Huto Spectrum D 2 d 11 3 Ee 17 7 eh RR A a RR ts RR ATI RA S Gennes LR Wee cea ta ARE Baze Freauenc z HB AAR REM t TACH B H SPEED B AA dad 00m _ 1 I2456 2758 E A dotted cram IHITIHL dE pl SPL G ET 5 undef undef under undef 23 Press one of the undef undefined UNITS keys such as Gee W undef K and type in G BF age Ez 0 25 ma H B C D E F G H Enter units name G Se 100 RN T RN RRR K NNN RRR RRR N A dn NN NTR Say N R R KR R N NN N R R N COUHT FIBIHLIFIL HCCEFT Dual HEAR 1Hz 16kHz RESET ar JON 98 61 56 54 ea K A vain Su A v ebay daw das E ats v fae he slab UR ap a ga E BO saw ge cal ta thy are up aaa cio ats actua ema v Mo p FREQ HB ARRARHz ESHH Auto SrEectrum Z d a A E 29 0 eh EMITTE Baze Fre uencuz AA AAA REM d TACH d d SPEED B AA dad ZO nM 1 I246 2758 E H dotted cram INITIAL I J K L M H P 24 Type EXIT to enter this label EXIT 25 Press G K to activate the label ar ERE 20143146 SLOPE name SAME R LUHITS Hoise F mU cal U cal level i SPL CITTA dd MANUAL ACCEPT i EHE 1Hz 16kHz RESET HY JAN 98 28 43 04 a H r oo Den p M PL um MULT AA E A A FREQ He HRORRHS ESRH Huta Srectrum d B d B 29 48 eh ETT IM AO de OR un R ae atk Ee O Gc et a R Base Fresuenc y A AE REN TACH H H SPEED Bg d Bi A EH datted crar IHMITIAL dB FU SPL Under under under under Under 10 22 e rta 3200 tra
142. AL Viewing the byTACH Autostored Data 1 To view the individual spectra that were autostored during CLEAR the run up press RECALL RECALL 15 OCT 22 53 37 W Fall B AWE E MAX vszRFHM KEEF BE Star Es Tach 1 a B 6268 EXPOHEHTIAL 1 64 Inrut 1 LINEAR 1Hz 1i kHz STOP 15 OCT 94 22 21 38 x AG BBBAHZ H4AA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 78 3 TACH 366 2 SPEED 4 4 trecall data H Freu A Next Press the right arrow hardkey to increment through each of the captured spectra 1 Another interesting way to view the autostored data is to uti Q lize the waterfall display capability of the 3200 Press A W FALL A to enter the Waterfall display window KEEP Hote EXPONENTIAL oh 1 54 Inrut 1 LIMNERE 1Hz 1 kHz STOP 15 OCT 94 22 21 38 FREQ AG BBBAHZ H4AA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 47 5 24 6 TACH 666 3 SPEED 4 4 te brec all data H Freu A Next 2 First you need to establish which spectra to show in the dis play You do this by establishing a start spectra typically the E first or 1 an end spectra typically the last or in this case number 113 and a delta You ll set a delta of 3 This means that it will plot every 3rd spectra in the waterfall map Press START E to enter these values c 15 OCT 225 BBS 22 DRAW 1 DRAW 2 START EHD DEL TH por 22 95 22 DRAW I DRAN Z Hote 4 ZE BA EXPOHEHTIAL 64 Inrut 1 LIHEHEF 1Hz 18EHz STOP 15 OCT 225 215 FREQ AG
143. AS Auta Store in FrOooress SPL B 5414 Fa PRA ue A O A e A deed A RO TRECE AO LANE EXF HEHT HL 1 BH BTIME Dual LIHEAR zHBHz zBHkHz EUM ad OCT 94 97552502 5A A ne FILTER H 1 ER Hz L 3 Channel 1 of 2 HORHAL d A 42 46 3H L NOOO o om J MGA PHOHSS Al Z LOC TACH H H SPEED EA 18 PA i AAA E O O ah NI Slee A wok Hz obl D Hz HZ dotted crar IHITIHL ROOMS uskPhH STAT M rec F TEIG SETUP FILES AUT STE When the analyzer has reached the endstore time that was previously entered the message STORE By Time X will appear indicating the data has been stored to the memory of the analyzer The X indicates the record number of this type that has been stored in the pre selected file Any subse quent presses of the R S key will re initialize the Autostore function Ed OCT 67 53 23 H RMHL Lex NIH MAH DISELE bate DETECTE a web a aa entis uova L tay Cav ert EU RR RE AE NE Nur Es ae STORE By Time 3 SPL 18 BREA Fa v RN EXPOHEHTIAL 1 ETIME Dual LIHEHR ZklHz zBHkHz STOP ad OCT 94 Ba7 53 23 SA ko E RA Je FILTEF H 1 BR Hz L 3 Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d A 32 7 KMS a A o a ol oen eos PHOHS 5 5 LOC TACH 8 8 SPEED H H wok Hz obl D Hz Q Ak Hz dotted crsr IHITIHL usREPFHM STHT Mx S5rec F TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR To recall an Autostore measurement you must have the Autostore feature activated on the analyzer See the section Autostore byTime To recall an Autostored
144. AW SPL 24 7154 188 grac LUN ACD NNT C4 E A DO CAD OO ORTU DKL ala A id DD he SK UU NT N cac ONCOL i EXPOHENTIAL 1 48 Input 1 LINEAR 28Hz 20kHz RECALL 19 FEE 93 08 39 04 2A A RT eo a ate Sh A etn A a fa code Ss an ah ee SK aa Bee a AAA FILTER 14 25 8 Hz Les Channel 1 of 1 NORMAL 37 48 A 43 1 AH A AE A AA A A ALA AO DA UD n Ou Du BIFF F 523 4 Ens 7 68 REM B E ELA a m GE e Cw T GEL TD CRI ee a San dee a 48 dm a A aes E elo ES VA aa A THCH 8 9 SPEED gB H POPCO sial STO TEL REL TEL HRG TEL aiai H CHAH EL 9 Press the horizontal keys to move the 120dB range to encom CURSOR pass the desired range of input values for the measurement to be made After you have made the range selection press the CURSOR hardkey to re assign the control of the cursor to the horizontal keys Press the ON OFF A key to turn on the Statistics mode Repeated presses will toggle between on and off The STAT indicator will appear on the left side of the display indicating that the STAT mode has been activated ics 02 17 29 ON OFF S Tine dB SPAN E STAT HIDE CLEAR REDRAW SPL H 2 EB ABB Ry A N bad TAL C MT VRE dj a dalo ds A T o RO Ae d SR A ca A IR R ee Ge ak ee N ae d OR EXP NE TIHL 1 Ineut 1 LINEAR 28Hz 26kHz 15 FEB 5 11 17 BL N NEL Eod H valo cap OE Gare L AR RN n Ln 14 z H Hz 1 ZE ut 6 6 zo Lmin zB H A eee ae ae a E S ape ane 4 3 A En LEG z Hd gH Yeo MEAN Bg d FELT W vov uc EET M r i H
145. AWE E MAK B SUM wsTIME KEEP gh 15 09 49 ran ERE moms nem erm Hate SPL 1 8868 TH fod san ais Ae G mae me E eA sae laid T eng NE ES ESA ad ouem o LIHEAR FEPEAT A M ASA bT IME Dual LIHMEBR ZEHz 18EHz STOP zd FEB 98 15 86 87 54 5 A FILTER 76 404 Hz a4 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 65 84 B 74 8 AB qa TEE BIFF F 90 8 57 S 15 PR TACH 9 9 SPEED B d hrec all data z 524 Hz ROOMS DELETE H Freu A Hext 13 At the top right side of the display answer the prompt for the Autostore records that you wish to have averaged together Since you want to average all 6 records type in 001 006 z 15 25 33 Last H HUERHGE Bagli o a E bisce ees A cel gusta PRK OL O eat et LINEAR FEPEAT B ASAA bTIME Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz RESET 26 FEB 95 15 17 42 zah p FILTER 32 1 68kHz 5 3 Je hannel 1 Bre rj ja za lll l E DIFF Ph 91 2 Sn 34 78 REN TACH Ha SPEED B d x hrec all data ROOMS 14 Then press EXIT to enter the selection Notice that the new averaged Autostore record is dis played and is stored as By Time record number 7 Note also that the word AVERAGED appears on the right of the dis play zA aj 15 26 24 Fall B AWE E MA B SUM 1sTIME KEEP Hote SPL AWERAGED re LINEAR FEPEAT PET bT IME Dual LIHEHE ZBHHz 1BkHz FESE A FEB 98 15 17 55 5H FILTER 32 1 amp BHkHz 583 Channel 1 A HORMAL 36 DIFF Ph 89 3 Sn 38 65 REM n TACH HLH SPEED B El b Hz 6 39 H
146. Acoustics 4 9 e rta 3200 training book Page 10 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 4 10 DETECTOR RESPONSE CONT Fast detector used when measuring noise sound that is fluctuating rapidly has a time constant of 125 ms display updates quickly Slow detector used when measuring steady state sound or when one wishes to average out fluctuations has a time constant of 1 second Impulse detector used when measuring impulsive phenomena such as gun fire rise time can vary typically 1ms decay time 2 9 dB per second Basic Acoustics BASIC SLM MEASUREMENTS RMS amp PEAK LEVELS The peak detector shows the highest peak value for the measurement The rms root mean square amplitude of a wave is the square root of the mean squared displacementsduring the measurement For a sine wave the rms amplitude is 707 times the peak amplitude dB Basic Acoustics e rta 3200 training book Page 11 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL L BASIC SLM MEASUREMENTS LMIN LMAX LMIN is the minimum rms level that occured during the measurement period LMAX is the maximum rms level that occured during the measurement period level dB Basic Acoustics L BASIC SLM MEASUREMENTS LEQ SEL Leq is the equivalent continuous sound pressure level t
147. B 5 8 Hz 630 Hz zB BkHz dotted crar ROOMS ROOMS USR STAT Ms Spec F TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 11 For this part of the test you will use linear single averaging Q Choose LIN S A A 2o EER 16 04 15 uu LIH F EXP ETSEXP BT LIH ALI TIME SPL A aam 148 r Kooca Rr Hed v vide O Ev ust as ae sloh AR VS Slet E o dE SEN v ERXF HEHT HL 18 Dual 1 LINEAR 26Hz 26kHz 1 RESET 23 FEE 938 09 56 54 OU FILTER 14 25 8 Hz Leo Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL UU DIFF Ph 65 9 n2 6 85 REM l TACH B B SPEED B B z z z z dotted crar ROOMS 12 Choose an averaging time 20 seconds for example by first X pressing AV TIME H E 10 05 44 LIH S LIH F ESF BT EXP BT LIN AW TIME SPL B aaga 148 r A ee Ok Qe OK ae Re N NN N N N LIHEHE SIHGLE B z564 Dual LIHEHRE 2bHz 2Z6k Hz RESET 23 FEB 55 10 64 36 SH r AUDIO v u sA ES DR r A RR zah Sly o CIC RTE RR RR On ed K NOME ER R RT 8 FILTER 14 z5 H Hz L Z 1 pots dore NN DIFF Pz 65 9 n2 6 85 REM i TACH H G SPEED B B Z z z z L dotted crar ROOMS 8 24 e rta 3200 training book Page 25 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 13 Enter 20 seconds by typing in the value shown in the follow ing graph DETECTOR TIME gagazza dang 148 r K RR RN RR RKR RN RRR RR NN RR RN N N N RR RR NN RRR O RR RR RR N R NR R R LIHEHFE SIHILE B z564 Dual LIHERE ZBHz zBkHz RESET 23 FEE 55 10 64 36 23 FEB 18 86 54 174
148. BBBAHZ H4AA Channel 1 of HORMAL WATERFALL PLOT START 0021 END 113 CELTA 0624 OFF 12 15 e rta 3200 training book Page 16 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 3 These number should be entered as W FALL s0001 e0113 d0003 15 OCT 22 22 53 SIS TTT cm 20001 02000 20004 SPA EXPONENT LAL bTHCH Ineut 1 LIHEHEF iHz 1BkHz STOP 15 T 94 22 21 33 FREQ HA ARRAHZ H4HH i Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL WATERFALL PLOT ZD oou Ak ee e n n n n n n 8 6 KR START mami EHD 8113 L DELTA p9pd El OFF oCMOTO 4 Press EXIT to enter the waterfall display values and initiate EXIT the plot Below is the DRAW 1 waterfall display Notice that it plots the individual spectra on top of one another Notice how the fre quencies have shifted as the speed increased 15 ST 22157 13 DRAW 1 DRAW 2 START EHD DELTH G 4 5668 v HE see ade aa d os Ee yx vow V GVU V T TT TT T EXPONENTIAL s bTHCH Input 1 LIHEHEF iHz 1HBkHz STOP 15 T 94 22 21 33 E A j T ones car seno eo N rcc n n n n REL BB ARRAHZ H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL WATERFALL PLOT pc EDI udi SM aes START Baal EHD 8113 EE Ut l DELTA BEES GE BEBA OFF OCMOTOR 5 To view the waterfall map in a skewed quasi 3D format T choose DRAW 2 D D 15 OCT 22 58 26 DEHWU
149. COUNT E Al TIME zB 2000 IHGLE zB 20060 LIHEHE 1Hz 18EHz 3 JAN SE AA 11 38 159 3758Hz HSHH 11l af 1 NORMAL 14 1 8 8 SPEED B a dotted crar After 20 seconds the measurement is complete At this point you could choose to save the data print it clear it or take it over again Zoom Processing A very powerful feature of the RTA is the FFTZOOM feature FFTZOOM allows one to apply the full FFT resolution in the current case 800 lines to a small frequency range This is partic ularly useful if one is interested in acquiring detailed frequency information within a relatively small band say 1200 Hz to 1800 Hz With FFTZOOM you can apply all 800 lines of resolution to this section SCREEN SYSTEM 1 Press SYSTEM to return to the main System menu 2 Choose FILTER G to enter the filter menu W A INA ST ae EN I i G zA Bm 14 d i bw RN RRR a 131 RN a NNT NR N O ne a Tae RR NR a d LIHEHE SIHGLE zB mg InFut 1 LINEAR _1Hz 10kHz i STOP H3 JAN 95 66 11 35 34 TE a debe EEEE EE RA AAA AR FFEL 153 3r5 6Hz HSHH Channel 1 of 1 NORMAL g BC Z 18 1 EE ONE AA ll K nA HA M ooo se lm Tcp UE LM A TRCH g H SPEED 5 6 AB m x DG II dotted crar IHITIHL COLOR MLS FILES RESETS 7 15 e rta 3200 training book Page 16 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 3 Before selecting the zoom multiplier first mo
150. DAR RADAR m 5 Type in the scale factor of 60 as 6 000 E 01 15 a 21 45 55 9 909 E481 Pele ETE TACHO SCALE PE KYN RE C C N E R RRR Ra R 75 aS aE JR es eS ae hese E ee A d no TR RO eee we Ret K S EXPOHWEWT IAL 1 Ad bTACH Ineut 1 LINEHE iHz 1BkHz RESET 15 OCT 94 28 11 27 44 RN AE A Ge A as oe A A A A cep DELI ORO a A A A A H AAAAHZ H4HH 05 lof SE Lr m ee eee ROE l TACH 8 8 SPEED B FA HAHA zD UM 1 Sada HANA dotted crsr IHITIHL e rta 3200 training book Page 9 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM EXIT 3200 TRAINING MANUAL As mentioned at the beginning of this chapter you will be acquiring spectra from an accelerometer attached to a plate on a dc motor at 20 RPM increments as it sweeps up in speed from 500 RPM to 3000 RPM The range of 500 to 3000 RPM is our measurement span for the autostore This range is entered in the t span field Press t span B to get into the tachometer span entry field 15 OCT 21 49 41 t scale t t amin ta teinput X cal SLOPE X AUG QST 21249741 scale t sran t anin tuamax t input X ca Tach input jack B dia ZE ek O o O XR DEO O O O RR RR O O O EXF HEHT T DL 1 64 bTACH Ineut 1 LIHEHE 1Hz 18EHz RESET 15 OCT 94 28 11 27 44 BAe a A a aa ae he a NN Ra Y ICE vou de DE a cR OS FREQ Ae BARAH H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 95 2 A m ee EE TACH 8 8 SPEED H H AA maa Z nM 1 Sana BARA
151. E Dual LINEAR 28Hz 2BkHz i RESET A4 OCT 94 87 dB 12 TA wu A S SZO S Bl EZ M E FILTER H 1 z Ba Hz LA i Channel 1 ES ao d oia aca A ds a PHOHS 54 3 l E TACH 6 6 SPEED 4 6 dotted crsr ILES v Z s z bsTACH TACHSET F TRIG INITIAL The routine just explained is for a manual start of the Autostore function The analyzer has the capability to begin the Autostore function automatically by setting a frequency trigger explained earlier in this manual After setting the frequency trigger and activating the Autostore feature press the R S hardkey to place the analyzer in the ARM mode Upon satisfaction of the trigger criteria the analyzer will begin the Autostore and stop automatically when the end store time has been reached 1 36 e rta 3200 training book Page 37 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 1 37 e rta 3200 training book Page 38 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL e rta 3200 training book Page 1 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM Operation Modes Chanls A STANDARD C System Menu To access the System menu from the Main menu press the SYS TEM hardkey located on the left side of the analyzer In this menu you can select the desired mode of operation perform a calibration select the desired filter band wid
152. E KEEP A LE K ferme een RECALL Eu Time gt i oter SPL B 1688 a K Ea TRET cat oat a NO na v A A Cc RRR eX us E A a A ee E e EXPOHEHTIAL 1 78 Dual LIHEHR 2B8Hz 2HkHz STOP B4 OCT 94 23154133 e PME A A en Oe FILTER 14 75 8 Hz LA Channel 1 SA Z SEE d PH HS 33 6 TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 4 trecall data H Freu A Mest 1 31 e rta 3200 training book Page 32 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 1 32 EXIT 3 Press the following keys if you desire to indicate the Start and End spectra to be displayed and the Delta incremental record number between displayed spectra arius 43 64 56 DRAW 1 DEAN 2 START EHD DELTH Hote SPL B 1888 EXPONENT L HL 1 8 PREAMP LINEAR 26 29 HZ RESET 16 OCT 94 03 63 25 FILTER 14 25 Hz i Channel 1 of Z HORMAL WATERFALL PLOT START baal EHD mna DELTA l START E Selects the first spectra in sequence that will be displayed END F Selects the last spectra in sequence that will be displayed DELTA G Selects the incremental record number between displayed spectra Upon pressing anyone of these keys the following message will appear W FALL SXXXX eXXXX dXXXX and instead of pressing each individual key listed above you may edit all the display parame ters at the same time by entering the numbers with the numeric keypad and the horizontal arrow keys 16 OCT 63 05 48 1
153. E A donec aes FILTER 24 254 Hz Lez Channel 1 pore BE Ev a ie aur Lee BEDA KE ara qr e e op TRE a e dba DIFF Ph 62 8 zns 7 88 REM TACH B B SPEED B B dt Kk X CE EOWON WO O X Ok OW X X OA Wox KCEOX a WCXO x X X OX N INITIAL ROOMS vsRPM STAT Mx Spec E Tela C setup FILES AUTOSTR 7 Press the SAME O key to assign the 20 10 kHz to channel 2 8 Press EXIT twice to return to the MAIN menu EXIT Selecting an Exponential detector For now keep the detector type set for exponential averaging and the integrating time at 1 8 sec If the 3200 is not already set up for this averaging option see right side of display do so at this time 1 To set these values first press EXIT Then choose DETECTR EXIT X H to enter the detector or averaging menu H id 28 12 44 H RMBL Lea HIH HAR SEL DISPLAY note DETECTE SPL EB Be 148 ss dod ue T TD Sat RC e 2 o dec ane ihe SRE S ORC ct CS UE O Oe fae ae hake es tao DE tue A dec fe tort UN ERXF HEHT HL 18 Dual LIHEHE ZBHHz 1BkHz RESET 12 JAN 98 19 58 59 asi Acca o o de x REM e eT cac ER FILTER 24 25H Hz Leo etian 1 pts ore r BD ITE a II DIFF Ph 68 8 zns 7 88 REM TACH 6 8 SPEED B a dt O O A Aun oe lo io T s z z E z doatted crar IHITIHL ROOMS uzREFHM STHT Mx Spec F TEIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 2 Select EXP C to activate the exponential detector C 12 JAN 26 15 11 LIH 5 LIH F BT EXP BT LIW AL TIME SPL EB cia A dI
154. E DISPLAY note DETECTE Hotel DRIVING POIHT LEF Qd HT SIHGLE 4 PREAMP LIHEHFE 1 53 kHz RESET A JAN 96 44150114 BA ABRBHz EGHH Transfer Function Hl D 2 d mi PHASE Base Freauenca Ea TACH 6 8 SPEED 4 4 Be AAGA gbOM _ 1 1256 66606 z A dotted_crsr SMSBEAM ALTERM BWHORM Peer ALIAS T TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 10 14 e rta 3200 training book Page 15 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL le S 18 81 15 A SPECT C SPECT AFER COHER TIME DISPLAY note DETECTE REAL Hote DRIVING POINT GS LEF SB Et Jta te AOE ee Mh RR NER ORT TR A UN dm nao Tac Sa ger a Be a cae lie ORT IRI al OS AA COUNT SIHGLE d PREHMP LINEAR 1 3 2kHz RESET HZ JAH 96 604150114 n FA B6B Hz ESHH Transfer Function Hl D 2 d 1 85 E H1 REAL 5A Po Base Freesyency EDE al TACH A B SPEED ALA He HHHH Z M 1 1258 86 Z A dotted_ cese SMSBEAM HLTERH BuWwHORM Pa ok ALIAS T TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTRE i ni 18 81 41 A SPECT C SPECT FER COHEF TIME DISPLAY note DETECTE IMAG Hotel DRIVING POINT 1 e B4 56114 88 G8Hz ESAA Transfer Function H1 D 2 d 5 8rYr E 329 IMAGINARY Base Freauencg ab TACH H B SPEED B B AA HAAG o0mM _ 1 1258 6064 z A dotLed crar SMSBEAM ALTERH BUHORM PER ALIAS T TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTE Fixturing Boundary Conditions e Structures can be tested in free or constrained boundary con ditions e I
155. E TEE 9 H 55H Hz 1 EIE H DUUE US McSTOP McWwAIT McREPT McSTHET dotted crar SameREF SetEEF Ls REF User selectable zoom factor from 1 to 8 User selectable offset Use the horizontal arrow keys to shift the window in multiples of 10 dB User selectable zoom factor from 1 to 8 User selectable offset Use the horizontal arrow keys to shift the window To check the analyzer battery e rta 3200 training book Page 1 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM C HAPTER Basic Acoustics MEASURING SOUND microphone preamplifier power supply instrument slm analyzer chart recorder tape recorder etc Basic Acoustics LD BASIC ACOUSTICS MEASUREMENTS Determine what type of measurements is to be made free field diffuse field s Choose the correct microphone for the measurement free field random incidence Position operator correctly Basic Acoustics 4 1 e rta 3200 training book Page 2 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL LD MEASUREMENT TYPE Freefield measurement outdoor anechoic chamber no reflective objects in field sound is absorbed by the environment Basic Acoustics MEASUREMENT TYPE CONT Diffuse field Gymnasium Warehouse Shower contains hard or reflective surfaces Basic Acoustics 4 2
156. E ZAHz 18kHz STOP 12 JAN AZ 28 23 16 FILTER 24 zad Hz LS Channel 1 of Z HORMAL lt d 114 8 A 3 DIFF Fh 1Bl amp 5n 71 56 REM TACH 6 8 SPEED B a z z g dotted crsr IMITIAL T LIHK 368 1515 1268 3400 4508 3688 19768 7 Press KEY B E to program KEY B on the probe to remotely U store data 11 18 e rta 3200 training book Page 19 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 2 5166 S EXPOMENTIAL Dual LIHEHRE 2BHz l8kHz STOP 12 JAM 35 28 43 81 FILTER 24 z258 Hz Le Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 114 8 A 3 DIFF Ph 101 6 Sns 72 66 TACH B B8 SPEED B a x z i i z F doatted crar IHITIHL T LIHK 60 GDG 1266 Sang 4368 9668 19268 8 Then press followed by the STORE hard key Pressing amp KEY B on the probe will now store the current displayed STORE measurement to the active data file in the 3200 memory 12 Bh 1 66 54 3268F DC out 10 Port KEY A KEY B Beerer ESsli TMT 2 5188 8 8 SPEED B a 3 z i i z E doatted crar IHITIHL T LIHK J 5d 1266 Sang 4368 9608 19266 9 Press EXIT twice to return to the SYSTEM menu EXIT Creating a measurement data file Next we need to create a measurement data file This is the file where our Acoustic Intensity measurements will be stored 1 Press FILES O to enter the file menu P HI 21103142 Chanls STHHDED CROSS IHMTEHS V UNITS FILTER CLASS SPL 2 8168 EXPOHENTIAL 1 3 D
157. EBE 1 64 BTHCH Ineut 1 LIHEHE iHz 16kHz RESET 15 OCT 94 20 11 27 46 A E E A cin 28h AO diis LE A o a de O San e foc Canis oe FFEL He ARARAHZ H4HH 1 Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL g 95 2 1 85 TB eerren LOC pi TACH 6 4 SPEED Bg d pi S dotted crar IHITIAL s scale z zrFan z amin s amax EHDHE f FADAR mi 4 Typein 1000 RPM as 01000 0 to establish this maximum delta value 15 BET 21 52 37 atA L NUN 610404 4 B midi ZE RRR do V j K E E VB Ge ue os Eo es R vod dod v R N TR ie UE vlo Rr at aE TE URS Tes des e KR J EXPONENTIAL 1 Ad bTACH Ineut 1 LIHEHE 1Hz 1i kHz RESET 15 OCT 94 28 11 27 44 A RC RR Um UN ceo COS UN R wae OE ES RU eS ce KL EDU E RT URS PR V ee DUNS NC Roe Kl V V FREQ HA ARRAHZ H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 95 2 1 8 6b G ia emg A et cat Sas aa A RT side E E a ce SRR Re e ee Z LOE ok l TACH 8 8 SPEED H H FA HAHA z H I SHAH a dotted crar IHITIHL 12 10 e rta 3200 training book Page 11 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 5 tinput toggles between the various options for the TACH U INPUT The choices are CH1 CH2 and jack Press E t input E to toggle through the choices until jack is selected 15 ES 21 53 33 t scale t sran t amin L amax t inrFutY cal SLOPE AWG CT 21 53 33 t scale t sran teamin t amax 4 pd 7p PROM a a a O E NO igs Ses ge canes eat cal cal aus
158. EHR 1Hz 16kHz RESET Hr JAN 38 01 51 08 TE Pp ccr ccc ft AVC cdave AR AE TRIAS se K fey JE FR B Aa ARRAS ESHH Huto Spectrum D 2 21 3 Es 7 7 ab EA A A A A A po E E A A A LIT Baze Fre uencuz AA AAA REM EE JME L cms a a A A dto EUR de E AE toa AN L aa EN SERIE L TACH g H SPEED 5 6 B dotted crar DUNS TE arg H Wi3T CUS T l z2Bk Z2zB z k 26 168k SAME a FAME In the process of making impact measurements it is often necessary to establish an offset between the channel one CH2 input range and the channel two input range This is done because the channel two response signal is normally greater than the channel 1 force signal due to structural resonances Select CH2 to activate channel two of the analyzer Next press ARANGE P to activate the range offset er JAN 81 52 17 av 28 u zum v AUTO Rh TEST SPL A AABA 9H Doce A RT o ER RN NN NR E a A D N EXPOHENTIAL 148 ual INEAR iHz 1B8kHz RESET A7 JAN 98 ni 5i B TE at Tee oe 2 A ABAHS ESHH Huta 5Srectrum D d 21 3 Ye mom ah QR AE ER ik RA a Oe cea a Base Frees uencuaz AA AAA REM TACH 8 8 SPEED 6 0 AO E 10006060 1 7 H dotes INITIAL RBT C WBT 1 28k 20 20k 1 18k 26 18k SAME RANGE 13 Then press the right arrow key once to establish a 10 dB off set between channel two and channel one 14 Toggle CH1 and CH2 to verify on the measurement display EXIT the
159. EHSY UNITS FILTER CLASS Hote SFL B eaa 134 DL O eee XI tls K O EXPOHENTIAL 1 5 DIRECT LINEAR 28 28EkHz RESET 19 OCT 94 81 58 18 114 Z o A erase ee o O ee ee FILTER 14 7S Hz L Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d s A 3 7 NN PHOWS 238 5 LOC TACH B H SPEED B n 5 56 H BAe Hz 15 QC HZ dotted crar ABCD 1 0 HOISE IHFUT clock COLOR SETUP FILES RESETS For Octave and Fractional Octave analysis perform the fol lowing 1 Press one of the following keys 2 5 e E e rta 3200 training book Page 6 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 1 1oct A bor octave band analysis Note designation in right hand corner LOC wal oy a ae ABCD 1 3oct B For one third octave band analysis ABCD SPL EXPONENT TAL lona short 1 PREAMP LINEAR 2A 2BkHz STOP A OCT 94 925205 029 FILTER 15 31 5 Hz Lei Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 52 2 A 145 1 TACH H H SPEED H H dotted crar 1maline Saal ine 4661ine saline FFTZOOM IJTH OU EHZE Ed long short L 3 77 hh EXPONENTIAL 1 8 EEHMF LIHEHE 26 2BkHz P 13 T 54 2131 13 FILTER 14 25 8 Hz L73 Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL 47 A 168 8 g of PHOHS 114 7 TACH 8 8 SPEED a a dotted crear 1maline 2601 ine 4 line Ba line FFTZOOM IJTH OU BASE Ed 2 1 120ct zde one twelfth octave band analysis Press either ABCD lona short L J 1266 EXF HEHT IAL E PREH P LI
160. EHTIAL A InFut 1 LIHEHE 2BHz 24kHz ET 15 OCT 94 16 47 62 E Hz dotted crsr 1691 1ne SBR Tus d90 l ine spline FrFTz oM WIKDOW BASE Ed Choose an FFT window You will use a Hanning window for this measurement If Hanning is not already enabled press WINDOWIN to enter the Window selection menu 48 r ipi as de c chc cR CR m Hp do A up TE E dolar k ejn d d CR ue a Decr Te DR RE EN a A Hz LAS Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 23 48 A 34 3 I FHOHS 55 3 Loc E TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 4 15 S 16 58 17 oleloct 9 1 act lona short E SPL B eaa Bh DLL 77 9 E 9 ou ee dd SSK ITE EXPONENTIAL 1 a Inrut 1 LINEAR 28Hz 26kHz RESET 15 OCT 94 16 55 43 de Sr A A e A A A r A AA e Be R R N FE HARAH H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 15 3 2 NSN LOC g TACH 6 6 SPEED H H HA AAA Z o0m 1 16060 mama dotted crsr INITIAL 166line 299 1 1ne 466line S6bline EET ZOO WIADON JBASE Ed Press id to activate the Hanning window eu SPL B did GE QUE d u Be a K ae ic ade n a e ak cus er vut A UD ED RC UR QC COE ode Say Ak den dee di ee p ae ES Al iy oe Sh EXPONENTIAL 1 a Inrut 1 LINEAR ZBHz 24kHz RESET 15 OCT 94 16 55 43 de vr FE A HHAAHZ H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 15 3 2 za M MR a AAA O O Ge a nm gac l TACH 6 6 SPEED H H db dotted crsr IHITIHL As mentioned you will measure our FFT spectra out to 5 kHz frequency Let s establish this
161. EL ras 11 15 Programming remote control keyS ccccccccooonnnccncnnnnnonnnnnno 11 17 v e rta 3200 training book Page vi Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Creating a measurement data HG sss sees 11 19 Normalization of input channels esses 11 21 Naming a Job part and areas ood ei t cda 11 22 selecting a Lincar Detector iuo deer tees ote teer deme uo 11 23 Perlorming a Me asurenicnt 2 isa iei ec eee mda Euer us 11 25 Chapter 12 Autostore byTACH vsRPM Display and Order Tracking 12 1 byTACH Autostore Measurements een 12 1 Setting up the 3200 Measurement Parameters 12 2 Setting the byTACH Autostore parameteTs 0 12 7 Creatine Measurement Ple us ovd eot odas 12 12 Performing the by TACH Autostore Measurement 12 13 Viewing the byTACH Autostored Data 12 15 VREM Graphi S n 12 16 Post Process Order Trac Smp s eodd pe rni otov ond 12 19 Real time vsRPM Graphics usina iii 12 20 k Real time vsRPM Order Tracking 12 24 K yi e rta 3200 training book Page 1 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM BOLD words Introduction to LD Real Time Analyzers RTAs Welcome to the LarsoneDavis Analyzer training manual This manual is designed to help you become familiar with your ana
162. EM O KLUWER DUE n X KC TWO UE E E D DA SRO A OON RS A A O cR DE oT 4 1 Be DOG 281 3BamB RPM A hC CS Bl DCMOTOR STATUS HIDE TACHSET B FREB REDRAW FEH CHAHHEL ORDER Push the right arrow hardkey to move the cursor along the RPM gt axis The amplitudes of the orders at a particular RPM are shown at the right As you did with the frequency display you can eas ily modify the order number that you wish to display in the same way Real time vsRPM Graphics There is a method of acquiring vsRPM data without using the Autostore feature This technique allows you to view frequency and order curves live as the data is being acquired You will 12 20 e rta 3200 training book Page 21 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL repeat the dc motor run up test using the Real time graphics capability of the 3200 1 Press EXIT to return to the Autostore display menu 2 Press KEEP H to get back to the Autostore enable menu 16 DOT 16 49 30 W Fall E HUE B MRX vsRPM Hote B dz EXPONENTIAL 1 64 Ineut 1 LIHEHE iHz 18kHz FESET 16 OCT 94 16 46 59 25 ABBEHZ H4AA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL g 59 6 Z5 Y TACH 566 2 SPEED B a a Eb S recall data OCMOTOR DELETE H Freu A Mest 3 Turn autostore off by pressing OFF A 16 OCT 16 58 04 OFF LbwTIME delta endstor note Hote EXPONENTIAL TACH 366 2 SPEED B a dotted crar I
163. H CHHHHEL x This step will only store enough information to recreate the Ln traces and the Ln values that were active upon storing the infor mation e rta 3200 training book Page 5 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Storing the Statistics Table Prior to storing the Statistics table it is recommended that a descriptive note be attached to the table for future reference See Annotation of a Measurement in Chapter 1 1 Press the STO TBL I key to store the complete Statistics Y Table to memory Note that the storage of the Stats table requires a large amount of memory in excess of 22k bytes 19 FEE 88 51 55 ON OFF gt Tine dB SFAW E STAT HIDE CLEAR REDFEHl 126 STORE Ln Trace 11 6868 1 8 AR R i BS 33 4 Ln 24 Zam Hz 24 piin y a mm Lal m u TI n STDEU 3 amp 9a 520 xUHDEF az Ln cursor H CHAHHEL This step will store the entire Ln Table which will re create the traces and the Ln table to enable you to select different Ln values 1 99 and view the associated dB values cm Recalling Ln traces While in the STATS mode press the RECALL hardkey The mes sage RECALL Ln Trace N will appear If there is more than one record you may use the horizontal keys to scroll through the stored Ln trace records The stored traces will appear on the dis play Recalling a Statistics Table 1 Press the RCL TBL J to recall a statisti
164. Hz E A dotted RITEST 6 Next press AV TIME H L 12 JAM 23 58 06 LIN S LNR EXP BTEXP BT LIN I dBr m2 goma SA RE Gases A ee a OE 0003 E EXPOHENTIAL 1 8 Dual LINEAR z amp Hz 1BkHz RESET 12 JAN 98 23 57 18 18 FILTER 424 250 Hz L 3 111 iE 1 42 13 61 de 19 44 As 32 84 54 K Sete Liu ate K pene ae T R RT ged 1 ERA ZA AE cau agree r eat F lJz 1 dede alii EB Z JOB TE REM PART FRONT at MMC A A ON REE v s 8 O CO a Rupe ds AFE S P UIHTI E da a recrear 25 8 H 588 H 18 8kHz E A dotted AITEST 11 24 e rta 3200 training book Page 25 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL EXIT 7 Enter a DETECTOR TIME of some value between 20 and 60 seconds In general you will get a more accurate measure ment with a longer averaging time Press EXIT to enter this value at p i pM IEEE DECEM Elj gcko n i C O A R I 18 11 gt i SH fis A co ws ie Ee te Hee ose Sa ACD N K date EON AD IRR ae GN a RCE A AE Vel R RT La Gar E RE N Sn A RE F lJz 1 dq dE dei E EE E i JOB TEST FEM i FART FRONT a EN o ME ES DOMI T Pp LE M A RE E E E AREA POINT arre e E Hz Jde Hz 1H 6kHz Zz H dotted crar 8 Press EXIT to return to the MAIN menu Performing a measurement RESET R S Now to make a measurement point the front of the intensity probe towards the noise source 1 Press KEY A on the probe or the R S hard key to initiate the measurement
165. Hz za OkHz E A Ln cursor 9 6 e rta 3200 training book Page 7 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL EXIT PO OW 3 Press the EXIT hardkey The message ARE YOU SURE will appear on the display To proceed press YES A To abort the recall and maintain the present Stats table intact press NO C Upon pressing Yes the new merged traces and statistic table appear on the display u 35 575 99 ON OFF S Tine dB SPHH E STAT HIDE CLEAR REDRAW E He POPCO STO TEL RCL TEL MRG TEL H CHAHHEL 9 7 e rta 3200 training book Page 8 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 9 8 e rta 3200 training book Page 1 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM C HAPTER Modal Analysis impact hammer load cell p to channel 1 accelerometer SMS beam What is Modal Analysis The process of characterizing the dynamic properties of an elas tic structure in terms of its modes of vibration freguency damp ing amp mode shapes E HUE REEF Hetal CELA SIHELE BT Ltt M I I ErZauerea THH H M SPEEL M H enit uq Base 10 1 e rta 3200 training book Page 2 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Dynamic Analysis e Analytical Modal Analysis Mathematical
166. IHITIHL e rta 3200 training book Page 5 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 6 Press the EXIT hardkey to return to the System Menu EXIT Verify the calibration by placing the unit in the RUN mode and turn the calibrator on The level displayed should agree to the level entered when calibrated E 15 28 28 SLOPE name SAME R LUHITS Hoise F mU cal U cal level SFL 31 3488 125 O OA 010127 2711711120111 27 7 10707112111 ERXF HEHT HL 1 Dual LIHEAR 2BHz zBkHz RUM 19 FEE 338 15 28 27 FILTER 24 258 Hz LS L of 2 HORMAL 148 O a d 114 8 H 185 4 Big bes heat A DRE Renee ext S STS Sn 83 62 REM TACH 8 8 SPEED G A E z z S z H dot ted crar IHITIHL dB vU SPL 1l ZEC under under under under Under The analyzer has now been calibrated to a reference level and the reference level assigned to a Unit name You may assign up to 6 different Unit names with 6 associated calibra tion reference levels These names and reference levels may be stored as a file to amp the memory of the analyzer by pressing the STORE hardkey STORE for future recall Calibration based on a Transducer Sensitivity Value This topic will be covered in detail in the Vibration Analysis sec tion of this manual Selection of Filter Type Octave Fractional Octave and FFT To select a filter type press the Filter G key from the System Menu 13 OCT 61 58 43 Chanls STHHDED CROSS IHT
167. INING MANUAL RESET RESET 7 12 EXIT R S SHIFT R S 12 Enter the output level in linear units of your calibrator The level is entered in engineering notation For this example enter 1 0 g as 1 000 E00 This will actually be entered as 100000 Then press EXIT K 5 r56 1T EXPOR m m Ineut 1 LINEAR 1Hz 1 kHz STOP 14 APR 94 16 03 27 ZA wee V a Z FREQ Bl z5HBHmHz HS8HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 4 B E H3 z 4 858ETB3 25 PE Gah Sill thar ay cat O NA A NE L TACH 8 8 SPEED B E b4 E db dotted crsr IHITIHL 13 To check the calibration make sure the calibrator is still on then press R S to run the RTA NN 16 06 36 SLOFE name SAME R UMI TS Hoise F mi cal U cal level a 11 5688 Zaara i See aia EIE EXPONENTIAL e Inrut 1 LIHEHE 1Hz 1 6kHz 14 APF 94 165965 2 2 1 581 wur uu a A Deu Un NNE A dele la fun Gee wacko i de ct Ree 0 FE E Bl z5HBHmHz HS8HH S anne af 1 HORMAL d 4 1 88E B8 3j 1 AdE AA irl EEEE pooo nomow o m n oro a nh n rs n m no rs m ns n n ns n n n a m n n n L TACH 8 8 SPEED B amp E t db dotted crsr IHITIHL dB eL SFL i FT undef under under undef 14 The level at the cursor position should read about 1 0 Z ms This represents the reference level In other words on a loga rithmic scale this would be 0 dB Return to logarithmic dB scale by pressing SHIFT and then Y AXIS B jE l6 aridr AXIS L SCALE U O
168. IT go along 13 JAM 00 49 33 POWER IMTHSTY QUALITY SPL F UELOC DISPLAY note DETECTR i Hote E 20 ABBA SH c 0 c c co B o a LIHEHE SINGLE zB AA Dual LIHEAR 28Hz 18kHz P 13 JAN 98 A 3 18 FILTER 24 Hz Les vy IH TY 1 dz 13 B8mm 588 Hz 1H 6kHz Zz H datted crar Job part area PrertrsP meter SETUP FILES AUTOSTE 12 When you have completed the acoustic intensity test of the job you can use the summing capabilities of the 3200 to generate sound power totals for the entire job or for individ ual parts 13 To do this first press POWER A to bring up the sound power summation menu i Hate dEF ll zB 2090 SH 0o c c on c o c coc c 5 5c o witzig SIHSLE zB mg Dual LIMEHR 26Hz 16kHz T F JAH 38 m d 51 63 34 SH nar ERI ET LTE FolJ Si ztdE 2101 tiim JOB TEST REM l FART BACK at LIMITI OG ERRGG ECL D X r NE AREA POIHTi1 25 H Hz SHE Hz 16 BkHz Z A dotted crar HITEST jab Part area Fr ALz2zp meter SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 14 If you are interested in determining the total sound power Y emanating from your test item press S gt JOB I 13 Jon B1 14 14 Power F2 P I FS HPP FA FHU note E SH 1227111017107 707011 GSE O k de qo al SIHGLE za sl LINEAR 28Hz lBkHz ESET 13 JAM 98 al 18 FILTER 25 315 Hz 1 3 BB Four 35i T d 18 41 Ba RBE lt SH OI A EZ ZA A qaos 34 64 Hz 1 o dEFl JOB TTEST REM PART FRONT at 25 8 Hz 566 Hz l kHz Zz H kdotted crar HITEST
169. IT to return to the MAIN menu then press the SYS TEM hardkey Microphone calibration CH1 RESET R S Next perform an amplitude calibration for the two probe micro phones To do this first loosen the microphone fixture on the probe so that the microphones can be separated Remove the spacer Next insert the channel one microphone into the open ing of your Larson Davis CAL200 or CAL250 calibrator or any other SPL calibrator you have 1 Press the CH1 hard key to display channel one Turn the cali brator on then press R S to begin a measurement Adjust the input range up or down using the up or down arrow hard keys until the gain level is optimized One way to do this is to press the down arrow until an overload occurs Then press the up arrow one or two steps 11 15 e rta 3200 training book Page 16 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 2 Press CURSOR and then move the dotted cursor to the cur RESET sor band within which the calibration tone resides 250 Hz CURSOR R S for the CA250 calibrator Press R S to stop the measure ment Press UNITS F V DI 20 23 45 Chanls STHHDED CROSS IHTENSY UNITS FILTER CLASS SPL 3 5588 F aj HET INT EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 Dual LIHEHE ZzkHz itBkHz STOP 12 JAH 98 26 23 61 TH ae es See ce ERE a NO S Aes o Cas pias Gass ee EC ARE SE LAKE Saye in a Cad r ae es E FILTER 24 z756 Hz Leo Channel 1 of Z H
170. LES ESTACH THCHSET F TRIG Notice that the bTACH label is removed from the left side of the display 4 Press EXIT to return to the STAND1 display menu 1 Press vsRPM J to enter the Real time vsRPM graphics dis play 16 DE 16 51 64 NORMAL Lex SEL DISPLAY note DETECTA Hote B 6268 dide Se iw a MARIAE V TR A X CAP E NAE fm cg uc E EXPONENT I AL Input 1 L HE 1Hz 16kHz RESET 16 OCT 94 16 46 59 w FREQ 25 00Hz H4AA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 59 6 76 7 TACH 586 2 SPEED EA dotted crsr TEIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR The measurement parameters from the byTACH autostore are still active and will be used for the Real time vsRPM measure ment Thus there is no need to modify the parameters Let s do a live frequency vs RPM measurement first 12 21 e rta 3200 training book Page 22 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 1 Press B ORDER L to change the trace display to frequency 16 Sj 15 10 46 SL FE alevel TAGERES s SFHM VIDEO BOARS note WIDTH SOURCE IS TACH INPUT ST pelea ek howe ae eee ahh O NL v EXPONENT IBL r 9 H ITI Cac EN cm 55 fe iw Dn Duc cw c E Ea lacune e Lx l o a bo T 508 3000 REM 70 orsr DCHOTOR STATUS HIDE TACHSERE ORDER CAL PEN CHANNEL FR You will use the current PEN frequencies If you wish to change them refer to the previous section vsRPM Graphics Note that the frequencies or orders nee
171. LTER 24 25H Hz L Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 114 8 A oo 15 O RR NA A EN A BIFF Ph 141 6 n T2 03 REM z TACH Ha SPEED Bg d B z z z dotted crsr AITEST I SIE BEH INPUT clock COLOR MLS FILES RESETS 12 JON 21 11 08 Chanls STRHHDRD CROSS IMTENSY UNITS FILTER CLASS I i ME B ABBA SH Se m m n m n ono non on n on AE a quise qat ERXF HEHT HL 1 8 i Dual LINEAR 26Hz 16kHz i RESET 12 JAN 98 21 16 44 18 FILTER 424 258 Hz _L e3 111 signi 1 d 13 Bnm d 1 32 SH o R H a AZ AE quod ic 19 4LdE 2161 cmm REM PHRT mT m m m e nnn e AFEA 25 8 Hz TH Hz 16 8kHz_2 A Tr anae 58 RITEST 170 SIE BEH INPUT clock COLOR MLS FILES RESETS 6 Press EXIT to leave the SYSTEM menu and enter the Acous tic Intensity display menu e rta 3200 training book Page 21 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 12 de 21 11 37 POWER INTHSTY QUALITY SPL F WELOC DISPLAY note DETECTE AE B aiam SH xa RR ee RR X X X h p RE HS NR QUU IS Bee oo os E ERXF HEHT HL 18 i Dual LIHEHRE ZzBHz l kHz i RESET 12 JAM 392 21 18 14 FILTER 24 250 Hz LS l AM igni 1 d 13 Bnm i d 19 AL SH xR oo K R RR I RRR T G Qr SAX A OB 19 44d6 2101 temm E REM PHRT AB I It e AREA 25 8 Hz 392 Hz 18 8kHz z A range a HITEST Job Part area Pr LEE meter SETUP FILES AUTOSTR Normalization of input channels At this point it is recommended that you phase and amplitude match the input ch
172. Les Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL 49 2 A 81 7 DR ITH A oo vk BIFF Fhz Ba 2 Ens TH 5 REM E TACH 9 9 SPEED B d H Hz Bak Hz A kHz datted crar DUUE UZ McSTOP McWAIT McREPT McSTHET SameREF etEEF usREF The following menu appears Hote TEST 1 1 45688 ERF HMEHT IAL 1 8 Dual LIHEAR 258Hz zBkHz ESET 16 FEE 338 26 43 33 Zn 1 of z us dl FREE Ph 66 4 Sn 6 28 TACH 8 8 SPEED AGA dotted crar LIN LIN A Changes Y axis to a linear scale and cursor reads out linear LOG LOG B Changes Y axis to a log gradations and cursor reads out log 3 3 e E e rta 3200 training book Page 4 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL LIN LOG C SQU LOG D Changes Y axis to a linear scale and cursor reads out log Changes Y axis to squared linear gradations and cursor reads out log useful for display of power spectral density Changing the Vertical and Horizontal Zoom 3 4 V SCALE C V OFSET D H SCALE E H OFSET F To change the scaling and offset of the display select one of the following keys 23 155 24114133 SARIS YARIS U SCHLE U OFZET H SCALE H OFSET SYSIMFO SPL 1 2258 3H A A O te ia ee cta re EXPOHENTIAL 148 Dual LINEAR 2B8Hz 2BkHz STOP 23 FEB 98 2 13 29 TA Ax E DE E LX DRE DI E M FILTER Hld 25 D Hz Les Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d A 51 54 A BIFF Fhz Ba 5n a rH REM TACH 8 8 SPEED B a za ma LA Ea AA
173. Modal Analysis cccoccococoncococcncononcnnannncnnannncanannncananrnrenaaannns 10 1 What is Modal ANALYSIS tati 10 1 Dynamic Ana SIS said 10 2 KOVO OTO IS dci 10 2 What 15 3 Tee 7 session uix asana usboko osaskab odnesu kuk 10 2 The Frequency Response Function FRF 10 3 Modal Parameters from FRF s ee 10 3 Why Use Modal Analysis nette asovo Ene oet uis 10 4 Making Modal Measurements eee 10 5 Excitation Techmqles anios cielos 10 5 mpact Hine iii 10 5 Time Domain and Frequency Domain Signals 10 6 Impact Hammers Frequency Range cesses eee eee 10 7 Impact Hammer TPS dendo rac tances dea 10 7 Impact Hammers Double HIS sese 10 8 Impact Hammers Off Axis Hits sss sees eee eee 10 8 Impact Hammers Averaging essere 10 9 Exponential Windowns es daa oH da Rota D ep a Roa oun 10 9 Leakage Why We Use Windows lt lt lt 10 11 O 10 11 Shaker Test SCHEMALLC 5 doge tendi vu ab eter tieni 10 12 Shaker Excitation BUNCHONS dci ad 10 12 Attaching Accelerometers sese eee eee 10 13 Test Setup Establishing a Measurement Grid 10 13 Test Setup Determining the Reference Point 10 13 Test Setup The Driving Point Survey ee 10 14 Fixturing Boundary Conditions esee 10 15 Sette UD the AmalyZet Aia 10 15 e rta 3200 training book Page v Monday March
174. Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Adaptor required The Model 2500 Color Video Adaptor permits the analyzer to communicate with an external color monitor EGA VGA or Super VGA via the printer port of the analyzer 1 Press the COLOR M key A ECT 41158143 HChanls STAH E CROSS IHTEHSV UNITS FILTER CLASS M Hote SPL B AA PB NNN EXPOHEMTIAL 15 DIFECT LINEAR 2A 2HkHz RESET 19 OCT 34 BHi 58 1H 114 I p ppl I I ILLE LL ILLI FILTER 14 zB 3 Channel 1 of PAE I H N i d u sa db sky A Be Sa peat aio etie a a e y d c tent be jkr Eae Ba PH HS 2 88 5 LOC TACH A H SPEED A A u LAL H Hz daotted crar I HOISE IHFUT SETUP FILES RESETS 2 Press one of the following keys to select the proper resolu tion of the monitor being used xr 18153127 OFF 646x350 640450 506x606 SPL B BREE 140 POK v O SpA s c LL C E ERXF HEHT HL 1 Dual LIHEHR 26Hz 14kHz RESET 26 FEE 98 1 47 46 aig WELL LR DI lll FILTER 14 75 4 Hz L 1 Channel 1 ae Z HORMAL sa V na Bed o u Seaside A BIFF Phz 65 9 Sn 6 BS FEM l l TACH d d SPEED Bg d dQ gt rn a z z s dotted crar IHITIHL SIHGLE DUAL QUAL LCD 640X350 B For EGA Monitors 640X480 C For VGA Monitors 800X600 D For Super VGA Monitors 3 Press one of the following keys to select the number of data display windows to appear on the monitor 0 EEE 10 33 27 OFF 640x350 640450 2029 6929
175. NEAR 2A 2HkHz OF 19 OCT 34 A2132155 FILTER lda 27 7 Hz L 1 z Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL 44 3 A 165 46 TACH H H SPEED H H tdotted crear 1maline 3001 ine 4 line a line FFTZOOM IJTH OU EHZE Ed the long F short G reverse H key to select the type of digital filter algorithm used long F Satisfies the ANSI 1 11 1986 requirements for Type 0 A A classi fication with optimal passband flatness and stopband rejection This is used more for measuring steady state noise because of the better resolution due to the steep filter skirts 19 FEE l 37 24 1368 Zoe IMITIAL z iBBline 26 line 4 line g88Bline FFTZDOM TMO BASE Bd lona short reverse SPL 21 6778 EXPONENTIAL 1 8 Dual LIHEHE ZAHz 2BEH STOF 19 FEE 938 16 46 38 FILTER 14 25 H Hz Channel 1 af 2 HOR d i A 5d DIFF Ph 142 1 Sns 4 4 TACH H H SPEED Bg d ae 138 short G Satisfies the ANSI S1 11 1986 requirements for Type 1 D classifi cation This is used for measurements which require a particular ly fast filter time response such as gunshots The slope of the 2 6 e rta 3200 training book Page 7 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3 200 TRAINING MANUAL EXIT reverse H 100line I 200line J 400line K 800line L short filter skirts is less than that of the long filter however the resolution of the short filter is not as fine as that of the long fil
176. NS n 7 13 ZOOM LOCESS1 s sd s ln 1 15 Integration and Double Integration sss sss eee 7 16 Chapter8 Room AcousliCs Leere creer nenne nan nn 8 1 Sound Decay Measurements RTO0 s lt lt 8 2 Setting up the RTA for RT60 measurements 8 2 Creatine a Measurement PME asd decas 8 3 Setting up the Microphones and Noise Source 8 5 Establishing the Averaging Parameters for the RT60 Measurement 8 7 Setting the Signal Generator Delay eee 8 11 Making the RT60 Measurement 8 12 Viewing the RT60 Reverberation Time Values 8 16 Sound Transmission Loss Measurements sese eee ee 8 21 Setting Up the RTA for Sound Transmission Loss Measurements 8 22 Making Airborne Sound Transmission Loss Measurements 8 27 Impact Sound Isolation cesse 8 34 NO ERUN iia litio 8 35 Noise Criterion NC IAI 8 35 Noise Rating Curves NR BI sese 8 36 Room Erntenon RETO Tai said 8 36 Chapter9 Statistics and Ln Calculations 9 1 Pidime aC Oeren 9 4 Stonne the Li Trac usa 9 4 Stonne the Statistics Cable ina v s asta oou 9 5 Isecalline LFaCES zdi A 9 5 e rta 3200 training book Page iv Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Recalline a Statistics K 1 d a a 9 5 Merging Statistics Tables 9 6 Chapter 10
177. ORMAL d 161 1 H SH A i aan he A ie Ee O ky a SL A ct ae IFF Fhz 21 5 Sn 35 9 As TACH 6 6 SPEED Bg d i z s z dot tec crar IHITIHL 1 0 SIG 5EH INPUT clock COLOR MLS FILES RESETS 3 Press level H X IBI 24124117 SLOPE name SAME E UMIT Hoize F ml cal U cal SPL 3 5588 a gt PR N r E A RA E E E v EXPOHENTIAL 18 Dual LIMEHR 26Hz 16kHz STOP 12 JAH 98 26 23 61 TH A E E E E FILTER 24 z254 Hz L Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 161 1 SH ECCE TR E Gee sa A 7 a a O a O DA arcas CHO FA BIFF Fh 91 6 n 30 S SED TACH Ha SPEED Bg d dot ted Eon z IHITIHL under under under unciae 4 Type in the output level of your calibrator 114 0 dB for the CA250 siu 201250136 l Enter Level SPL emi at A PR IIT EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz STOP 12 JAH 98 26 23 61 TH DE EE caf Gare OE PRAE PE OSEE LOL A a SVO TI FILTER 24 z756 Hz L Channel 1 af Z HORMAL d 161 1 H SH A BIFF Ph 21 5 Sn 45 47 BE TACH 6 6 SPEED B d s E dotted crar IHITIHL 5 Press EXIT Channel one is now calibrated EXIT 6 To verify calibration make sure that your calibrator is still on RESET and press R S to begin another measurement The level that R S you read at the cursor location should be the output level that you defined 114 0 dB for the CA250 If not repeat the calibration 7 Press R S to stop the measurement RESET R S 11 16 e rta 3200 training
178. ORMAL d B d E B z TACH d d SPEED B a dotted crar 3 Next choose AV TIME H to select the measurement averag X ing time H zi O LIH 5 LIH F EXP ExFU H COUNT S COUNT R G 9900 76 LIHEAR SIHGLE B 2506 neut 1 LINEAR 1Hz 18kH z E 21 MAR 94 18 17 13 46 al Qaz HSHH Eam of HORMAL 66 i Elba TACH d d SPEED EA Bm dotted crsr UIEIL 4 For this example select a 20 second averaging time detector EXIT time by typing 000020 0000 using the alpha keys on the RTA keyboard Then press EXIT to enter the number zl MAR 15 12 36 Bi DETECTOR TIMEN G gaga zH LIHEHE SIHGLE B 2566 Inrut HEHE 1Hz 1HEkHz ESET 21 MAR 34 18 17 13 48 te B1 z25808Hz HSAA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL 2 123 95 8 amp H LOC on TACH d d SPEED EE Bm dotted crsr IEL Notice that the right side of the display reflects the averaging options that we ve selected Now we re ready to take real vibration measurements zl uae 16 46 36 LIH S LIH R EF EPU N COUNT gt COUHT F AL TIME LOC TACH 6 4 SPEED H H HA 0000 Z o0m 1 2500 Add Z A dotted crar 7 14 e rta 3200 training book Page 15 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 5 Press R S to begin the measurement process Use the up and RESET down arrows to optimize the range setting as we did during calibration R S az SI GS 125 41 LIH 5 LIH E EXP EXPO H COUNT S
179. P LIH 1 tone Huto L FILTER Autolevel Control Auto L O Ed 09 48 56 Fstart Fend R se k es Lse Les L1 aF SPL 116 ASH 148 r A 5 a L E ua D LIHERE ZBHz zBkHz STOP zH FEE 98 89 45 16 128 xR di ude donate i O 9 07 ER vR R 2 R NAE NET e R R R RR R Kr L H T TET 6 A FILTER 14 z25 H Hz Les Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d S A A DIFF Fh 121 2 Sns 215 52 REM TACH HH SPEED Bg d S z z Arhed crese IHITIHL VZ TART alEHD SHEEP LIH 1 tone huto L FILTER This feature is used with the dual channel Model 2900B to perform calibration of accelerometers and micro phones For accelerometer testing the output of the sine generator is used to drive a shaker upon which are mounted both a reference accelerometer and a test accel erometer The signal from the reference accelerometer is connected to the Channel 1 input and the signal from the accelerometer under test is connected to the Channel 2 input The instrument is set to the STAND 2 Mode with FFT filtering active and the Max level selected for display M Press Exit to return to the signal generator screen The Wideband Pink Noise Menu shown below is accessed from the Signal Generator Menu by pressing PINK J SPL 6 oo PPA L crcssrrrrr rnrn r nnee EXPONENTIAL 178 Dual LIHEHE 2BHz 26k Hz STOP zd FEE 98 09 52 25 166 r 9 N FILTER 14 25 8 Hz L 3 H WELL 1 ence oa r A PE E E EEE XR ME I PPM DIFF Ph 124 2 Sn 343 69 FEM TACH Ha SPEED B d
180. PLAY note DETECTE REQ 3 1 Auto Spectrum D i d 11 3 B 17 7 ae ow ds Gna A A eA ai Ga i UTE a ce de aie ee UE E Ne Qno Z Base Freauencaz AA AAA TiHzT to zH Ch2 ISIS PET TACH 9 9 SPEED B d HA am zU UM T 2500 eee Z A tris delas IHITIHL HLTERH BUWHORM FEE T TEIG SETUP FILES AUTOS TE The 3200 is now waiting for the first average If you impact the structure and do not have a resulting measurement the input ranges may need to be adjusted Also the trigger level and delay may need to be fine tuned Providing that you are successful and have a good measure ment on the screen press SPACE to save the spectra and impact the structure again 2 BE 21 56 29 H SPFECT C SPECT amp s FEF COHER TIME DISPLAY note DETECTE ag 2210 1101010117211 O AAA BUNT MANUAL ACCEPT Dual LIHEHE 1Hz 1BkHz N Hr JAN 98 21 55 33 ro gR A o QU D RRR EP By A IR aa E AA A Ro Mae SE FFEL Hi 12556Hz ESHH Auto Srectrum D 1 d 38 4 B 60 6 B R 2107017120011 5050090107111 101 I EEE Baze Fre uencuaz He EE 2847 Ld ZA Ch2 FA REM TACH 9 9 SPEED A F Ba dG 38 Le level IHITIH ALTERH BlWwHORM P gt R T TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR Continue taking averages until you feel you have a success ful transfer function typically 4 to 10 averages should suf fice 10 25 e rta 3200 training book Page 26 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 38 Then
181. S FART 52HEFEH S EDIT CitF4 2 Czx Fd z F3 FZ Notice that the job name appears at the top right corner of the display This field tells you which data will be used for the sound power summation calculation G gt TES 272727717777727 dE E 6 0060 AH Pe PO JM a er I I E A 25110001007 20 L a HE SING HA AAA Dual LINEAR 28Hz lBkHz RESET A3 AUG 94 16 48 53 20 a p y FILTER 14 25 0 Hz LS POWER 1 d 13 0n d 19 31 390 6406m2 GD a 33 514 A 3l1 r4dErhl LIEST Loc T TOP 188 o AREA POINTY 25 6 Hz 288 Hz 18 8kHz E A dotted crzr RITEST 5 gt J0B S5PART S gt AREA S gt EDIT CiwF4 2 C2 F4 2 F3 F2 11 28 e E e rta 3200 training book Page 29 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL CURSOR PO 15 In this case all of the sound intensity measurements for the job are used Press Power A to initiate the sound power summation note Hate dE ell LIHEHE SINGLE Dua ESET FILTER 24 zd Hz Les wr PUM 1 Elm d 64 5 UBS mittam E B BE A 3 59fdBrh JOB TEST POR Ti 7777777 un 4M a 15 1 x THe Hz 10 OkHz E A dot ted crar HITEST S2JIUB Z gt PHET Z AFEA S EDIT CitF4 2 CzxFd z F3 FZ 16 On the display you will see the total sound power spectra of the job At the right of the display you can read the values of the total overall sound power Linear amp A Weighted of the job
182. S HIDE TACHSET E FREU CAL PEH CHRHHEL ORDER Now as you sweep up the running speed of the dc motor you can watch as the selected orders change in amplitude as you run up from 500 RPM to 3000 RPM 16 aa 15 46 14 SLOFE alevel TAGBARS s SFHH WIDEO ARIS note WIDTH SOURCE IS TACH IHPUT 22 4888 ERP UHEHT IAL 1 64 Inrut 1 LIHEBR 1Hz 1B8kHz 6 OCT 94 18 44 35 E ORDER r m A A PPT cl Mo an a N ro I n I F E bi C I cuc E 70 n ar m rau a ma BB DCMOTOR STATUS HIDE TACHSET E FREH When the speed of the motor reaches 3000 RPM press R S to halt the measurement The completed measurement appears below 16 oe 15 46 56 SLOFE alevel TAGEARS s SFHH O VIDEO ARIS note WIDTH SOURCE IS TACH INPUT E et 1 6 alnrut 1 LIMEBRE iHz 18kHz T O T 94 da A A Mo a E a Ca T plc ho Lon Lic hon Jo CR Tre am C II N E EE TE Kek Kk Kek Kk Kek Kek C1 K 5 gt Dor Dor Dos Des Ds Dos Zn 17 rau a ma JB DCMOTOR STATUS HIDE TACHSET E FREH The display is currently viewing 6 different orders as they changed in amplitude during the dc motor run up The orders that are currently displayed are shown on the right of the display orders 1 through 6 Notice also that each of the 6 traces are labeled on the display 12 25 e rta 3200 training book Page 26 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 6 Press STORE to archiv
183. SET gt SOURCE RECEIVE BACK GO CLR BS ROOMS 8 33 e rta 3200 training book Page 34 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 27 Type in the volume of the receiving room in cubic meters Press EXIT to enter the volume EXIT 23 FEB 13825147 00000000000 VOLUME 5 466 AAA LINEAR SIHGLE zh 9992 Dua LINEAR 26Hz 26kHz RESET 23 FEE 938 18 22 38 FILTER 14 25 0 Hz Lea Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 45 2 H DIFF Fh 84 8 Sns 22 35 REM E TACH d d SPEED B d dotted crar ROOMS 28 Now that they are defined the data blocks can be displayed by pressing SOURCE M RECEIVE N or BACK GD C M Only the data in the frequency range 100 Hz 4 kHz are saved in these files since the analysis is limited to that frequency range 23 FEB 14 22 33 HC HF EC surface volunt 10 r gt i ae ite UE NN A A A O RO US A SEE NR Or ne D N N Foor CATA LIEN Hote BHCKGHD SPL zA BEBE EE r A eke BOSE RLE RR TR RT EO RI VP NU TEASE MAN Pr on BU RET ABT qu RR JOG EINE LIHEFE SIHGLE 7H BRR 1 Dual LINEAR 2uHz zBkHz 1 RESET 23 FEE 93 14 33 11 Are aa Z o TR AE R R RN K N N N E tec n n n n n FILTER 414 75 8 Hz L 3 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL 1 d A A 48 o oco O o DIFF Fh 0 3 n zem en l oo o HUHS Bao PERDE IU 0 A edt ed crarmR DMS SEP CLR BG 29 Select the standards organization whose standards you wish Y to follow for the determi
184. SET 26 FEB 98 13 31 27 54 RO KAT A RAER I Nes ue dtc a op sk FILTER 14 25 6 Hz Sri 1 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 273 8 Ab Aic D CEN ELI LI ql c E BIFF Fh sm 1 n E dd REM TACH H B SPEED B B 14 E z z z eot fed i ROOMS ROOMS usRPH STHT Mx 5rec F TRIG SETUP FILES CRUTOSTR As mentioned earlier reverberation time measurements are acquired with the RTA using the Autostore feature 9 To enable Autostore press byTIME B ce mtm SPL RE np M eee eee ee er ee ao LIHEAR REPEAT B ASAA Dual LINEAR Z BHz 16kHz bTIME La RESET 26 FEE 38 13 31 27 lu DLE SPA O PN O USD ENTE MN NER A UR al An fib NEUE AA FILTER 14 75 8 Hz Sri Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d E B 23 4 30 r NOR NES N R a fet Say T Sa e R R R R le Sav NACIO ad N R Y hae RT R N N N EESTI BIFF Fhz z8 1 n dd SE lt TACH H H SPEED B d E z z z datted crar ROOMS bsTACH THCHSET F TEIG ILES Notice that the label bTIME appears on the left side of the display zH FEE 13 35 43 OFF ba T LINE delta endstor note SPL B AAA DIRE RL px iX AE Iu LINEAR FEPEAT A HSH BTIME Dual LINEAR 2B8Hz iBGkHz RESET 26 FEE 98 13 31 27 ah r MENTEM RO 2211 DII Tm FILTER Hld 25 A Hz a4 Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL 8 2 E 23 6 AB qr R CL rr TM DIFF Fhz 28 1 5n dd RE TACH a d SPEED 4 8 Z Z z dotted crar ROOMS byTACH TACHSET F TRIG FILES You now need to establish the Autostore endstore duration and the Autostore de
185. SPEED H H tdotted crar ILES 3 Notice that the label DTACH appear on the left side of the display You next need to configure the tachometer parame K ters for the autostore acquisition Press TACHSET K to enter the Tach parameter setup menu o i r bsTIME delta endstor note E G B aaaa T EXE TUI A A A A Vo AV A aa ee Eo 1H2 19kHz eu AME RESET 15 OCT o4 26 11 27 l MERCI 1 of_1 HORMAL 6g endo n k O O TU L TACH 8 8 SPEED H H tdotted crar FILES 4 The first item that you need to concern yourself with is the Q scaling of the tachometer signal as it enters the TACH A INPUT of the 3200 The tach signal enters the 3200 with units of freguency cycles or pulses per second Since you would prefer to view the tach signal in units of RPM cycles per minute you need to apply a scale factor multiplier of 60 to the signal 60 x cycles sec cycles min Press t scale A to enter the tachometer scaling entry field 15 OCT 21 47 47 t scale span t amin t amax t input X cal SLOPE X AVG FIGs 28 oe doe OE v a M TS s t B B3sec STORE SLOPE Tach inFut jack B mid ZE KN K aa ar sae See ar Se A a A Cc EXPOHWEWT IAL 1 Ad bTACH Input 1 LINERE iHz 1BkHz RESET 15 OCT 94 28 11 27 44 AA da Sle ae E RA M RTM O AA ALE es Te e A AAAAHZ H4HH qe m 1 of SE Lr 68 A ZR NP ees eee Sree E TACH 6 6 SPEED H H FA HAHA z H 1 Z BA HERE dotted crsr IHITIHL s scale s sran s amin z a4max RA
186. T 94 19 35 44 de 8 0 48 Ja e AR a a a a a A aZ GEER LS sa ces a al to e ee dE FEEL AA HAAaHz H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 15 3 2 LOC TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 4 HA AAA Z o0m 1 Saa aa dotted crar IHITIHL dE l SFL s under Under undet unde Under 17 Next let s enter a calibration value for the accelerometer For V this test you will use the manufacturers specification of the S accelerometer sensitivity of 10 mv G Press mV cal F to enter the mV cal entry field 15 OCT 15 37 18 SLOPE Name SAME R UMI TS Hoise F mJ cal U cal level OCT 19 37 16 SLOPE name SAME R UNITS Noise a B didi eh cR EXF HEHT HL 1 8 Inrut 1 LINEAR 28Hz 26kHz RESET 15 OCT 94 19 36 26 de DA IE A A ez ET AA uL A TR A A c DET A at AD ROS FREQ AA mngadmdHz H4HH Channel 1 af 1 HORMAL d 15 3 2 Loc TACH H H SPEED EA HA AA z lH 1 tma ama dotted crear IHITIHL dE el SFL Ej Under Under undet unde Under 12 5 e rta 3200 training book Page 6 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 18 Type in the accelerometer sensitivity value For this exercise type in 10 mV G as 1 00 E 01 15 S 19 38 38 Enter nus nit 5A EORR a toast sae A A AL A A T TE a e R E R S AE EXPONENTIAL 18 Ineut 1 LINEAR zBHHz zbBkHz RESET 15 OCT 94 15 26 76 ae S Er e has WR A Jab cu cub Ls ED GENTE A AA rode A A wt Er Ba ab eU UA Ds tur a T FREQ DD ARRAHZ H4HH Channel
187. T Mx SrPec F TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR o P I I E features provides information on frequency content of sound many standards based on 1 3 and 1 1 octave bands easy to see trends or patterns limitations cannot isolate specific frequencies pure tone Basic Acoustics e rta 3200 training book Page 14 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL FFT ANALYSIS TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 6 wikia sidla a oe RAE N EDU PERO PO pa a L STO ROOMS vsRPM STAT HMx Srec F TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR bbb features provides information on specific frequencies excellent tool for troubleshooting Basic Acoustics Using the Model 3200 as a Sound Level Meter in Standard Analysis Mode One may wish to use the 3200 RTA to measure Sound Pressure Levels in the analysis mode Although this method does not meet ANSI S1 4 1983 or IEC 651 or IEC 804 standards for Sound Level Meter instrumentation the results will be sufficiently accurate Setting up the 3200 For this example we will use thelChannelanalysis mode of the Model 3200 It should be understood that using the 2Channelanalysis mode of the 3200 will provide two channel measurements of Sound Pressure Levels Before we begin set ting the parameters in the RTA connect the microphone pream plifier microphone to channel one of your 3200 4 14 e rta 3200 training book Page 15 Mon
188. TAI Cu 3 A NA ERF HEHT T HL Input 1 LINEAR 1Hz 1GkHz RESET HZ JAN 38 23 51 33 70 Ee NN E Zab Gas Bee AR e N R A A NR RT NR 2071277707 FREQ He 5 Hz ASA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d B d B Z REM TACH 9 9 SPEED B d TA HA m Z 0M 1 7500 9006 Z dotted crar IHITIHL 3 Then press EXIT to enter the value Assuming that the sensi EXIT tivity value from the transducer paperwork was still valid we would now be calibrated and ready to make vibration e measurements e Another way to calibrate the RTA is to utilize a shaker calibrat ing device that puts out a known vibration level at a specific fre quency These are manufactured by a number of transducer manufacturers To calibrate the 2900B2800B with an exciter attach the trans ducer firmly to the exciter head The transducer output will go directly into the analyzer or via a power supply depending on the type of transducer and connectors available 4 The calibrator that is being used for this example outputs a RESET signal of 1 0 g as at 81 25 Hz Turn on the calibrator Press R S RS to run the RTA The 81 25 Hz calibration signal will appear in the measurement display 21 Bag 03 1522 SLOPE name SAME k UHITS Hoise F ml cal U cal level 1 8 InFut 1 LINEHE 1Hz 18EHz RUH 21 MAR 34 09 14 43 ma ARBBHz HSRA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 43 2 E 1 9 TACH B A SPEED 4 4 G 36 1668 Br v A cal signal oL und god N M EI an a BOUE ue z
189. TECTA Hote SPL WERAGED or SG A E A iy o a SE ee NE ii N WA e o A a A Zo deca a LINEAR FEPEAT B A HA InFut 1 LINEAR ZAHz zbkHz RESET AS OCT 94 15 82 54 Al ITI FILTER 37 E Fl Hz LAS Channel 1 of 1 usTIME d 52 1 A 65 8 40 2 272 5 2522 EMEN PHOHS a TACH 6 6 SPEED H H D Hz Hl kHz trecall data FOM usRPH STHT Mx S5rFec F TEIG SETUF FILES AUTOSTE 7 Next press RT60 D T E 17 52 57 HC HE EC RTEA ST E u Ii D Hotes SPL WERAGED or dove Tat ARTEL at cU LA ee e tiie e og r LINEAR FEPEHT H A InFut 1 LINEAR ZAHz zbk Hz RESET AS OCT 94 15 82 54 Al SOA od mdp do be O O a alee oe ey Pea O FILTER 37 5 Ed Hz Leo Channel 1 of 1 usTIME d 52 1 A 65 8 46 o 0 PHOHS nu TACH 8 8 SPEED B amp x Q ek HZ dotted crsr ROOMS surface volume You should be viewing the RT60 register that you previously filled 28 FEB 16 04 32 R RT6B Auto RE Auto AL note RT S Hotes SPL ERAGED 18 irr or onc c o NO S ooo LIHEHFE FEPEHT D bTIME Dual LIMEBR 2 Hz iakHz RESET 28 FEB 98 15 17 55 Iz irr rc n or o A oo af zg5 H 5 Ell Hz 5 5 RTEA DATA T RT6B 8 226 AUG Bi AE sss AREE T Ex 9 0909 a REM p A k Pa kdotted crzr A Hz ROOMS lthresh hthresh Auto TH SOLID DOTTED edit 8 Press the SYSTEM hardkey to get back to the system menu SCREEN SYSTEM Next measure the sound pressure levels in 1 3 octave bands of the source and receiving rooms You can do this one of 2 wa
190. U dus vw vw ec val de ce DI ES o m dE e woes decl A a ow EL o E Um eee xp WO DM Que 10 o des D AL LIHEHE FEPEHT ALA bT IME Inrut 1 LIHEHE 2BHHz ZBkHz RESET S OCT 94 15 82 54 AHA AL x EO ED ww R A ERR AE Jal ga fo dae OS Sala lads Me Se eh ob a cae RR AR FILTEF 37 E Fill Hz LA Channel 1 of 1 usTIME d 52 1 A 65 8 46 a A PI u PHOHS at TACH 8 8 SPEED B amp x 5 516 Hz x brec all data RUU S ba THC TACHSET F TEIG FILES Notice that the bTIME label on the left side of the screen has disappeared Autostore is now disabled UE 17 46 31 OFF baTIME delta endstor note Hote SPL EFHGED BH EMIT I xr aar LIHEHE FEPEHT ALA Inrut 1 LINEAR 2BHz 24kHz RESET S OCT 94 15 82 54 AA R T sh ae a Ee ied Me eae a tee Sas Ee sn a aR UIT FILTER LET 5 El Hz Leo Channel 1 of 1 usTIME d 52 1 A 65 8 46 a A A PHOHS L TACH 8 8 SPEED H H hE 5 5 o 2225 11 77 2217112112125 19 7 S 5 516 Hz i brec all data EDS ba THC TACHSET F TEIG ILES 5 Press EXIT EXIT The RT60 register that was completed earlier will be used for the receiving room reverberation time and thus will be included in e E e rta 3200 training book Page 23 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL the Sound Transmission Loss calculation Let s verify that it is the current or active RT60 6 To check this press ROOMSII Y Pe BEL 11152121 WORMAL Lea MIH MAH SEL DISPLAY nate DE
191. UAL 4 Press the EXIT hardkey once the desired note has been entered into the text field You will now see the new note on EXIT the right side of the display 83 OCT 15 14 32 NORMAL Lex MIH MAK SEL DISPLAY note DETECTR Hote TEST i F 1 7456 TH my K k wie ide gd Beam ohh E iy ur EXPOHENTIAL 148 Dual LIHEBR 2BHz zBkHz STOP__ AZ OCT 94 14 35 88 28 IT I NU FILTEF H 1 SH Hz Le A Channel 1 af ES HORMAL i d rad AB L O A PHO HSS Ad 3 Loc TACH 8 8 SPEED 6 4 18 CCS A ar iu Uu P M CU Dc M MX iare sa ok H o Hz HZ dotted crar IHITIRL ROOMS usRPM STAT Mxstec F TRIG SETUP FILES AUT STR When a spectrum is stored this note will be stored along with the data It is important to remember to update the note field each time a different measurement is taken Note that this note will be stored with all future measurements unless modified for each measurement Selection of Detectors From the Main Menu locate the DETECTR H key The selection of choices of averaging types in this menu will be different e depending upon whether Octave filtering or FFT has been e selected See Chapter 2 for details on filter selection 1 Press the DETECTR H key E BET 15 15 41 NORMAL Lex NIH MAH SEL DISPLAY nate DETECTE H Hote TEST 1 i 1 7458 FB ft ht XT Xxx E A OO AR ETE RA EXPOHENTIAL 148 f Dual LIHEBRE ZAHz zbk Hz i STOP B3 T 94 14 35 08 3B wow hae A O NT DNO ND CAD DKL EP Rn e ur FILTER H 1 SH
192. UE S v qp A IRE Se LIHEHE SINGLE zu EE Dual LIHEHE ZAHz zbk Hz RESET 23 FEE 98 16 87 pd ai r VW rre vacca di QUUM cir Xt cel aV dtc e Cr ae T Qao RP COSAS le ge Sam n Zu aD CP Var A eS o Sc ae ETC SA n CS seer sen T o FILTER 14 25 Q Hz L ds 1 a HORAL r NN DIFF Ph 65 9 Sn 6 85 FEM TACH d d SPEED a El 25 4 Hz AA E QL HZ dotted crar ROOMS SINE PINE WHITE PULSE DELAY 8 25 e rta 3200 training book Page 26 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 17 Turn the noise generator on by pressing ON A Q 23s gge 10611306 GR OFF num OFFRWM cem am A SPL 148 Z ccc EREE EEE E EEE ll m LIHEHFE SIHGLE za EE Dual LINEAR 2zBHz zBkHz RESET 23 FEE 55 10 6r b4 ag LR M i c Lx i FILTER 14 25 8 Hz Leo de 1 ES Doris GA L DIFF Ph 65 9 n2 6 85 REM TACH 8 4 SPEED 4 6 T l 5 0 Az SHE 5 BkHz dotted crsr ROOMS SIHE PIHE WHITE PULSE DELAY The noise generator will deliver a pink noise signal to the speaker amplifier system 18 Press R S Adjust the channel one input gain of the RTA RESET such that the signal is optimized without creating an over R S load condition The best way to do this is to press the down arrow hard key until an overload occurs usi epi ee ou UN o M MS FF Ph 106 1 Sr 64 77 SPL x LIHEHE SINGLE ZE 2690 Dual LIHEHE 2BHz 26k Hz STOP 23 FEB 98 16 13 42 FILTER 14 25 8 Hz Led Channel 1 of Z HORMAL
193. UT clock COLOR MLS FILES RESETS CROSS enables the Model 3200 to measure cross channel properties The transfer function is a cross channel measure ment between channel one and channel two 2 Next the analyzer needs to be set up to measure in narrow W band or FFT mode Press FILTER G The analyzer is now G displaying an autospectrum Un JAN 01 42 04 Chanls STRHMDRD CROSS IHTEHSY UNITS FILTER CLASS SPL 6 0000 at r RO E An A R TR RR Z A TRN N RAN ERXF HEHT HL 1 8 Dual LINEAR 26Hz 20kHz RESET JAN 98 A1 39 28 79 r ppc LEM E FILTER 14 25 4 Hz Leo MED da 1 a AL NN DIFF Ph 52 8 Sn 2 4z REM TACH 8 8 SPEED 8 8 LI LI A E Sees l g 25 6 Hz 630 Hz zA BLC Hz dotted crar INITIAL 1 0 G BEM INPUT clock COLOR MLS FILES RESETS 3 Then select the desired resolution of the narrowband mea surement 100 line I 200 line J 400 line K or 800 line L by pressing one of these soft key options For this exercise choose 800 line L r 9 ar En B1i42 15r l1 loct loc L lona short reverse SPL EB ABB 9H TT A IO a CUR N EXPOHENTIAL 148 Dual LIMEHR 2BHz 26k Hz RESET r JAN 98 81 35 28 TA r mia Tel tad ina fam e SE E dB SE A A A RR NA FILTEF Hld 25 8 Hz Les Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 23 56 A 34 9 GH RN AN BIFF Fhz be cn 7 45 BEN gi TACH 9 9 SPEED B d 25 4 Hz E z i datted crar IHITIHL Frz nM WINDOW BASE Bd 4 After selecting the resolution select the measurement base
194. VERAGED B 8588 Ld 27 2 T s oed rue xe l v K NN BUM DeL SEP Eco Der der ae de ORC FTAH H 1 45 ct 1 1664 HutaTH Max rs 7 4 FEM o 18 iube de SiO a de dec T SEC Ja el dur Jw D 55 5 55 5 55 D B dan das datted crar ROOMS SOLID DOTTED BOTH 8 19 e rta 3200 training book Page 20 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 14 Press the right arrow hardkey or increment to the next 1 3 k octave band 2 kHz p zH a 15 55 53 RT66 REPLACE AVERAGE Auto RE Auto Al note ERBISED BE L c eo CPP E E Y FTAH H 2718 ct 1 1688 AutoTH Max a A 2 ok ok Jo ac Tat is iui OR DT ub Ue CU ae be dae UR OC UNE CC AE Lea Sr r 6 5 z AAA new data CATA SOLID DOTTED BOTH 15 If necessary move the solid and dotted cursors such that they are both on the linear part of the decay curve Remember to activate the cursor first by pressing either SOLID N or DOT TED O z a 15 55 53 RTEA REPLACE AVERAGE Huto RE Auto AL note Hate SPL WERAGED LINEAR FEPEAT B mti Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz RESET 26 FEB 38 15 17 55 DATA 33 Bdk HZ 583 Channel 1 of Z vzTIME Ld 31 3 Td 1 158 ETE H B 218 ct i 1 1 Lea 357 39 ar a6 16 Notice that the RT60 for the 2 0 kHz band is 0 218 seconds S Press REPLACE C to put this value into the RT60 register C z ane 15 98 23 FT EH REPLACE AVERAGE Auto FE Auto AL note
195. Y UHITS FILTER CLASS Hate SFL KU EXPONENTIAL 1 8 DIRECT LINEAR 26 26kHz RESET 19 OCT 94 61 58 16 116 ie n hehehe FILTER 14 23 0 Hz Les Channel 1 of HORMAL d S A 3 7 NN PHOHS 88 5 a TACH H H SPEED ALA E HH Hz e datted crar ABCD I HOISE IHFUT COLOR SETUP FILES RESETS The following prompt will appear on the upper right of the dis play DD MM YY HH MM SS prompting you to enter the current time and date via the numeric keypad 20 FEB 10 48 37 128 Z O A a aD MMYY_HHs MESS B aite LAB Pe ESPOHEHTIAL 1 Dual LIHEAR 28Hz 18EHz RESET ZA FEB 38 18 47 46 BG PO FILTER 814 25 6 Hz L Z Channel 1 ES P BP DIFF Ph 65 9 Suns 6 85 REM TACH H H SPEED a A 25 56 Hz 538 Hz zA DL HZ dotted crar IHITIHL 2 Press the EXIT hardkey after entering the time and date to return to the SYSTEM Menu The new time and date will appear on the upper left side of the display 19 OCT 81 58 43 Chanls STHHDED CROSS IHTEHSY UHITS FILTER CLASS i Hate SFL KM EXPOHEHT IRL 1 8 DIRECT LINEAR 26 26kHz RESET 19 OCT 94 61 58 16 116 ie n hehehe FILTER 14 23 0 Hz Les Channel 1 of HORMAL d s A 3 7 ag uz E O rc c C lc lxi FHOH S2 aa 5 E THCH H H SPEED ALA 5 56 H BAe Hz 15 QC HZ dotted crar ABCD I HOISE IHFUT clock COLOR SETLIF FILES RESETS Activating the External Color Monitor LD Model 2500 Color Video 2 24 e rta 3200 training book Page 25
196. a enora Used sk Used Memoria Free 193074 Disk Free HEMOR DIE HAME CATE TIME SIZE HAME DATE TIME SIZE v MEMORY 7 delete rename o mem delete rename 3 Press the delete I key 4d OCT 16 25 42 create FECORDS t disk t Format Memor Used erar Disk Used Hemor Free 193074 Disk Free Ee OOO 1 z HAME CATE TIME SIZE HAME DATE TIME SIZE MEMORY rename t mem delete rename The following message Delete highlighted file will appear on the right side of the display Ad OCT 16 26 36 Ces Go Hemor Used nez Misk Used Hemor Free Disk Free MEMORY DATE TIME e rta 3200 training book Page 23 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL EXIT Press either the YES A or NO C to answer the message Pressing YES will delete the file pressing NO will return you to the files menu without affecting the file Press the EXIT key to leave the FILES menu Recalling a previously stored record 1 Press the FILES O key found in either the Main Menu or the System Menu Select the FILE where the desired stored data record to be recalled can be found by using the T C or 4 K arrow keys Press the RECORDS B key a OCT 16 16 24 create FECORDS t disk t Format Memoria Used ZEE Disk Used 7618556 Hemor Free 252471 Disk Free 695296 HERBES E ISK CATE HAME DATE TIME SIZE CA E E Zone LOC
197. a Pree L se meter SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 13 dau Eg 76 5 EZ POWER IHMTHST QUALITY SPL F VELOC DISPLAY note DETECTA I SPL 26 AAAA TH K Slag Z o SE Sey TW ae a ci ake ey ae KK N ae v ae TCI LIHEHFE SIHEBLE zH AHHH Dual LIMEHR ZEHZ 18EHz STOP 13 JAH 38 995 915 37 O UI FILTER 24 25H Hz L ur SPL 1 d 13 8mm d 56 2 A 72 8 JOB TEST FEM FART FRONT S Grid ail Se win antes dal War Rr Nee Serer nm SU eR CREER MEL Gam SO E e Er SEO NEN Sey ah deci Gas RA Se SIN ce AREA POIHTi1 Ltted crar x dao meter SETLIF FILES AUTOSTR E PreLrsP H Hz z HITEST Job area 4 Press P VELOC E to view the Particle Velocity that was measured c 26 Bai T 34 5 de JOB TEST FART FRONT EAS T can uiia c ura Ne wan rar Named d LA E A MS IM ONE DAT v STEP Sa s AREA POINT E ZEA dotted crar HITEST area Prete SP peter SETUP FILES AUTOSTE o Press QUALITY C to view the Quality Indicator Function S measurement C 13 2 155 3 7 POWER umeros SPL P WELOC DISPLAY note DETECTA Hote dE3ual zB m HM mE o LIHEHE SIH L ual LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz TOP 13 JA 2 m 14 EE M Ec d EE FILTER 24 z756 Hz L we QUALITY d 1 1 3 dE z Quid No cala aces R IA A Se JOB TEST FEM FART FRONT 56 RE E RI RS de Er Cee tak LAE viis N Sci odi AREA POINT H Hz 5 z dotted crar HITEST area Prete SP maker SETUP FILES HUT STE In general the Quality should be between 0 and 10 dB no greater
198. ach of the curves is designated by a number called the Noise Criterion which represents the value of sound pressure level corresponding to the 1 KHz band Since the curves are stored in the 2900B this function can be performed automati cally using a displayed 1 1 octave spectrum which has either just been measured or has been recalled from memory SYSTEM 1 To enter the 1 octave mode press SYSTEM press FILTER G and then press 1 1 OCT A Press Exit twice to get back to the main menu EXIT HE N 3 Press R S to begin the measurement To stop the measure RESET ment press RS again R S 8 39 e rta 3200 training book Page 36 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 4 While in the Main menu press ROOMS I and then NC A Y Q to look at the NC curve A are pBri ziiBl HC HE EC surface volume ETER SPL 6 5958 ai RA CST x LAN Mis ERER R ai OR RN RARO EXPOHENTIAL 1 E Dual LINEAR 26Hz 26kHz a STOP zl FEB 38 H 13 48 BH x DII EIC I OP 77 1727171713 7X FILTER 15 31 5 Hz L 1 1 Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL E EU M ure ON e HOISE EITERIOH R 39 5 TACH 6 8 SPEED B a Hz HH Hz Hz doatted crar ROOMS SET gt OURCE RECEIVE BERHCK GD CLR PG 5 Press EXIT to return to the Main menu Noise Rating Curves NR B The Noise Rating NR curves are used in the same manner as the Noise Criteria curves but are used to measure noise in con
199. adadmHz HSHH 1 Channel 1 af 1 HORMAL d 3 2 B 24 1 Loc TACH 6 4 SPEED B El Bii a EH dotted crar UTE The frequency scale on the horizontal axis will immediately change to reflect this selection g PIS 23 41 29 1lrloct 14 3o0ct lona short reverse SPL B piana a2 r ru PUE EIE O RA ES EXPOHENTIAL 148 Input 1 LIHEHR 28Hz zBkHz RESET A JAN 38 2313514 TA OE E AR OO TE EE R N K R GP EET oe V FILTER 16 40 0 Hz Les Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL 275 4 E 37 8 54 RR A e ABL A D FF Fhz 7 5 5n 7 45 REM TACH BH SPEED HL SA OR V CE a I R E eed a OFF INITIAL R M WINDOW BASE Ed Background on FFT Windows Windows are used to prevent spectral leakage Without getting into a long discussion about FFT theory leakage is a phenomena that can occur as a result of the certain assumptions of the Fast Fourier Transform algorithm As you may or may not know FFT analyzers capture time blocks of data assumes they are periodic and then applies the FFT algorithm to transform the data blocks into the frequency domain If the time signals that are processed are not periodic as in the case of a sine wave that has not completed an integral number of cycles the energy from the non captured portion of the signal leaks into adjacent spectral line in the frequency domain The result is a distorted frequency spectrum Leakage also occurs when measuring transients that are not entirely captured in the tim
200. al leakage In the case of an impact modal test an impact win dow should be applied to channel one and an exponential window to channel two 10 18 e E e rta 3200 training book Page 19 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 9 Select WINDOW N o o Dg Hi 4d2 29 lrloct 1l Soct lona short reverse N SPL B ABBA I6 r WOG X 7 X WOW RA K N N wa N EXF HEHT HL 1 8 Dual LINEAR 26Hz 26k Hz La RESET Br JAM 58 81 33 gt 70 T DET FILTER 14 5 8 Hz Le ELE i a 1 PaE r SUL DIFF Ph 52 2 Sn 2 4z REM TACH d d SPEED B a Hz 636 Hz zH BHEHz datted crar IHITIHL 166line 299 1 1ne 466line S6bline FFTZDO WIDOW JEHSE E d Selecting an exponential window EXP 2 F EXP 4 G EXP 6 H automatically assigns an exponential window to channel two and an impact window to channel one EXP 2 F applies an exponentially decaying curve to the time domain response acceleration so that the response decays to zero at approxi mately 50 of the measurement duration EXP 4 G insures that the measurement decays to zero at about 25 of the measure ment duration EXP 6 H insures that the measurement decays to zero at about 16 7 of the measurement duration 10 Press EXP 4 G F hi e C1 De A DR k 00 Dm m n I L Z Z ZX u m T O Ja SII m A O JE L E H
201. am Z 00H 1 Iz46 8758 E A dotted crar IHITIHL COUNT M count manual accept averaging is the averaging method that should be used when one is measuring transfer functions using an impact hammer The COUNT M method permits the user to examine the data before the spectrum is accepted and averaged in with other spectra 18 Next choose AV TIME H to establish the number of spectral X averages for the FRF measurement G TERES SPL 1588 g VK RRR NN ae RR RRR N 3272170720771 7012357311901 A COUNT MANUAL ACCEPT 1 Dual LIHEHE 1Hz 16kHz 1 RESET r JAN 38 915 Bd 20 BB RR Mat fas cas Tre Cap Re vade amy NET R Cat MALM RR EX CEP TR CR EST RF eos FFEL He Eb Hz ESHH huta Spectrum D 2 EB hee eene Base Freauencua BB ABBA REM i DER MN OE da aa O E E SEE TREES RET TE EE ER cine GL cb KERE 0 TACH g d SPEED g d A F ZH dotted crsr IHITIHL 19 For this test we will use 4 averages Press 4 C S Er JAH 61 55 25 1 z a 16 Az ad 128 C 128 E neta ats ae O RA AIM ver Jalo me at uos Sep etes RR RS e eo jas 08 SPL 1588 A N NN NL C NN RR RR ON CAO AC NN COUNT MANUAL ACCEPT 1 ual HE 1Hz 16kHz RESET r JAN 38 915 Bd 20 Se kua su du NA OTO Can K R EE See OBE o ares Nap gat San sk lt a at Gam sui dn ime Amb UR TORINO EN FREQ He HARAHZ ESHH Ka te D 2 NN Base Freauencu AA ABBA REM rM TRCH 8 5 SPEED 5 9 ga Bap 00m I I246 2758 E A dotted crzr IHITIAL 25 212 1074 zad 40796 8192 16354 317
202. annels 1 and 2 by performing a channel nor malization You can use the optional built in noise generator of your Model 3200 or an external noise generator to do this Please refer to your user manual to perform a channel normalization This is recommended but not required Within the Intensity display screen one can establish the various acoustic intensity measurement correction parameters These include the ambient barometric pressure temperature and spacer length e d E e 1 Press pr t sp L to edit and enter the values for static pres sure in millibars temperature degrees Celsius and the E spacer length in millimeters 1z Jan 21 11 37 POWER IHTHSTY QUALITY SPL P VELOC CISPLAY nate DETECTR pln 9 0092 SH R RRR wr NODUM c a MS ON R NR dc V anc BM D LL EXPOHENTIAL 1 8 i Dual LINEAR 26Hz 16kHz i RESET 12 JAH 35 21 18 44 1B FILTER 24 299 Hz L 3 R11 signi 1 d 13 Bnm d 19 44 E 3 SH KR RR N N ds D o uai RN R ap GE A oo Re quon god F lJz 19 44dE 2101 time I JOB_ REM PART ei hk Z A ex VE AREA 25 8 Hz 392 Hz 18 8kHz z A panae a HITEST Job Part area Pr LEE meter SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 725 6 Hz 588 Hz 18 8kHz E A i ranse 98 HITEST 2 After you have established the values of these parameters EXIT press EXIT to enter the changes 11 21 e rta 3200 training book Page 22 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Nam
203. at the summation value at the right is showing numer ically the overall Sound Pressure Level summation of all of the 1 3 octave bands 19 FER 12 42 20 NORMAL Les MIN HEX SEL DISPLAY note DETECTR 3 SPL 11 1958 EXPONENTIAL i Dual A MEIGHT STOP 19 FEB 98 12 41 25 FILTER 414 25 8 Hz Channel 1 af Z HORMAL 58 8 w 182 1 TACH 8 8 SPEED B a F L b BH Hz b ROOMS Ls EPIA STAT MHs SPec FS SETUP FILES AUTOSTR dotted crese 2 To view the Leg during the runtime press Leq B You will notice the Leq spectrum on the left and the overall summed Leq value on the right of the display 19 FEB 12 43 05 NORMAL Lea MIH MAX SEL DISPLAY note DETECTR Lew l SFL 11 1958 166 K RRR W RR RR A A EE O A a A A A AAA EXF HEHT T DL 1 l Dual DME L SUT i STOP 19 FEB 9B 12 41 25 SH r Laa aa a aa A i o FILTER 14 75 8 Hz L Channel 1 E LEQ Ear A DIFF Ph 246T Sn2 REM o TACH 8 8 SPEED A B Bol Hz Q Qk HZ H dotted crzr POPCO ROOMS wsRPM STAT o Mx 5Pec F TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 3 To view the MIN during the runtime press MIN C You will S notice the MIN spectrum on the left This is a spectrum C showing the minimum value that occurred in each 1 3 octave bin during the time of the test The overall MIN value on the right of the display is the summation of these MIN bands 19 FEB 12 44 15 WORMAL Lea HIH HAR SEL DISPLAY nate DETECTA SPL 11 1758 188 p OVA R no VAK Sat ky O A V A RE
204. ata ee O O OI OU COUHT MANUAL ACCEPT Dual LIMEHR i1Hz i amp GkHz STOP m JAN 93 22164135 as ENSE EO EURO CASO ARO FREQ AS 1258Hz ESHH oherence D z d A 9565E A A Base Fre uenc y A z AHHH 14Hx td zH Ch2 Bad REM TACH 9 9 SPEED B d aa E de Q ZH ofset DG IHITIHL HLTERH BUWHORM Pak T TEIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 10 28 e rta 3200 training book Page 1 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM Acoustic Intensity Why use Acoustic Intensity e Determine the Sound Power of a noise source e Locate and rank sources of the sound Sound Pressure versus Sound Power e A sound source radiates Sound Power The result is sound pressure e The perceived Sound Pressure is dependent on the distance from the sound source plus the measurement environment 11 1 e rta 3200 training book Page 2 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Sound Power Analogy e A heat source heater emits power in watts The result is a temperature e A sound source emits sound in watts The result is sound pressure Acoustic Intensity What is it e Sound Intensity is a vector quantity It describes the net amount and direction of flow of acoustic power at a p
205. atted crar ROOMS SET a OURCE EECEIUE ERHCK GD CLR PG 24 As part of the Transmission Loss and STC calculation the EH surface area of the partition in square meters and volume of D the receiving room in cubic meters need to be factored in as part of the calculation Press surface D to access the surface area entry field 23 FEB 13 21 31 HC HE EC Surf ace volume ETEK FEB yee c T Na E See AGED SH r EA JESUS Gn VES RN AER ona uy EY A RN RE p S IHGLE Ab 1 Wa E r PE KO etit cape od Pc FILTER Fld 25 4 Hz L i Channel 1 QE HORMAL d 45 2 A a BIFF Fh 84 8 511 2 37 FEM TACH Ha SPEED Bg d H Hz Bak Hz doatted crar ROOMS SET g SOURCE RECEIVE BACK GD CLR EG 25 Enter the surface area of the partition room 10 square EXIT meters Then press the EXIT to enter this value 23 FEB 13 23 44 186 r RESET FILTER 14 25 8 Hz 3 WE Channel 1 z PORTAL r DIFF Ph 84 8 Sn 22 35 TACH 9 9 SPEED Bg d dotted crar REM zak ROOMS 26 Next press volume E to access the room volume entry field 23 FEE 13 21 51 HE HE RC eurface volume RTE e Hote RECIEUE AGED en EIE ae A RKR R NR R K a KARHE SIMGLE ZA ARB LINEBR 28Hz zBkHz RESET 23 FEB 98 1 22 38 eB r Wea A eua c A A DETDE EMEN FILTER Hld 25 D Hz Les Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 45 2 H HA A e DIFF Ph 24 2 Sn 22 35 TACH 8 0 SPEED 4 4 c REM dettes E E ae prie oe A ao o
206. ay shown on the op tional Model DVX001 Color Video Adaptor 16 FEB 23 48 55 screen table all video Logo TYPE List BB corsets AA CD SPL B piana ad PSIE ope RE IL c Z CRS EXPUNEHT T HL 1 8 Dual IHEAR zBHz 2BkHz RESET 16 FEE 398 23 47 33 TH Gao p em ae LLL Daw cc cl px lc ccr FILTER 14 75 Hz Leo Huta Spectrum D 1 d 24 3 B 39 1 BD arr rrrn ennaa REM a l TACH H B SPEED B B zo H Hz 531 Hz zB BEHz datted crsr DOUE US User SETUPS EDIT eject init 8 Press the EXIT hardkey to return from the Print Menu EXIT 6 3 e rta 3200 training book Page 4 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 6 4 e rta 3200 training book Page 1 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM Vibration Measurements The following is a procedure for setting up the Model 3200 Real Time Analyzer s RTA s for basic vibration measurements In this exercise we will use the FFT narrowband analysis feature of the analyzer We will setup the RTA for a single channel mea surement with the understanding that dual channel vibration measurement is a simple extension Cross channel measure ments such as cross spectra transfer functions coherence func tions etc will not be addressed in this section Creating a Measurement File 1 Before starting any test it is always a good idea to establish a new measurement file Data
207. aze Freauencua AA ABBA LGT td B Cchz Ba REM o TACH Ha SPEED Bg d pi E doatted crar IHITIHL HLTERH ElHOFH FEE DELAY 2 DELAY OFF 32 Use the right arrow hard key to increment the trigger level 10 for example The trigger level can be viewed on the lower left portion of the 3200 set up summary on the right hand side of the display screen Note positive indicates a positive trigger level negative indicates a negative trigger level 33 Next check that the analyzer is set up to trigger on a positive slope This can be verified by the arrow next to the trigger level An arrow pointing upward indicates positive slope while an arrow pointing downward indicates a negative slope The slope can be changed from negative to positive by pressing SLOPE L ui 26 49 26 A SPECT TIME note Ba EE RRR RR RR RRR A v o RR RRR RRR RR RR RR AR E RRR E E RRR R RR HL HCCEFT HEHE _1Hz 16kHz JAN 98 24148109 TE ee ee ee A A ee K R N AS 1258Hz ESHH o Spectrum D i lr a DNE O EUER EE LENT T a RIU Fa SES AA AAA Ch2 Ba PE HA SPEEDS 48 4 14 level Dn E A st HLTEEH BuWHORM LEUEL DELAY Z DELAY FF BB E IMITIAL Pe ok 34 Press DELAY N to establish a pretrigger on channel one uns 26 49 26 A SPECT TIME note LEF Ba 3H KX ele Td al R Al E E aay Js cR ah de R RANE al Ye aure A AV TA uy RE dee lean te KEN OUHT HAHLAL HCCEFT Dual LINEAR 1Hz i18GkHz RESET Hr JON 98 24148169 TA EE
208. band frequency by pressing BASE Bd O eee Bli42 15rf lrloct 1 Soct lona short reverse SPL A em ad r Ed di TE dk A a cay ra Ns E A BA a O Je EXPUNEHT T HL 1 8 1 Dual LINEAR zBHz zB kHz 1 RESET Ar JAW 98 61 39 25 TH r WL ERR RN RN R RR NE N NR RR RN RRR K RN AN FILTER 14 75 4 Hz Leo 1 ky l oe CORTAL E DIFF Ph 52 8 Sn 2 4z SER a TACH ALA SPEED AA 25 4 Hz Bae Hz zA QL HZ eT ed crar IHITIHL 196 l 1ne 26bline 466line 20991 1ne FFTZOOH WINDOW EAZE Erg 10 17 e E e rta 3200 training book Page 18 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 5 Your choices for baseband or upper frequency limit are 20 T kHz A 10 kHz B 5 kHz C and 2 5 kHz D Since most D of the interesting structural resonances occur at the lower frequencies and the impact technique is limited to lower fre quency excitation choose 2 5kHz D ia Bliddisr Z kHz lukHz Sk Hz Z kHz SFL B BREE aii ROC RUE OON R NN A RRR R NR CC e pr eL 1 E LIHEHRE 2H8Hz zBkHz RESET Hr JAN 98 915 dd5 QC ro DERE C PT O A A E ATR RR AS re ede ENS qe FREQ He HRREHS HERA 1 Huto SEectrum d 15 3 12 8 ab E120 0000725110172 2270127223111 152 A AAA a N a Baze Freaks He S FE i TACH H G SPEED B B AA E ZH dotted crar IHITIHL If you wish to expand the frequency scale further first move the dotted cursor to the extreme left side of the display To do this press CURSOR then press the
209. bration value for our accelerometer or whatever transducer you are using Press UNITS F to enter the Units selection menu 15 OCT 19 31 34 SLH STAND 1 STAND Z CROSS IHTEHS UNITS FILTER CLASS O O o A OA O be ae O ISIN LUE T SPL B AB GE K We Tar ey we B OE a IA See JE ad A ee der obi es AA Re a dep du ee 8 EXPUHEHT IAL 1 78 Ineut 1 LINEAR 2B8HHz zBkHz FESET 15 OCT 94 19 23 61 ae a ue Ux sab SSS II a ARgdRO de Ue UE ek 26 Sed ON RUND A a AE Jm JR Ue a al O b h Nee Du ja FREQ DD ARRAHZ H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 15 3 B E LOC TACH H G SPEED EA FA HAHA zD UM I Sada a dotted crsr IHITIHL 1 0 HOISE INPUT clock COLOR SETUP FILES RESETS 15 OCT 19 32 36 SLOPE name SAME R LUHITS Hoise F m cal U cal level or rane 12 For this exercise you will use the acceleration label G s Press name B to create this unit name SPL B ABBA eh eoe BTR A e EE ceo SEA D qe cds M DE R AR ME ac A q abs od TR N UR a E R 8 EXPONENTIAL 18 InFut 1 LINEAR 2B8Hz 2BkHz RESET 15 OCT 94 19 23 61 4i i FFEU Bn annali HaBH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 15 3 E 2 LOC g TACH d d SPEED EA FA HAHA z H I CHA ad dotted crar IHITIHL dE oU SPL Under under undet undet under Under e rta 3200 training book Page 5 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 13 You will assign this label to one of the undef keys Press undef K or another
210. can change the order number as shown in the earlier section vsRPM Graphics Once again check that the output of the tachometer is con nected to the TACH INPUT jack of the Model 3200 Also check that the accelerometer is connected to the Channel 1 12 24 e rta 3200 training book Page 25 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL RESET R S RESET R S input Make sure that your tachometer is turned on and is reading an accurate tach signal from the rotating test item that is below the beginning of our X SPAN 500 RPM Press R S to initiae the measurement Notice that since the RPM of the tachometer signal is below 500 nothing appears on the display although you can see the trace labels on the left side Note the current RPM reading from the tachometer is displayed on the lower right side of the display 16 D 18 44 52 SLOFE alevel TAGEARS s SFHH WIDEO ARIS note WIDTH SOURCE IS TACH IHPUT G 22 2488 2H K ZA emer AR Go ie Rai des Y Me xt sod X jal EE Veo C cs GIRL cel deb p di de do R caer D CE CY VD Rr d EXF HEHT HL 1 Ad M end ac nra Eel sr 4A K TT RR AR FEH LEVEL ORDER k Hl 45 2 1 Co Z B2 48 2 1 B2 Bana xR KR RRR R KKR RR RR KR R RN RRR RRR RR R KK RR RRR KKR RN RRR E N a 3 AH 48 2 1 AS AAA 4 Bd 51 3 1 nA BH LO gt Bo 51 3 1 51515 E c TTL A A A A e IA e TD E a a DG clas 1 DG ARR 3mam RPM z85 crsr z 12 1 DCHOTOF STATU
211. cations within the source room 1 Once the desired output level and input gain have been achieved press R S to begin the 20 second measurement 23 568 18 15 16 OH OFF OH RUH OFF FUM ATT ATT SPL 28 0000 2H Z A ZE DLP EE LINEAR S INGLE ZA ARB Dual LIHEBHR 2BHz zBkHz STOP 23 FEE 92 18 14 48 rocccc c nu D LL EL M e eee K FILTER Hld 25 8 Hz Les Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL 41 A 83 6 n E EA T R UNS e PAK ano ao ASH CH DIFF Pbs 199 1 Ens 6 51 REM E TACH H B SPEED B B H Hz 5 5 Hz dotted crar ROOMS SIME PIHK WHITE DELAY Upon completion of the measurement press the STORE hardkey to save the record into the ROOMS file SE 18 15 18 OH OFF HSEUH OFF RUH lt HTT gt HTT SPL zB m ai r A Shy M da ru LM AA LE Scu MCT cas JOE UN YE LIHEHE SIHGLE zu EE Dual LIHEHE ZAHz zHikHz STOF 23 FEB 98 18 14 48 r U O eae K A FILTER 14 75 8 Hz L Channel 1 of Z HORMAL i d dl H B 83 6 SL p s pat m in ia Ca Rega conten OP RE KR deta gees a alana FEE e a i OR R O se DIFF Ph 164 1 n 64 61 REM TACH 6 4 SPEED B d H Hz Eod Hz doatted crar EDS SIHE FIHEK WHITE DELAY Once again it is common practice to make a number of mea surements at various locations in the source room and then average them together This yields a better statistical result by averaging out background noise etc Move the microphone to another location Press R S to begin the second measurement x cr 18 26 31 OH OFF OH
212. centage bandwidth WHITE K Equal energy content per constant bandwidth PULSE L Pulse noise generator 3 Select the SINE I key 20 PEE OSS dd5 00 Fstart Fend R se k es Lse Les lt HTT gt ATT SPL B piana 188 T c oo RER RAER es Rn EXPOHENTIAL 1 48 Dual LIHEBR 2BHz zBkHz RESET 26 FEE 38 H8 s6 5 ea r K RR RE RR NT RR RN AN NAAA K 9 FILTER Hld 25 8 Hz Les Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 34 4 A 46 3 AH A A LXXX PA e BIFF Fhz 65 9 Ens 6 85 B REM TACH A SPEED 4 4 20 6 Hz ee R dotted crar Ge z tone Auto L FILTER SINE I A Press Fstart A You will be prompted to set the lower frequency limit via numeric keypad where the sweep will Q begin A ze tpe 99 01 00 Fstari Fend Rese Res lse Les CATT ATT SPL 9 9090 148 LR Z Sp IL L 9 ERXF HEHT HL 1 8 Dual LINEAR zHHz z kHz La RESET 28 FEE 55 9 46 51 ai 1 E ON UE E NUS ANIM en We IBS REP Sep tke AH TS cal ATA CER Ge EE TT FILTER 14 25 6 Hz s Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 34 4 A oa 5b r AN RO a VT R V N al KR a O A da AR A O VE K O E BIFF Fh 65 9 Sn 6 85 REM a l TACH Ha SPEED Bg d S H Hz Bae Hz zA HE HZ L dotted crar IHITIHL VZ THET alEHD SHEEP LIH z tone Auto L FILTER EXIT B Press the EXIT hardkey 2 15 e rta 3200 training book Page 16 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL C Press Fend B key You will be prompted to set the up
213. cs table to the dis Z play J 17 FEE 68 51 55 ON OFF gt Tine dB SFAW E STAT HIDE CLEAR REDFEHl 125 STORE Ln Trace 11 6668 ESFU HEHTIHBL 1 I L 1 LIHEHE 26Hz ZBkHz 19 FEE 93 Q Bd FE n Ln z4 1 HE Fre Lmax A z 18 Yes Lmin 45 7 rao LEG bed 548 ro MEAN 5 4 B r 620 STOEN 6 6 96 520 UH ER az a Ln cursor H CHHHHEL 9 5 e rta 3200 training book Page 6 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 2 Enter the record number via key numeric keypad to be recalled Press the EXIT hardkey 19 FEB 65 54 41 125 E A da ee diria ei dla was I whe da d a da star Dd A dao Jan dls Pe vaio Uu caw des ds Vai s ao UE 148 CAN DPI 766 ees A TEES ERXF HEHT HL 1 8 InFut 1 LIHEHE zAHz zbk Hz STAT STOP 19 FEB 98 65 39 64 asi EACUS TEE EA ON EON LM Er crx EX HEC EH n n zd z z 1 166 Fre Lmax B z 16 Yes Lmin 40 72 EA e o T A a A A 3 24 Pin LEG 5 ue zed 238 fo MEAN BB d FEM ra 620 STDE amp dt Dru en A TRUE T EET TEY aj 2z ZLUHDEF az Q pus err Hz B36 Hz za OkHz E A Ln cursor 3 Press the Yes A to recall the table or No C to return to the Statistics menu 19 FEB 995 35 3 126 s L S ARE YOU SURE my 5 5 148 PS RR EXPOHENTIAL 1 8 InFut 1 LINEAR 2B6Hz 26kHz STHT STOP 19 FEE 33 8539 64 ag E0727 20211127 0707 UTI Es EH n n 4 T I 1 P m 166 Fre Lmax E i z 16 s Lmin 38 9 ee ana K z Em ae a PL PITE EE 3 zu Yoo LE 72 5
214. ction from the test item Notice the peaks reso nances of the structure NOTE A vertical offset may need to be used to view the transfer func tion To do this press SHIFT then the V OFFSET D key Press the right arrow key to bring the spectrum into view ar J HH z2 12 99 A SPECT c seecr X FER COHER l TIME DISPLAY nate DETECTR HRA i G_ LEF M LE LU EMIL EE LI COUNT MANUAL ACCEPT Dual LINEAR 1Hz 1GkHz i STOP Hr JAN 98 22164 35 in Cr LEER PREG B3 1258Hz ESHH Tlransfer Function Hl D 2 1 d J I2 apa L TUDE PE A A AAA A lt Base Fre3uencuaz He AA TWST td zh Chz pa SE n Elm PEL _ TACH g H SPEED g H Bn E H Z A xH o0fzet Se IHITIH HLTEFEH BWHORM PESE T TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 43 Press ALTERN I to view the phase of the transfer function 1 Er JAN 22 13 42 ALSPECT C SPECT FER COHER TIME DISPLAY nate DETECTR G_ LEF COUNT MANUAL ACCEPT Dual LINEAR 1Hz 1 8BkHz STOP Hr JAM 98 22164135 FREQ 43 1256Hz ESHH Transfer Function Hl 0 2 d 105 56 ccc Base Fresuency FE BERS 1lbs td zh Chz pa TACH H a SPEED HB B A DM 1 A U ofset BB INITIAL T TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 44 Press P lt gt R K to switch from rectangular coordinates to polar coordinates of the transfer function K ul deis 2 14 25 A SPECT C SPECT A FER CUHER TIME CISPLAY nate DETECTR REAL i G LEF DE A A R R RR COUNT MANUAL ACCEPT 1 Dual LIHEHE 1Hz 18kHz STOP Br JAM 98 22164138 gi
215. ctrum Applies Zwicker Diffuse loudness function to the displayed spectrum When in the standard analysis mode with 1 3 octave filtering the Loudness corresponding to ISO Recommendation R523 Method B sometimes referred to as Zwicker loudness after the researcher who developed the method is calculated and dis played on the lower right of the screen There are two forms of this loudness which correspond to measurements made in dif fuse acoustic fields where energy is from all directions such as inside a reflective space and measurements made in the free field where the sound is radiated without reflection from a sin gle acoustic source 6 Select Zw FREE A to display Zwicker Free field loudness function to the spectrum l FEB 20 17 13 ZU FREE Zu DIFF SPL 1 9258 EXPONENTIAL 1 3 Dual LIHEHE 26Hz ZBkHz STOP 16 FEB 95 12 01 33 FILTER 27 gag Hz LS Channel 1 af Z Zwicker one k FREE Fh 51 6 5n 17 87 TACH d d SPEED B B Zuicker cra DOOFU 7 Press the EXIT hardkey twice to return to the Main Menu e rta 3200 training book Page 9 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Annotation of a Measurement With the LD analyzer you can attach a note to each spectrum stored This feature can be found in both the RTA mode and the SLM mode of the analyzer 1 Press the DISPLAY F key from the Main menu V F 2 Press the note G key c 25 REB 23
216. d SPEED B el x z 5 51 Hz E hrec all data ROOMS DELETE H Frev H Hext Notice that the horizontal scale of the measurement display has changed to time with values of 0 5 to 2 0 seconds on either end You can see how much acoustic energy the room experienced when the pink noise generator was on and how the reflective sound was absorbed after it was shut off The time between when the noise generator was on to the ambi ent noise level of the room no pink noise is a measure of the reverberation time z LER 15 15 1H ETEB FEFLACE AVERAGE Auto RE Auto HU note 1 Hate B ZB LINEAR FEPEAT 8 m 1 LIHMEBHR ZEHz 18EHz RESET 246 FEB 398 15 86 87 ATA 2 31 1 25kHz_ 543 Channel 1 of Z usTIME L 83 3 Ts B A568 ETEH 6 668 ct BH HZ Bd HutaTH Max 2 25 48 7 4 ok Ley 59 5 229 8 i Z AAA solid crzr ROOMS lthresh hthresh A Preu A Next DHTH SOLID DOTTED BOTH 8 13 3200 TRAINING MANUAL EXIT RESET R S CLEAR RECALL 8 14 e rta 3200 training book Page 14 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 7 To see the sound decays of the other frequency bands press DATA M ZH or 15 15 16 ETEB FEFLHCE AVERAGE Auto RE Auto HU note Hate SPL LINEAR REPEAT _ Dual LIHEF Ley 579 5 593 8 B dam zem solid crear ROOMS lthresh hthresh A Preu H Hext bAta SOLID DOTTED BOTH 8 Then press the right or left arrow hardkeys to step through the different frequency
217. d just above PEN on the right side of the screen You will not see any update of the display until either the analysis is stopped by pressing the R S hardkey or by press ing the REDRAW H key Press the R S hardkey to stop the analysis The display will update with the Ln values and curves 19 FEB 88 41 29 ON OFF S Time dB SPAN R STAT HIDE CLEAR REDRAW 11 5888 188 L 1 8 HEAR _26Hz 20kHz STAT FEB 98 48 39 04 0 n i4 25 8 Hz 1 n Lmax 63 3 95 Lmin 35 2 66 56s LEG A 585 MEAN 49 8 REM EN CN 45r STDEU 7 7 49 c LENT 6 94 385 SUNDER 26 8 Ln cursor POPCO CHAHHEL Press the horizontal keys to move the cursor to the desired freguency of interest Note that as you move the cursor through the different freguencies the Ln values change 19 DEP pB2 42 48 ON OFF S Time dB SPAN RF STAT HIDE CLEAR REDRAW CHRHHHEL These values are correlated to the amplitude of the trace drawn on the display e rta 3200 training book Page 4 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Hiding a trace 1 Select the desired trace to hide by pressing the trace number via the numeric keypad 2 Press the HIDE F key An asterisk will appear next to V the trace number indicating that the trace has been hidden F PEE 995 ds 97 ON OFF S Time dB 5PHH E STAT HIDE CLEAR REDRAW SPL 11 6888 148 PE o a DA EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 Input 1 LINEAR 26Hz 29k Hz STOP 19 FEB 98 029
218. d to be established before the test You cannot change PEN frequencies or orders after the mea surement is complete and redraw the display as you did with the byTACH autostore data Verify that the output of the tachometer is connected to the TACH INPUT jack of the Model 3200 Also check that the accel erometer is connected either via a 950B or AD045 adaptor to the Channel 1 input Make sure that your tachometer is turned on and is reading an accurate tach signal from the rotating test item that is below the beginning of our X SPAN 500 RPM RESET 2 Press SHIFT then R S to reset the measurement you are now e SHIFT R S ready to begin the live vsRPM measurement 3 Press R S to initiate the measurement Notice that since the RESET RPM of the tachometer signal is below 500 nothing appears R S on the display although you can see the trace labels on the left side Note the current RPM reading from the tachometer is displayed on the lower right side of the display 15 10 46 SL FE alevel TAGERES s SFHM WIDEO BOARS note WIDTH SOURCE IS TACH IHPUT Qe 92H88 sc E RNA AR Sart etsy du My ny oe Laut EM ie nade UE EXPONENTIAL 1 Ad Input 1 LIHEBR 1Hz l1B8kHz RUH 16 OCT 94 18 16 41 1 za Gh icu WR RA AR FEH LEVEL FREQUENCY k Hl 55 6 1 12 506 2 Hl 65 5 1 25 AH T A o Dim A iba v t O z r NEAR R KR JETO ae ine Gs v t ob d by i V al See u Gad Ge v s ae E 3 A 2 2 1 Ar 00A d Bd 23 5 1 JE pac 2 B5
219. day March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 3 Press the right arrow hard key until you get to 1 sec Beyond lt this point you will see the spectrum start to attenuate gt gt z ren 15 89 49 U Fall B RUE B MAK B SUM wsTIME KEEP Hate SPL 1 8868 vkr da de on b eee dd eee bora bars LIHEAR FEFEAT A ASAR bT IME N Dual LIHEHE ZEHZ THERZ STOP zH FEB 98 13 86 67 Sabo OE FILTER 26 4880 Hz 5 3 a 1 Ps a U DIFF Ph 38 8 Sn 32 18 REM z TACH 9 9 SPEED a d i z 5 51 Hz recall data ROOMS DELETE H Freu H Hext 4 Continue pressing the right or left arrow hard key to page back and forth through the individual spectra You will now use the vsTIME feature of the RTA to see how spe cific frequencies changed in amplitude during the 2 second Autostore measurement 5 Press CURSOR to activate the dotted cursor Then use the CURSOR right or left arrow hard key to a desired frequency value such as 1 25 kHz 6 To view how the 1 25 kHz band changed during the 2 0 sec ond Autostore measurement press vSTIME E D 6 a 15 89 49 W Fall E RUE B MA B SUM L us TIME KEEP Hotes SPL 1 9096 TH UNT E SL INA By Me NO diis uU O A SIM anes Cas Uae 24228 Sylar as NELCBA JE MA TCR ERR TTE LIHEAR FEFEAT BH Em bTIME g Dual LINEAR 2AHz 16kHz STOP za FEE 25 15 06 07 54 o a le FILTER 76 404 Hz 5 4 a 1 piso PORMAL EU DIFF Ph 98 8 Sn 32 18 REP d TACH d
220. day March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL SCREEN SYSTEM EXIT 1 From the SYSTEM menu press Chanls A and then Chanls to select single channel analysis 13 OCT 61 58 43 Chanl STANDED CROSS IHTEHSV UNITS FILTER CLASS 987 01 50 43 OTS STRMDRD CROSS INTER Hate SPL B BREE 134 EA E E egi ee TEA EO Na M x a ec EXPONENTIAL 14 8 DIRECT LINEAR 2B8 2BkHz RESET 19 OCT 94 81 55 14 114 Jl 2c R E qc zc c c rcp cll E FILTER 14 75 8 Hz L Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d PAY an TT PC FHOHS 88 5 E TACH H a SPEED B n z z 5 56 H Sab Hz 15 BkHz dotbted crar ABCD I HOISE IHFUT clock COLOR SETUP FILES RESETS 2 If the filters in your analyzer are not set for 1 3 octave band analysis press FILTER G to enter the filter menu area 19 OCT 61 58 43 HChanls STHHDED CROSS INTENSY UNITS FILTER CLASS Hotes SPL E BREE 134 II p I k EAF HEHTIHBHL 1 5 DIRECT LINEAR z2B8 2BkHz RESET 19 OCT 94 81 58 18 114 II ee A u x p th FILTER 14 75 4 Hz Leo Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d s 3 an TIL IPTE FHOHS 8388 5 ED TACH B H SPEED B n z z 5 6 A haa Hz 15 QC HZ dotted crar ABCD I HOISE IHFUT clock COLOR SETUP FILES RESETS 3 Press 1 3oct B to enable to 1 3 octave band digital filters 1 565 1 27 92 LAAoct 13001 lona short reverse PL B BREE 148 xa RR K RR RR E R RRR RR RR N RRR K RR ERXF HEHT IHL E InFut 1 LINEAR 2bHz 24kHz RESET 19 FEE 38 18 13 38 asi Z A orat
221. day ke Sie jd v B FILTER H 1 MI Hz Leo TRIG Channel 1 of Z NORMAL d B 56 9 ad Pe BEER PHONS 66 5 Loea TACH 6 6 SPEED Bg d S z H Hz z dotted crar IHITIHL SLOPE SL FE MANUAL FE AFH OFF level When triggered the display will change from armed to run and timer will start running The measurement will commence once the triggering criteria have been satisfied 4 Press the RE ARM N key if you wish to have the analyzer reset itself following a triggered autostored seguence This N will re arm the trigger ready to autostore following a subse quent event You can toggle this feature on and off by press ing this key repeatedly B3 OCT 15 32 18 380 29 S88 Hz 626 A 5 B BEBA EXPONENT L HL 1 8 Dual LIHEHR 2AHz 26k Hz STOP 63 OCT 94 15 31 46 FILTER 4 1 BA Hz LYS Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d B 68 4 FH HS 65 59 TACH 6 6 SPEED B amp z dotted crar M HLAL RE ARM OFF level e rta 3200 training book Page 15 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 5 Press the EXIT key to return to the Main Menu EXIT Note that pressing OFF O in the F TRIG menu also exits you to the Main menu 6 To de activate the trigger function press the OFF O key located in the F TRIG menu The word TRIG on the left side of the display will no longer appear Time domain triggering Time domain triggering is often used for transient capture
222. determination of dynamic properties of a structure using the Finite Element method e Experimental Modal Analysis Experimental determination of the dynamic properties Modal Models The frequency damping and mode shape are the properties of a mode of vibration and the basis of the modal model m x clx k x ff mo ees N 1 m Modes Hyw 1 k 24 jw py k 2j w p k 1 What is a mode Vibration is caused when energy becomes trapped within the boundaries of the structure moves freely within the boundaries and cannot readily escape e The mode shapes are standing wave deformations of the structure at certain natural frequencies caused by trapped energy 10 2 e rta 3200 training book Page 3 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 1st Mode z 2nd Mode s sj amens C et m d Ht C i a gt Lu s SU t UE T U EVA F de A Ay ute d s 9 a a Py p p pF F a i uM E T z z F Lau m y m n CET ES m ctm oot cm pw m A a yh A actae t e V ae es bias L as 7 L The Frequency Response Function FRF A structure s overall vibration can be described as a summation of the vibration at each of its modes Frequency Modal Parameters from FRF s e Damping and frequency are the same at each measurement point e The mode shape is obtained at a single frequency from all of the m
223. ds Start ing from a high range step down using the down arrow key the range one 10 dB increment at a time until OVER appears on the screen Then arrow up one or two 10 dB steps You are now range optimized 3 Press R S to stop the measurement The autorange feature of RESET the 3200 can also be used but usually more time consuming H S than the manual method 4 Setthe detector for linear single averaging by first pressing E E note H 12 JAM 23 57 45 POMER INTHSTY QUALITY SPL P VELOC DISPLAY t I dBr m2 A aaaa SA Be fra ku Ode SB abt aa TEE We Halas E A d L EXPOHENTIAL 1 48 Dual LINEAR z amp Hz 1BkHz RESET 12 JAN 98 23 57 18 18 FILTER 4824 250 Hz L3 lI iE 1 42 13 0mm de 19 44 As 32 84 54 der See apenas an ces nee rand ae ye M tee een She NA POLIS 13 d dB ahl EB JOB TE REM PART FRONT aj A vat J a AAA i wu cros ege Row e lese A god ou kom Rom AA AFEA P I HT1 25 8 Hz 392 Hz 18 8kHz z A panae a HITEST Job Part area Pr LEE meter SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 5 Then choose LIN S A me A 12 JAN 23 58 06 LIM R EXP BT EXP BT LIN RU TIME dBr mz A GAGA SH DECORE sae E Jie wi vy UO E C da A a o a de ere RA EXPOHENTIAL 178 Dual LINEAR z amp Hz 1BkHz RESET 12 JAN 98 23 57 18 18 FILTER 24 256 Hz L73 lI sen 1 d 13 Bnm 19 44 Ae 32 SH A at pat yet E V AA Z 4 Uls 1 d dE dei x Eig Z l JOB T REM PART FRONT at PX IPTE PE A A LIC MP S AREA PO I HT1 E do a crear 25 8 H 58 H 18 8k
224. dual bands can also be set on a band by band basis using the keys ON C and OFF D to set the status of the band indi cated by the active cursor In this manner noise can be generated for any combination of 1 3 octave bands con tiguous or not When using the analyzer to measure the spectrum of the noise generated the user should bear in mind the effect of filter selectivity due to filter skirts not being perfectly ver tical on the measured spectrum For example with noise generated in a single band the measurement will produce a spectrum indicating noise in the two adjacent sidebands at levels approximately 17 dB lower This phenomenon is associated with the measurement process only and does not represent the much more accurate bandlimited noise actually being produced To return to the Wideband Pink Noise Menu press WIDE A then press Exit to signal generator window 2 20 e rta 3200 training book Page 21 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL White K The Wideband White Noise Menu shown below is accessed from the Signal Generator Menu by pressing WHITE K K uU z Tr E ME z REM TACH 8 8 SPEED B ag dotted crar T SS ers a NEC UMEN a TIL LITTIL HI kT r ALT u ITI aa m a D ELA A LE m E HT H cur mm O P T INITIAL White noise has equal energy per constant bandwidth e g narrowband FFT analysis To view the chan
225. e FFTZOOM M key to select the desired Zoom fac H tor M 13 S 18 43 13 1rloct 1 3act lona short reverse SPL 41 5688 ro e dree K R AAN ud cid R RIK K a ERXF HEHT HL E 1 InFut 1 LIHEHE Z26Hz 2BkHz STOP 19 FEE 38 17 03 03 AXE ITI TIMAMITIT FREQ Ae AARAHZ H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 47 9 B 62 4 TACH 6 8 SPEED B a e S datted crar FFTZ00M Be IHITIH WIMDOM ERSE BEd 1969 l 1ne 26bline 46b6line 7 Select the desired Zoom Factor 1 through 512 by pressing a key A K Your selection will appear below the frequency axis of the display 19 FEB 17 69 45 Y 2 4 3 16 32 64 0 9009 TH KR NR LRR AR RE aE Ge R C NR N RR NR RR ee RRR a IR IR R ae N ERXF HEHT HL E InFut 1 LINEAR ZEBHz z kHz FESET 19 FEE 33 11 68 36 JB Er idee ZV dl in NO v Z AO EN LEN ES cos EE VES M dece eate ay Hee tay ZE LE PU A dad tue ler en ca EE FREQ Ae ARARAHZ HSHH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL g 33 9 6 5 REM TACH Ha SPEED Bg d doatted crar BHSE Hz 8 Press the EXIT hardkey to return to the FILTER Menu EXIT 9 Press the EXIT hardkey to return to the SYSTEM Menu O Communications Selecting a baud rate 1 Press the I O I key from the System menu 12 ELT 411358143 Chanls STHHDED CROSS IHTEHSY UNITS FILTER CLASS Hotes SPL B mama 136 va v LP EXPOHENTIAL 15 DIRECT LINEAR 28 28EkHz ET 9 OCT 94 mi 58 1B 114 KR sales CMM RA R N RRR E N R RER TR Dr A EE da av R FILTER
226. e block and when characterizing random signals The LarsoneDavis Model 2900B offers a variety of window choices Each has its relative strengths and weaknesses In gen eral the Hanning window is preferred when one is measuring periodic cyclical signals or random signals The drawback to the Hanning window is that it can attenuate the signal ampli 7 4 e E e rta 3200 training book Page 5 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL tude If amplitude accuracy is critical a flat top window can be used The drawback with the flattop window is that you may lose the ability to resolve small signals that are in the presence of larger signals The rectangular window is the preferred choice when measuring transients The zeropad window should be used when doing autcorrelation and crosscorrelation measure ments The Impact and Exponential windows in the 3200 are used only when one is performing impact hammer measure ments as in the case when one is measuring transfer functions frequency response functions for a modal test Selecting an FFT Window 1 Press WINDOW N to enter the window selection menu O o Sa e 225 dL529 1lrloct 1 3oct lona short reverse N SFL B aiam BE r Po a z RIR ONU RO io ae EE JE el ERF HEHT HL 1 8 Input 1 LINEAR 2BHz zBakHz RESET A JAM 3 n 70 O T FILTER 16 46 6 Hz L n 1 E Poe P DIFF Ph 52 8 5n 2 43 FEM TACH Ha SPEED
227. e e DIN IUE FILTER 14 75 4 Hz Leo Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 34 2 H 46 1 5b A ee BIFF Fh 65 7 n Fa ad REM g TACH H B SPEED B B 5 8 Hz eae Hz ZB BEHz dotted crar POPCO 1991 1ne ZAHline 4AHline 2001 1ne FFTZOOM WINDOW BRHSE Bd 4 Press EXIT to return to the SYSTEM menu 5 Typically for Sound Pressure Level measurements one would use either A or C analog weighting filters when gath ering data For this example let s enable the A weighting fil ter Press INPUT K to enter the INPUT menu area a ED 41158143 HChanls STAH E CROSS IHTEHSV UNITS FILTER CLASS l Hotes FL B Baa 138 o E E EXPOHENTIAL 18 DIRECT LINEAR ZB 2BkHz ESET 19 OCT 94 81 55 18 118 IX I ul c s ll LU REEE FILTER 14 25 48 Hz L 3 Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL gl A 3 7 AA PHOHS 88 5 Loc TACH d d SPEED A z z 5 56 H Sab Hz 15 QC HZ dotted crar ABCD I HOISE IHFU clock COLOR SETUP FILES RESETS 4 15 e rta 3200 training book Page 16 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 6 Within the INPUT menu press A WGTT I to activate the A Y Weighting filter 12 oe Bz2 56 33 DIRECT PREAMP AUTO FH Hi LoHz SPL E BRR 1 1H WU os dE A E Sey A A E A dun y RER R de ee EEE A EAF HEHTIHBHL 1 5 PREAMP LINEAR 26 2bkHz RESET 19 OCT 94 925 405 HO a PT TT TTE RE Gel Dido dy T NR TON tn K ea ae FILTER 44 1H Ak Hz Leo Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 44 z 58 4 aa ked
228. e signal generator press SIG GEN J from the Z System menu e J d e 128 12 36 55 Chanls STHHDED CROSS IHMTEMSY UNITS FILTER CLASS SFL B aiam 148 EE DA LRL DLL gu Ill cl lI ERXF HEHT HL 1 8 Dual LIHERE 2BHz zBkHz RESET 22 FEE 98 12 35 21 sa Nimi day pr A NR A SA pq E FILTEF Hld A Hz L 3 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 34 4 A 3 BJ PO DIFF Fh 65 9 5n 6 65 REM ee TACH Ha SPEED B d L dotted crzrm E A Bk Hz Hg SIG GER INPUT clock COLOR MLS FILES RESETS 1 0 Pink noise is better to use for this type of testing since it pro vides constant energy for all of the 1 3 octave freguency bands 2 Press PINK M to select pink noise a 12 55 15 OH OFF OHSEUH OFF RUM BURST M SPL B BRE SA r AA E A A AAA A A A A DA I EXPONENTIAL 1 A InFut 1 LINEAR ZzBHz zBkHz RESET 88 OCT 34 12 58 88 TH r ME ne eben ep N N oe voci a R d R RN a R oe A ue que OE N TN cet V a R S Cl gt S FILTER 14 25 A Hz L 3 Channel 1 of 1 NORMAL A 34 9 Ja r PHONS gt ED TACH d d SPEED B d noizse DG 9 WHITE DELAY LEUEL 27 ROOMS 8 5 e rta 3200 training book Page 6 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 3 Turn the noise generator on by pressing ON A Q d ome 12 22 15 OFF OH FUM DFF ELIM ATT ATT A SPL B BEBE 148 SPE LI LLLI LL I on EXPOHENTIAL 18 Dual LINEAR bHz 16kHz La RESET 28 FEE 92 12 2 43 sa Mo Gay pl lu
229. e the measurement to the DCMOTOR amp file STOHE 16 OCT 18 47 21 SLOFE alevel TAGBARS 3FAH WIDEO ATAR IS SIS wsREM T TORE SOURCE IS nate race TACH o WIDTH z Hr 6688 1 6 a InFut 1 LINEAR 1Hz 16kHz E STOP l OCT 94 18 46 38 i FEM LEVEL ORDER l 6 1 1 41 000 Bz 6 4 1 62 600 3 A 12 6 1 B3 aaa Bd 37 4 1 Ba aaa ag 34 4 1 B3 aaa Hg 3 4 1 Be aaa 306 3664 RPM 384i crsr 978 DCMHOTOF STATUS HIDE TACHSET E FFEU CAL FEM CHANNEL ORDER Notice the message STORE vsRPM Trace 2 appears at the top right corner of the display indicating that the data has been saved 12 26 e rta 3200 training book Page 1 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM A Acoustic Intensity definition 11 1 setup of 2900B 11 12 Analog Input Filters 2 22 Autostore block averaging spectra 1 33 by time 1 27 byTACH 12 1 display of waterfall 1 31 recalling 1 29 vsRPM 12 16 B basic Acoustics Acoustics basics 4 1 baud rate 2 10 Beeper Control 2 12 Block Averaging 1 33 C Calculations statistics and Ln 9 1 Calibration 2 2 on a reference signal 2 4 on a transducer sensitivity value 2 5 Clock setting 2 24 Color Monitor activation of 2 24 D Detectors selection of 1 10 DETECTR 1 10 Dig Wet 1 7 Display weighting 1 5 F File 1 18 Files creating a 1 19 deleting a 1 22 recalling a stored record 1 23 3 2 98 Index renaming a 1 21 tran
230. easurement points 10 3 e rta 3200 training book Page 4 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Why Use Modal Analysis e Verify analytical models ce Verify the accuracy of FEA models by providing an inde pendent check of the modeling accuracy Experimental modal analysis can be used to provide damping values for the FEA model If experimental model and mathematical models are closely matched the FEA model can be used for further analysis and simulation e Troubleshoot noise and vibration problems e Toevaluate fixes 10 4 e rta 3200 training book Page 5 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Making Modal Measurements impact hammer load cell pn to channel 1 FFT analyzer Excitation Techniques IIA e Impact Hammer e Shaker e Servo e Self Induced Vibration Impact Hammer e Advantages Easy set up Easy to make measurements Inexpensive Field portable 10 5 e rta 3200 training book Page 6 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL e Disadvantages Large amplitude on the impulse can cause non linear behavior Difficult to excite large structures especially at distances far from the impact point Time Domain and Frequency Domain Signals AA SEP 15 1
231. ee OMe cw m A m wc FILTER 14 75 4 Hz Leo aby l E Pr m r EM ge ee DIFF Ph 81 9 n2 18 32 REM E TACH HL SPEED B El ed crear DUUE UZ NOWGT I This key returns the display to a flat response No Weighting A J Adds an A Weighting curve to the displayed spectrum C IK Adds a C weighting curve to the displayed spectrum USER L Adds a User defined weighting curve to the displayed spectrum A M Adds a weighting curve that is the inverse of the A weighting curve to the displayed spectrum negative C N Adds a weighting curve that is the inverse of the C weighting curve to the displayed spectrum negative USER O Adds a weighting curve that is the inverse of the User defined curve to the displayed spectrum negative 1 7 e rta 3200 training book Page 8 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL EXIT Zw Free A Zw Diff B 5 Select Zw Free A or Zw Diff B to apply Zwicker loudness function to the displayed spectrum wer L 19 35 84 Zu FREE Zu DIFF SPL 1 9258 at E dese ICON V de O p n du je SE di d de urs EXF HEHT T DL Dual LIHERE z AHz 2BkHz STOP l FEE 93 15 00 33 70 BB vat Mee oe JB CE la sta vay a ae de st a a a tae aa a i a de a ae a a A FILTER 14 25 A Hz Le S 1 HORMAL A moo o o o DIFF Ph 81 3 Sn 13 37 REM E TACH 6 a SPEED B d etied crar Applies Zwicker free field loudness function to the displayed spe
232. eee 8 ERXF HEHT HL 18 Dual LINEAR 26Hz 20kHz RESET 25 FEB 95 12 36 21 SH r Rob S ba AN EXPOSE UR Ua AS VE NS RR FILTER 14 25 Q Hz L a 1 ES HOF NAL GA UT DIFF Ph 65 9 n2 6 85 SER C ra e rn e N O db ens CHD NE oe Mor IE EM L a E TACH A A SPEED HH S ro STO BEN INPUT clock COLOR MLS FILES RESETS e rta 3200 training book Page 5 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Setting up the Microphones and Noise Source Connect a microphone microphone preamplifier and appropri ate length of microphone cable to the channel one input of the RTA Place the microphone using a tripod at the desired loca tion for your first measurement There are many techniques that can be used to excite a room The more common methods include popping a balloon firing a starting pistol or driving an amplifier speaker with broadband random noise Balloons and starting pistols are inexpensive and portable but lack low frequency components also not very repeatable The best method is to use a random noise generator and an amplifier speaker system An excellent device to drive the speaker amplifier is the LD SRC20 portable pink and white random noise generator or the generator in the RTA If the RTA has the Noise Generator or Signal Generator option connect your speaker amplifier to the Source Output jack Place the speaker in a corner of the room facing the center of the room 1 To enable th
233. el 1 af Z vzTIME Ts B OBA L 26 8 56 ETE 6 660 ct B 6500 gt HutoTH Mas 25 8 5 4 k 18 Ley 35 8 5 9 i z HERE solid crzr ROOMS lthresh hthresh A Preu A Next DATA SOLID DOTTED BOTH 4 Next press the right or left arrow hardkey until the solid cursor is somewhere along the leading edge of the linear portion of the decay curve z EE 15132143 ETEB FEFLHCE AVERAGE Auto RE Auto HU note Hate SPL EFHGED LINEAR FEPEAT B d Dual LIHEHE 2HHz 18kHz RESET 26 FEB 95 15 17 55 TH 232 1 8HEHz 543 Channel 1 af Z vsTINE i Lz 57 3 Ts 1 8568 3B rte al x tueur AE RR O A O ett ceo wan ARNO UE FTAH 65 235 ct BH 5544 A HutaoTH Hax 75 A 5 6 ok NAR dr ZA R N R A N O a Seen A ee AAA ISO E Ley 5 5 45 8 5 5 zm solid crzr ROOMS lthresh hthresh A Preu H Hext DATA SOLID DOTTED EOTH e rta 3200 training book Page 17 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Then press DOTTED O to activate the dotted line cursor z DEP 15 32 43 ET amp H FEPLACE AVERAGE Huto RE Auto AL note AVERAGED T B mi BE 2BHz 16kHz BE 98 15 17 5 1 66kHz 573 nf Z usTINE Ta 1 8568 ct BH 5566 z 25 0 7 4 k 45 8 258 6 18 55 a 8589 2 BOB rod cese ROOMS lthresh hthresh H Preu A Hext DATA SOLID BOTH Press the right or left arrow hardkey until the dotted cursor is somewhere along the trailing edge of the linear p
234. emoria Free 252477 Disk Free 695296 EOR oO DHTE TIME HAME CATE ISK TIME SIZE DISE menm delete rename delete rename 3 Press the disk D key B3 n 18 24 See RECORDS T Co disk 1 Format enora Used EE Zd Disk Deer enora Free 232477 Disk Free amp 9 5256 DISK 7 delete rename mem t delete rename The disk drive will activate and the following sequence of mes sages will appear on the upper right side of the display A Opening disk file B Copying file to disk C Copy done D O K to remove disk NOTE Do not remove the floppy disk from the disk drive until the ana lyzer tells you that it is okay to remove the disk The file transfer will not be completed if the disk is removed prematurely The file name will now appear in the section of the display labeled DISK indicating the file has been transferred to the floppy disk AS OCT 16 11 38 create RECORDS T disk Format Memory Used 25524 Disk Used 7E2368 Hemora Free 2334771 Disk Free 694754 MEMORY DISK HANE DATE TIME SIZE MAME DATE PIE SIZE L y Hp m4 16 PLANT 18 03 794 15 Lac MEMORY T delete rename men delete rename 4 Press the EXIT key to leave the FILES menu 1 25 e E e rta 3200 training book Page 26 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 1 26 r 9 EXIT Transferring disk files to analyzer memory 5
235. erify the status of the unit by looking on the right side of the dis RESET play R S az ES 14 23 49 H RMHL Lea MIH MB SEL DISPLAY note DETECTRE i SPL 15 1168 TH ee OGO 6 GV V V T T v ESPOHEHT IAL 1 zB LINEAR ZBHz ZBkHz i B i OCT 34 14 23 34 SH JA MEER o 0 e o o oz e oos E 1 SH Hz L 3 Channel 1 of ES HORMAL d 21 3 2 8 ad cr A Wo U FH r z Til H LOC TACH 6 8 SPEED 4 4 15 A 99 H ob I Hz 4 Ak Hz kdotted crar INITIAL ROOMS vsRPM STAT Mx SrFec F TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR AUTO 9 Select a range to optimize the spectra in the display without overloading the analyzer To do this first press the RANGE RANGE key Then press the down arrow key until the overload OVL is seen on the screen Next press the up arrow key until the OVL disappears 10 Press the double arrow CURSOR key to select which cursor options you desire to use Press one of the following soft keys the dotted P will display a d the solid O will dis play s the both N will display a AN which indicates the amplitude difference between the two cursors H3 OCT 14 35 14 EM SPL 1 7458 EXPOMENTIAL ual M E zaz ZR DZ BHE 68 5 TACH 6 8 SPEED B a dotted crar BOTH SOLID DOTTED The filter band number and frequency are shown for the cur rent cursor position Press the left or right arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired frequenc
236. es Are Set Equal To One So The Relative Amplitude Of The Second Tone Will Be Given By The Relationship L2 1 L1 Setting L1 To 0 5 Will Result In Both Tones Having Equal Amplitudes Once Setup Both Tones Can Be Swept In The Same Manner As A Single Tone K Press the AF H to select the separation in cycles X between the two tone 20 FEB 89 48 56 Fstart Fend Rise Rees Lse Les Li 3 SPL 116 7858 148 r K XR RW NS ORO RRR RR N N NN A A JNC VR UR KO QR Ue RR N NNN D OE D Ge EXF HEHT T DL zB Dual LINEAR 26Hz 28kHz i STOP A FEE 95 A3 45 18 125 r DE e RE uS r Sat Save tah cael dey e veh Mat Sos RT Tat Sh A FILTER 14 75 8 Hz Leo certare s 1 oa DIFF Ph 121 2 Sn 278 82 TACH 8 8 SPEED BA E z z a dotted crar IHITIHL as TART alEHD SHEEP LIH tone Auto L FILTER 2 18 e rta 3200 training book Page 19 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL PINK J L Press 1 tone N to return to the single tone mode eo 09 48 56 Fstart Fend k se k es Lse Les L1 aF SPL 116 7656 148 r ONI III A LEM E ua D LIHERE ZBHz zBkHz STOP zH FEB 98 89 45 16 128 bou E one RS vw de c Hae a A ec a ated at ae ot A Rd aa ode FILTER 14 z25 H Hz Les Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d S A A DIFF Fh 121 2 Sns 215 52 REM TACH 6 8 SPEED B a asi ONCE CE AE ED E ae O A E A a SRN a i a A a ko v d n P g z z x otted crar IMITIAL as TART alEHD SHEE
237. ewing the recalled data press the EXIT hardkey again to return from the RECALL Menu Block Averaging of Autostored Spectra CLEAR RECALL Sequentially stored autostored or non autostored records can be averaged together using the Block Averaging Function summed together using the Block Summation function or the Block Maxi mum function can be applied giving the highest level occurring at the same frequency across all the Nth spectro in the separate autostore records 1 Press the RECALL hardkey to enter the Recall Menu 2 Press the B AVE B key to select the desired records to be averaged 24 FEE 13 54 87 W Fall B AVE E HAK B SUM wsTIME KEEF Hote SPL 5 ARB EXPONENTIAL 1 8 Dual LINEAR ZAHz zFk Hz STOP zd FEB 98 18 44 56 FILTER 27 SAG Hz LS Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL dl 29 3 A 67 93 TACH 8 8 SPEED B a S recall data DELETE H Frev H Hext e rta 3200 training book Page 34 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 1 34 EXIT The message AVERAGE 0001 0002 will appear on the upper right side of the display mare od 23237955 dpe Pees a Ges TITULUM AVERAGE 8661 9892 7 fA an O O EXPONENTIAL 18 BT IME Dual LIHEHR ZAHrz zbk Hz STOP 64 OCT 94 DSS 965 25 TA a muse R dedi la in a e 28 wee de dal ed A es we R N EU o fi T FILTER 77 SAR Hz Leo Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d c A 35 6 be ate AAA RR O A dr os PHOHS 55
238. f you are testing the structure in a free free boundary condi tion the structure can be suspended from soft elastic cords or rested on soft foam e The highest rigid body mode frequency should be less than one tenth the frequency of the first structural mode e If you are using constrained boundary conditions you must make sure that the constraining system s dynamic properties do not affect the dynamics of the test item Setting Up the Analyzer e Set the number of FFT lines to established frequency resolu tion of your measurements e Establish the frequency baseband e Select the windowing method Impact test force window on channel one exponential window on channel two 10 15 e E e rta 3200 training book Page 16 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Shaker test with a continuous signal random noise use a hanning window Choose averaging method or detector Impacttest select count averaging and the number of averages desired Shaker test select the averaging algorithm linear aver age and averaging time e Choose measurement units e Setup triggering if using the impact method e Set the input range gain for the A D e Attach the transducers to test item Setting up the Model 3200 for Modal Testing Modal Analysis measurements can be made using a variety of technigues The most common utilizes a two channel anal
239. fairly flat within this frequency range The output level of the speaker amplifier should also be loud enough such that there is a significant difference between the background ambient level and the excited level for each frequency of interest 8 6 e rta 3200 training book Page 7 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 6 Once the desired output level and input gain have been achieved press OFF B to turn off the noise generator z FEE 12 29 11 OH HSEUH OFF RU lt HTT gt HTT AE PO OFF aac dw gon De RMS NCHOA X3 X ACC ae at oe SFL 4 7358 ESF HEHTIHBL 1 8 Dual LIHEBRE 26Hz 16kHz STOP za FEB 98 1212813 FILTER 14 25 8 Hz 35 3 Channel 1 af 2 HORMAL 39 5 B Y3 Y TACH B B SPEED B a ak Hz A HER dotted crar SIHE FIHE WHITE PLILSE DELAY 7 Press EXIT to return to the System menu EXIT 8 Press R S to stop the measurement RESET R S Establishing the Averaging Parameters for the RT60 Measurement The RTA utilizes the built in Autostore capability when making RT60 measurements Before enabling the autostore feature the desired detector needs to be established Typically one would use either exponential or linear repeat averaging for this type of test For this example you will use the linear repeat detector 1 Press EXIT once to enter the Main menu 2 Select DETECTR H to enter the detector averaging selec X
240. file zB FEE 12 14 14 create BEcoRos t disk t format Memoria Used A Disk Used Memoria Free robes Disk Free MEMORY DI DATE DATE SE TIME SIZE MEMORY 7 delete rename mem delete rename 8 3 e rta 3200 training book Page 4 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 8 4 EXIT EXIT 3 Using the alpha keys type in a filename such as ROOMS 28 FEB 12 15 27 A E C D E F G H Memoria Used Zub Disk Used Memory Free REAOE Disk Free Enter neu name HAME DATE T HAME DATE TIME SIZE REM MEMORY L M N 0 F Press EXIT to enter this name Notice that the filename ROOMS is shown in the file display along with the date and time of the file creation 28 FEB 12 16 16 create RECORDS f disk t format Hemor Used a1 Disk Used Memory Free rrorr Disk Free MORY DISK HAME DATE TI HAME DATE TIME SIZE ETENI Fl oa AG lim im GUD e ROOMS Bz2204298 12 15 46 256 REM MEMORY 7 delete rename mem delete rename Press EXIT again to get back to the System menu The filename ROOMS now appears in the lower left corner of the display indicating that it is the active measurement file From this point on all measurement records that are stored will reside in the ROOMS file 25 FEB 12 36 58 Chanls STRNDRD CROSS IMTEMSY UNITS FILTER CLASS SPL 0 90060 148 r Ma MuR A H MT HR A ON AV A A EE T
241. ge go back to the System menu press FILTER and choose 800 line FFT press EXIT and go back to Signal Generator Wideband white noise can be used with either digital fil ters or FFT analysis The LEVEL E lt ATTEN G and gt ATTEN H keys are used in the same manner as described above for the pink noise generator SER 195 195 z35 OH OFF OH RUM OFF RUH amp HTT ATT SPL 42 4381 ERF HMEHT TAL s Input 1 LIHERE ZAHz 2Bk Hz STOP z B 32 1 39 53 FE a 112 FEEL FA BBBBHAz HSHH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 63 9 B 95 TACH d d SPEED B B doatted crar DELAY When FFT analysis has been selected a pseudo white noise output is possible The Pseudo White Noise Menu shown below is accessed from the White Noise Menu by pressing the key PSEUDO A When FFT analysis is taking place the analysis repre sents a finite number of frequency bands based on the number of lines selected for the measurement 100 200 400 or 800 It is not really necessary therefore for the generator to produce a truly wideband signal In the pseudo white noise mode the signals are generated at the center frequency of each of the bands represented by the lines of the frequency analysis This permits the generator output power to be concentrated on the same frequencies which are being measured by the FFT analysis even when zoom analysis is being performed e rta 3200 training book Page 22 Monday
242. gned by the fac tory perform the following e rta 3200 training book Page 18 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 1 Press the Setup N key N 2 Press the gt BOOT F key V S 83 OCT 15 48 47 name R SETUP STORE note i SPL 14 5568 TH row Sia a AR NE K EXPUHEMNT IAL 18 Dual LIHEHR ZB8Hz zB kHz i STOP 63 OCT 94 19 38 42 SH wa Be ay a eee nuu Mn o A ee O KO O ee ae a ES FILTER H 1 M Hz L Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 18 E 66 2 3a hc MINIMI rion 2 lt lt FH H z 62 0 LOC K THCH H G SPEED B B 15 2e NN EE ONE RD E 5b H b El Hz A dk Hz dotted crar INITIAL DEFAULT HOISE undef undef under undef undef undef 3 Press one of the previously defined softkeys J P which represents the setup to be activated upon boot up of the ana lyzer You may reset all of the user defined setups to assign a new group of setups To do this perform the following 1 Press the R SETUP D key This will clear all of the defined softkeys J P and bring them back to an undefined state T 83 OCT 15 48 47 name s R SETUP STORE gt B00T note D POR L O E deba nee ek wie oda desc o ges B ENSE mun gas e Dual LIHEHR 2HAHz 26k Hz i STOP 63 OCT 94 15 38 42 54 L i FILTER 1 SH Hz LA Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL 18 E 66 2 30 5 bec ERES A PHOHS BZ Me A MENTI TRCH 5 6 SPEED 4 8 SE H o Hz 1
243. he average SPL SEL is the sound exposure level It is the acoustic energy of the entire sound event compressed into 1 second second Basic Acoustics e rta 3200 training book Page 12 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL D SPL AND LEQ MEASUREMENTS Sound Pressure measurements done with a sound level meter set detector rate to fast max hold feature is handy for capturing events Leq requires an integrating sound level meter Leg is a single continuous dBA level that would produce the same acoustic energy as the actual noise history often measured in interval hourly Basic Acoustics LD STATISTICAL DESCRIPTORS Ln is the sound level in dBA that was exceeded n of the measurement duration done with an environmental noise analyzer used to characterize non ambient events level dB Lg LMAX Lag time Basic Acoustics 4 12 e rta 3200 training book Page 13 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL L LD FULL OCTAVE AND ONE THIRD OCTAVE BANDS Basic Acoustics OCTAVE BAND ANALYSIS SEL DISPLAY note DETECTR Note TONE 1 3 OCT SPL 8708 NEAR SINGLE 26 00668 RECT LINEAR 56 16kHz SET 69 SEP 92 16 43 61 FILTER 32 1 66kHz L73 M Channel 1 of 2 NORMAL PHONS 73 3 TACH SPEED 4 44 Z A dotted crsr STA
244. he input menu 92 BE 23145130 Bu za U zag U AUTO FH TEST SPL a ae prp p uL pP PUE RM EM E EE ERXF HEHT HL JB Input 1 LINEAR 1Hz 1GkHz RESET 82 JAN os gsar He 256 A 1 Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d B d B Z o REM TACH Ha SPEED a d Ab 1210911191111 9191111111111110111191 1191111011111 HA am zUUnM 1 2500 9006 Z A dotted crar IHITIHL UT C WaT 1 28k 29 20 1 18k 2bB 16k SHME aFHHGE 7 6 e rta 3200 training book Page 7 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Selecting Units Now let s establish the measurement units and calibration for the transducer that will be used to measure the vibration The most common transducer used for measuring vibration is an accelerometer For this example we will set our acceleration units to be in g s understanding that we could easily make it meters per second squared feet per second squared etc 1 Press UNITS F to enter the units field V E 2 3 K 4 V l a1 58 143 lhanls STHHDED CROSS IHTEHSY UNITS FILTER CLASS Hote SPL B plana 138 s cec von R IDE TR R DVRs n r E cix iR CONI ae Re rap lap Vas oky d v iy Ro ccs ab E iS KP al ete RC A EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 DIRECT LINEAR 26 2HkHz RESET 19 OCT 94 81 58 10 11H 0001220127001 0712711001727 E E 131 271121130107 25 0 FILTER 14 75 8 Hz L 1 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d A 3 7 BE Rd EL ME ie R RR UE BD KU APART Jes VE ao
245. hthresh Auto TH SOLID DOTTED edit 9 Press YES A to verify that you wish to erase the RT60 data base HS OCT 16 49 35 Css 1 46 k Erase RT6 database ETER SPL WERAGED 5 O Le LIHEHE FEPEHT H H ISIS bTIME Ineut 1 LIHEHE ZBHz 2b6kHz RESET 88 OCT 94 15 82 54 D e ucc UM EN A O E an coleman V E a foe Wak a A af 75 4 m SHH Hz Leo r ETB DATA E FTEH 1 66 AWG 61 AutoTH Max 2 25 4 aA LOL i TACH SFEED S EH bath crses ROOMS Notice that the RT60 registered is cleared and all RT60 values for all of the frequencies are set to zero You are now ready to curve fit the data and fill the RT60 register eg OCT 16 51 18 RESET Auto RE Auto AU note RT G SPL ERBGED n QOEM REC PITE A EIT ad fe Vay dee a ls TE LIHEAR FEPEHT ALA KT IME Ingut 1 LINEAR 28Hz 2BkHz I RESET 88 OCT 94 15 82 54 She Hz ZA CE A E RN RITE P P RE NES AA o E SUN Dd r af 75 8 A H Leo RT amp B DATA x r c DD vm RTE AE RRUG ga s AutoTH Max 25 8 5 8 LOC p TRCH SPEED i AEE eon ES a both creses ROOMS lthresh hthresh Auto TH SOLID DOTTED edit 10 Press EXIT to get back to the decay curve of the 500 Hz band frequency e rta 3200 training book Page 19 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL EXIT 11 5ince the solid and dotted cursors have already been placed on the beginning and end of the linear part of the decay curve you are ready to fil
246. ical scale to linear from the default loga rithmic scale 10 Press SHIFT and immediately select Y AXIS B SHIFT 14 APR 18 82 55 X AXIS Cris sone U OFSET H SCALE H FSET FFTZOOM Hotes 5 4568 EXPONENTIAL 1 8 Input 1 LINEAR iHz 1HkHz STOP 14 APR 94 15 53 23 x 21 2566Hz HSpp Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 73 4 Ee 3 6 TACH 58 8 SPEED B ee This feature toggles between linear and log vertical scaling Notice that the vertical scale is now in linear units A elle dotted cr IHI dC STORE McWAIT McREPT Battery SameREF etREF us FE Hotes 6 6368 E Tr or ed uev Er dm A V Tw wo Y Eon UE EXPONENTIAL A Ineut 1 LINERE 1Hz 1i kHz STOP 14 APR 94 16 03 27 SAH e FREQ 51 z5AaHz HS8HH Channel 1 of HORMAL d 4 67 E 83 E 4 58E A Z 25H A ARA L TACH 6 6 SPEED B amp E bd4 ab dotted crar IHITIHL OFF HARMAN T C BOTH SUL LD DOTTED 11 Press SYSTEM and then UNITS F to return to the units menu Press level H F e 16 64 14 SLOFE name SAME R UMITS Hoise F mU cal U cal evel Hotes i 6 6968 ob EXFOHEHTIAL sa Input 1 LINEAR 1Hz 1i kHz F 14 APR 94 16 83 590 H 51 2566Hz HERA Channel 1 of 1 HORM r d 4 67E 83 E 4 G8B8E T B3 236 L TACH 8 8 SPEED H H E bd4 HE x dotted crear IHITIHL dE el SPL G ETS undet unde Under Under e rta 3200 training book Page 12 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRA
247. in menu by pressing the EXIT key 23 FEB 13 58 87 H RMHL Lea MIH MAK SEL CISPLAY note DETECTFE 1 r KR RR NR R KR RRR RR RRR IT R R Hate BACKGHE T SP ZD dim a EEE eris ee a ZAT S E IE od EREE A LIHEAR SINGLE zu HARE Dual LIHEHR 2bHz 2HkHz RESET 23 FEB 98 14 33 11 By rf Ner A P De Ba r n OD Te in s tut FILTER 14 Hz L 3 Channel 1 of Z ERE r dn PORE Hum ERES QI Ll Ql x c x DIFF Phz ag 3 n z ya EM TACH H G SPEED A F E A z 20015 ROOMS uaEPM STAT Hx Shee F TRIG see cosrk SETUP FILES BUTOSTE 20 Recall the send or source room spectrum by pushing the RECALL hard key and locating memory 8 Now push the KEEP H key to keep the spectra and return to the Main menu KEEF Hote SEND ALE AGED LIHEHE SINGLE zB m Dual LIHEHE ZAHz zHik Hz RESET 23 FEE 98 18 19 66 FILTER 14 25 6 Hz L 3 Channel 1 s Z NORMAL d E DIFF Fh 98 4 Sn 57 46 TACH B B SPEED B a recall data mE 13 56 44 W Fall B AWE B MAK B SUM REM DELETE ROOMS 21 Return to the Rooms menu by pressing ROOMS Y and enter this source room spectrum by pushing SET gt L and SOURCE M Exit back to the Main menu 23 FEB 14 81 82 HC HF EL surface volume ETH 1d gt AA FOOM CATA SET 1 Hote SEND HUE SPL AGED SH r ui Say zrat soc ah E RA ah C8 du O sn uh dis DB al Z cud cae Goo E S San E LIHEHE SIHGLE ZA a Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 28k Hz RESET 23 FEE 98 10 19 55 FILTER 14 25 6 Hz L 3
248. in switch is in the ON position in the back of the analyzer 3 Press the SYSTEM hardkey 4 Press the INPUT K key FILTER CLASS e STAH ED CROSS IHTEHSY UNITS Hote FL B Em 1 38 Ip Lr MA LLL E EXPOHENTIAL 18 IFECT LINEHE 26 2BkHz RESET 19 OCT 94 61 55 16 114 done Ae abba A A Sie Ade et ie Rt B eh e Ga ae AE A der n e A ee FILTER 14 n H Hz LA Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 51 3 A 3 an ALE Kd drug aa E tsp mdr s FHOHS as 5 LOC TACH B A SPEED B B Me 6 NOR nu L L 25 1 Hz 51 Hz I8 BkHz dotted crar ABCD 1 0 HOISE IHFUT clock COLOR SETUP FILES RESETS 5 Press either the Direct A key for direct input or PREAMP B key for input from the preamp 1 oe 02 56 35 DIRECT FREAMPF AUTO RH Hi LoHz L E BRE 1 18 PC PIU TE O TE EN Seth Monn ae la te RE cage NR EXPOHENTIAL 1 5 PREAMP LIHEHE Z 8B ZzhBkHz RESET 19 OCT 94 62 46 65 a A sah Sure R A NE AA O a Ses Dae var ER ELI FILTER 40 1H Bl Hz L 3 Channel 1 AOFERE ka SE een PHOMS 72 3 c TACH 8 8 SPEED a ul Hz naise B idtdt bsacHHHL AUsIO BLD 6 Verify that the 200v bias has been turned on The bias switch is located on the input module in the back side of the ana lyzer e rta 3200 training book Page 3 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 7 Press the EXIT hardkey twice to return to the Main menu EXIT 8 Press the R S key to RUN or STOP the unit You can v
249. ing a job part and area EXIT EXIT 11 22 For a sound power determination we need to give the test a job name and create names for the components part and subcom ponents area 1 Press job I to enter the name creation field for the job name 12 dg 21 11 37 POWER IHTHETY QUALITY SPL F UELOC DISPLAY note DETECTR erm B BEBE SH xR R RKR RR ec RN N GAEE od ap eii tende dos EA EXF HEHT IHL 1 8 i Dual LIHERE 25Hz l8kHz i RESET 12 JAM 38 21 18 44 16 FILTER 24 z956 Hz Ls3 i A IHTEHSIT L d 13 8mm SO IT rre Powe 19 441dE 261 AAAAMmE REM PART AA e AREA 25 8 Hz Jde Hz 1H 6kHz Zz H ranae a HITEST part area Pree tL se meter SETUP FILES AUTOSTE Press the various alpha soft keys to build the job name that you desire Then choose EXIT to enter the job name 54 1B 54 FEM a 25 8 Hz Jde Hz 1H 6kHz Zz H ranae au HITEST I J E L MH H F Press part J to enter the name creation field for the part name 12 S 23 17 13 POWER INTHSTY QUALITY SPL F UELOC DISPLAY note DETECTE erm B aiam SH Xo ee WO X x x XX OR x EE ERA MU peso gui des EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 i Dual LIHERE 25Hz l8kHz i RESET 12 JAM 38 21 15 43 18 FILTER 424 zod Hz LYS i A me IIE o 1 d 13 8mm rr i RE OR r E PO JE 311 AAAAME JOB TEST RED a E E DS ak Me ay do da ee eas AREA 25 8 Hz l sen 18 B8kHz E A rante 53A HITEST Job area PretrsP meter SETUP FILES AUTOSTR The part would be a
250. ining book Page 23 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM CH1 E E EXIT EXIT efel U e 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 26 Press CH1 to activate channel one Press name B so that we can create the label for the input channel load cell Note that Channel 1 is selected ar BH zB d4 29 SLOFE SAME R UNITS Hoize F ml cal W cal level SFL Ba EE K S K u O A A O wees A A RA TN T AO dp A AE RA 24 COUNT MARLIAL HCCEFT Dua IHEHEF 1Hz 16kHz RESET r JAN 98 26 43 58 TE Dish wih wat Sat LIUM Ix cce uq pt FEEL AA d BaHz Huto SEeectrum 11 3 E x ah A deb del DAD curse NIE m dE R VEL dec de d ao M RR Rm a D PLO AA Baze Fr eauer AB AAA REN TACH 4 8 SPEED B d HA AAA JZ 00H 1 2500 05606 Z A dotted crar IHITIHL dE HL SPL under under under under Under 27 Press one of the undef undefined UNITS keys such as undef L and type in LBF pounds force ar JAN 201450146 A E C D E F Ej H Enter units name LEF E ag A RO ANN RR GEARS Sin Jac RG A A T AR E a RC TR OUHT HAHLAL HCCEFT Lal EHR 1Hz 18kHz FESET Hr JAH 35 26143155 TE TP EE ET O NI EEO E E FREQ Aa ARRAS ESHH Auto 5rEectrum E d 11 3 a lY ah rc Baze Fre uencuaz AA AAA EH S TACH 9 09 SPEED B A HA BEBE 00m 1 Sone dada Z A dotted crar IHITIAL I J K L H H U F 28 Press EXIT to enter this value Then press LBF D to activate the label The last parameter that needs to be configured is triggering When using the impact ham
251. ispherical Conformal Measurement Techniques 1 Select the spatial averaging technique fixed point or scan 2 Establish a measurement grid 3 Measure the surface area in square meters 4 Divide the measurement surface rectangle or sphere into components and subcomponents 5 Measure the ambient pressure and temperature 6 Select the proper spacer and microphones This is deter mined by the frequency range of interest Fixed Point or Scanning e The fixed point method is preferred if you wish to generate detailed graphics such as contour maps Although you could scan within a small grid 11 11 e rta 3200 training book Page 12 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL e The fixed point method is more repeatable e The fixed point method requires a longer setup time e The scanning method is quicker e The scanning method is more accurate Setting up the Model 3200 for Acoustic Intensity Measurements Connect the Larson Davis Model 2250 or 2260 Acoustic Inten sity probe to channel one and channel two of the 3200 RTA Probe cable one near should be plugged in the channel one microphone input Probe cable two far should be plugged in the channel two
252. kHz dotted crar IHITIHL DEFAULT HOISE unde under under undef under under 2 Re assign any desired analyzer setups to the softkeys J P 3 Press the EXIT key to return from the Setup menu File Operations Data measured are stored to non volatile RAM into files that have been created by the user With the optional disk drive DVX003 these files can be subsequently transferred from inter nal memory to a floppy drive and also from a floppy disk back into the internal memory e rta 3200 training book Page 19 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Creating a new file 1 Press the FILES O key to access the Files menu of the ana lyzer This key can be found from either the Main Menu or the System Menu AS a 15 58 31 WORMAL Ley MIH M SEL DISPLAY note DETE TE I i FL 14 5558 FA KRN RRR R A A A A R URS R RR NR RR UR EXF HEHT T QL 175 Lal LINEAR 2AHz 26k Hz i STOP gai OCT 34 15 38 42 bester E om O O O m FILTER 1 2 SH Hz L 3 Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL i d 18 9 E 66 2 3B L EMEN n MM MV V V NV V NM NM i i gt PHOMS EZ 3 EE TACH 9 9 SPEED B d 7 z H Hz H Hk Hz ret bed crar IMITIAL ROOMS us EPR STHT Mx S5rFec F TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTA The display will be separated into two sections the section on the left shows the created memory files the section on the right displays the files that are stored on a floppy disk if the
253. key SPL 1 6368 146 A E AAA NRO EXPOHENTIAL 18 Dual LIMEHR 26Hz 16kHz STOP 12 JAH 38 28 28 16 ai PO V O ITITITITIMITIE FILTER 24 25H Hz L Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 114 8 A ao 6 luxum eue a Z Z OS A o v BIFF Fh 141 n ri J6 PEN TACH Ha SPEED B d u z z S datted crar IHITIHL T LIHK 3g GDG 1266 Sang 4368 9668 19268 3 Press INT2260 D or INT2250 B to initialize the probe t2 aan 295 35 26 RSI IHT2256 INT2251 1NT2260 SFL 1 6300 1568 EXPOMENTIAL z Dual LIHEHRE ZzBHz l8kHz H 3 B 228 16 a DIFF Ph 181 B Sns 1 56 TACH 8 8 SPEED B a dotted crar REM INITIAL 4 Press EXIT key 9 Now to program the KEY A to activate the R S hard key 4 pressthe KEY A D first e io 28 37 22 32BBEC DC out LU rortCKEY RD KEV B Beerer Esli INT SPL 1 6368 148 FER CIE O za n ae ode O pm a Sime SRS LITT EXPOHENTIAL 1 8 Dual LIMEHR 26Hz 16kHz STOP 12 JAH 398 28 28 16 ai PETIERE TEE TITISXMITRETEEELTLIITEISSETTT FILTER 24 z254 Hz Leo Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 114 8 A 3 By ETT O DIFF Fhz 141 Sn T1 985 BE TACH Ha SPEED Bg d S z z E dot tec crar IHITIHL T LIHK 60 GDG 1266 Sang 4368 9608 19268 6 Then press the hard key followed by the R S hard key RESET Pressing KEY A on the probe will now remotely activate the R S measurement process in the 3200 id 26 47 16 S268RC DC out 10 Port KEY A KEY B Beerer ERS1 IHT SFL 1 6304 1568 EXPOMENTIAL Dual LIHEHR
254. l that the data will be taken from the measurement buffer to the Statistics Table 19 FEE 47 33 03 ON OFF 5 Time dB SPAW E STAT HIDE CLEAR REDEAL FEE 97 39 09 ON OFF S Tine de SPAN R STAT SPL A HA ad RA a Wy yi Rie RUE ELM RR RA ON AR RA TR CUN Gan RETO EXPOHENTIAL 1 5 InFut 1 LINEAR zaHz zBk Hz RESET 19 FEE 93 H 31 1 TA NR a ae T ee RN NA A FILTER 14 25 48 Hz L4 Channel 1 af 1 HORMAL d 24 2 A 36 1 GH PO A A f MER R aah us Fs NAR lee N rie O Sr er RE E ups SBR See WR NR o tee a OD 47 Ve A DIFF Fhz 54 4 5n tare PEM ag TACH H H SPEED H H S H Hz Bah Hz Hz EH Ln cursor POPECE STO TBL FCL TBEL MEG TBL H CHHHHEL x 3 Enter the desired interval time in seconds via the numeric EXIT keypad Press the EXIT hardkey 19 FEB Hr 43 438 116 at a F Hz zB kHz FESET B 398 Hr 31 19 TH rper FILTER 14 75 8 Hz Leo Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d i H 36 1 SH ii da igs Da tm e SU as cine TR A Se eae A ie ie H far er cad TR O R e et GE La O A 9 vs v 19 DIFF Fhz Sd d Sn vars RES TACH 6 6 SPEED Bg d 2 6 Hz B36 Hz 28 Qk HZ Z A Ln cursor F FCU 9 1 e rta 3200 training book Page 2 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 4 Press the dB SPAN C key to set the measurement range e The present range is indicated on the lower right side of the C display Note that statistics must be off 19 FEB 18 83 29 ON OFF S Time R STRT 0 HIDE CLEAR REDR
255. l an load cell SMS beam with stinger FFT analyzer Shaker Excitation Functions e Swept sine Highest accuracy excellent signal to noise ratio often used when testing very non linear structures test times are very long e Random Noise Good general purpose excitation best linearized approxi mation for non linear system test times are very short not good for testing systems with backlash such as a gear drive e Chirp Similar to swept sine but faster good signal to noise ratio good for testing noisy systems 10 12 e rta 3200 training book Page 13 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Attaching Accelerometers e Metal Stud Very secure usable frequency range DC to 20 KHz e Cement Wax Easy to attach amp remove Usable frequency range DC to 15 20 KHz e Magnet Easiest to attach amp remove usable frequency range D C to 5 Khz Test Setup Establishing a Measurement Grid e How many measurements e Need to take enough measurements to be able to resolve the highest order mode of interest Too many measurements is a waste of time too few measure ments yields little information about the dynamics of the structure Test Setup Determining the Reference Point e When using a shaker the location of the load cell is the ref erence point fixed excitation e When using an impact hammer you can d
256. l the 1 6 KHz band of the RT60 reg ister Press REPLACE C zH a 19 34 37 RT amp B FEFLA E AVERAGE Auto RE Auto HU note Hate SPL WERAGED LINEAR FEPEAT B d Dual LIHEHE 2BHz 16kHz RESET 26 FEB 95 15 17 55 DATA 32 1 66kHz 5 3 Channel 1 of Z usTIME Ld 2 2 Td 1 158 ETEB 6 195 ct 1 1868 x 5 H Ley 55 5 23 8 75 4 2 9999 datted cran ROOMS lthresh hthresh A Preu A Next BATA SOLID DOTTED BOTH 12 To verify that the register has been filled press RT60 B to view the RT60 register z 15 34 37 REPLACE AVERAGE Huto RE Auto AU note Hate SPL LINEAR FEPEAT B a Dual LIHERE ZBHz lBkHz RESET 28 FEB 99 15 17 CATA z B WERAGED Ley 55 5 23 8 75 4 i z FER doatted crar ROOMS lthresh hthresh A Preu A Next DATA SOLID DOTTED BOTH Notice the RT60 value of 0 195 seconds at the 1 6 kHz band All of the other frequency s RT60 s are still set to 0 20 FEE 15 38 39 R RT amp B Auto RE Buto AU note RTE Hote SPL WERAGED 15 LINEAR REPEAT B 6560 bTIME Dual LIHEHRE 2bHz 16kHz RESET 26 FEE 338 13 17 55 12 af 25 8 1 65kHz 573 r ET 6a DATA r ET b 8 1935 HAUG e BE E 4 688 Ba REM als 3 z z H dotted crar ROOMS lthresh hthresh Auto TH SUL LD DOTTED edit 13 Let s continue the manual process of completing the RT60 register Press EXIT to return to the decay curve display Then press DATA M 2B FEB 15 34 37 RT66 REPLACE AVERAGE Huto KE Huto H note A
257. let s do a Real time vsRPM order analysis Change from freguency display to order display by pressing L B ORDER L 16 aa 18 42 55 SL FE alevel TAGERES x RH ce ARIS note WIDTH SOURCE IS TACH IHFUT 21 1454 EXPOWEMT TAL 1 64 Ineut 1 LIHEBR 1Hz l18kHz STOP l OCT 94 15 42 28 N FEM LEVEL C FRE UENCY k Hl 43 5 1 12 500 2 A 51 6 1 25 888 3 Bi 47 1 1 ore 300 4 Bd 23 8 1 A mad 2 ge 68 11 28 066 DCMOTOR e STATUS HIDE ae Cae SERE lee lP nNHEL PREG 2 Press YES A to answer the question ARE YOU SURE Q You are being scrutinized because answering yes will clear A the display You will lose the data unless you have already saved it to the 3200 memory j c a S TRIS a Sr Am ARE VOU SURE 21 1488 iur daha TE ad EA 2 EXPONENTIAL 1 64 i 1 Wr Inrut 1 LINEAR 1Hz iBkHz l OCT 94 13 42 EL C EREMO a b Capa Cn nr nene NNN h NEE ZH L CSP 306 DCMOTOR 3 The next screen will ask you to SELECT THE MAXIMUM S ORDER Press 400 C C 16 OCT 18 43 59 166 zB ama ad 21 1404 AR 1Hz 18kHz 4 18 42 18 42 24 C FREBLIEHC s a OLA JO chia Ht L II TN SIS SIS SIS SIS SIS Be Bi 306 DCMOTOR You are now ready to make the measurement Notice that the FREQUENCY column on the right side of the display has changed to ORDER The measurement is currently set up to do a live display of orders 1 through 6 If you would prefer to look at different orders you
258. letter G G followed by 5 presses of the e rta 3200 training book Page 8 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL SPACE key to clear the remaining characters You can also press SHIFT and then CLEAR to clear the unit entry field then press the letter G G 18 MBR 17 08 45 A E C D E F Cs H Enter units G E A AREA ami ef nae Mae A A nde a aie or ce O I sid day ABR det ere edP ue ar A EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 Input 1 LINEBR 1Hz 18kH RESET 18 MAR 94 17 57 51 E AA 86 FRE ABERHz HERA Channel 1 of 1 NORMAL d 15 3 S 17 8 pa KU tale a a A a el WR tae cmt Gus ais A A A cu HR CS len ERU be Jes ae Seen Say B A cx ces A e NE Lot a TACH H a SPEED H H HA 0000 zOnM 1 2500 05606 Z A dotted crar WIE I J E L H H F 5 Press EXIT to enter this unit name Select G K to enable the unit label G K a 43 11 55 SLOPE name SAME k UHITS Hoise F ml cal U cal level SPL B didi EXPOHEHTIAL 1 8 InFut 1 LINEAR iHz 1HBHkHz RESET 15 APR 94 09 11 35 FREQ A ABRA HSAA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 15 3 Ee 12 8 TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 4 dotted crar undet unde Under Notice that the unit label G appears in the right portion of the display Note that the unit label G has been assigned to the K key as 17 12 53 SLOPE name SAME k UHITS Hoise F ml cal U cal level Ce B aaa anm O ES ur EHTIHL 1 rut 1 LINEAR iHz 1BkHz 3 MAR 3 1
259. lid crar ALTERH EUHOF 2 SETUP FILES AUTOSTR Impact Hammers Off Axis Hits e Off axis his will result in reduced energy in the intended direction This causes errors in the measurement e This may excite modes resonances that would not normally be excited e The actual force that the test item experiences is less than the measured force that the load cell see The amplitude of the frequency response function will be too high 10 8 e rta 3200 training book Page 9 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Impact Hammers Averaging e Averaging a number of measurements together will improve the quality of the measurement e 4to 20 averages should be sufficient e Ifthe measurement does not improve by increasing the num ber of averages something is wrong Exponential Windowing e Exponential windowing prevents spectral leakage e Leakage causes measurement errors particularly in lightly damped structures e The response signal is multiplied times the decaying expo nential curve window to insure that there is no amplitude at the end of the measurement e The exponential window is a time domain window e You do not always need to use an exponential window e Exponential windows introduce artificial damping to the FRF s If you are concerned with damping values you ll need to correct for this e rta 3200 traini
260. ll Wide LOGO TYPE List SPL EB ca 38 r E tat aie Gan Wee ccc OR M Edq uu EXF HEHT T DL 1 E Dual LIHEHE ZAHz zbk Hz RESET 16 FEE 38 23 47 33 rar RE NN NO e E AA c EE Vide R oie do TE E Ge d z FILTER 14 Ze H Hz L Auto SrEectrum D 1 d 24 3 39 1 BD S nac l TACH 4 46 SPEED B d 250 Hz 636 Hz zH BEHz NL Le crear DUUE UZ user SETUPS EDIT eject 6 optional Press the LOGO B key to create a user defined logo that will be printed as a heading on top of each printout from the analyzer The default logo is Larsone Davis Evi 22140175 screen table all video TYFE List SPL B piana at Ru X D LL M LL III LL LII EXPOHENTIAL 18 Dual LIHEHR 2BHz zBkHz RESET 16 FEE 398 23147133 rar PII TI FILTER 14 Q Hz Leo Huta SrEectrum D 1 d 24 3 B 39 1 BD arrarena liat l TACH H B SPEED B B 5 8 Hz 531 Hz z6 BEAZ dotted crear DUUE US User SETUPS EDIT eject init 7 Press one of the following keys to print a desired data record Prints the display presently on the LCD screen of the analyzer Prints the data presently on the display in a tabular form Prints both the data presently on the LCD screen and a data table representing the data being displayed Prints the data table to the screen instead of a printer e rta 3200 training book Page 3 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL video E Prints a black and white printout of the displ
261. lowing 1 Press KEY A D or KEY B E key 12 B 42 41 66 A2BHBED KEV A KEY BJ Beerer RESI amp IHT INPUT M SPL E Bee 114 LL E EXPOHENTIAL 175 FEEHMP LINEAR 26 2HkHz RESET 19 OCT 4 82946985 aj cT UTEM FILTER 40 18 AkHz L 3 Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d4 i B 05 4 LM D FHOHS 2 4 mE I TACH 9 9 SPEED B B 25 6 Hz Sab Hz IBn BkHz dotted crar ABCD RS 232 SHA BAA 12788 24508 jag 2699 15288 The message PRESS THEN THE KEY will appear on the upper right side of the display 2 Press the minus hardkey e rta 3200 training book Page 12 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 3 Press the softkey or hardkey to be assigned to Key A or Key RESET amp B Typically the R S hardkey is assigned to Key A and the R S STORE STORE hardkey is assigned to Key B Beeper Control 1 Press the Beeper F key V 19 OCT 62 41 66 37HRRC KEY H KEY B Beerer RES1 IHT IHFLUT HM OGT mange eac Ma Le SPL E Bee 114 S qb xz ORE Nae ES aa SROV ce O A Sep ce ahha UE AR hs Ses 180 EO EXPOHENTIAL 175 FEEHMP LINEAR ZA ZHEHZ RESET 19 OCT 34 82940985 aA A A A A ae es om A AR RA A Bee E FILTER 40 1H Bl Hz L 3 Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d4 i B 505 4 WEE ehh hh hh rok e n on n e n o np e n n n n FHOHS 2 4 EE ed TACH B A SPEED H H 25 8 Hz BAe Hz 1 QL HZ dotted crar ABCD RS 232 JE BA 1788 2468 4504 9608 15288 2 Press one of the following keys to
262. lta The endstore is the amount of time that is allocated for the total reverberation time measure ment 3 to 4 seconds is usually more than sufficient for most rooms 10 Press endstore D D 28 FEB 13 35 43 OFF baT IME delta endstor note A BABA TH E BO V a i dL amici a Sal NRT ER UR N R IR La Rn ae TN LINEAR EEFEHT A A HSH bTIME 1 LINEAR 26Hz 16kHz ESET 28 FEE 98 13 31 27 54 NR NE o N A A FILTEF Hld 275 48 Hz a4 Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 8 23 8 AB a des um mcs ELE Geet des ge ae RD a RC UR USC ES dd ko ee UY dE TEL dn ed ae DeL dev es E R 0 k R 9 BIFF Fhz 2 1 5n dd REM gi TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 8 dotted crar ILES R z z z ROOMS ba4THCH TACHSET F TRIG 8 9 e rta 3200 training book Page 10 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 11 Type in 2 0 seconds as shown below 26 FEB 13 37 58 ELE puo oa DASS SSS END 1 2 000092 909 k IRT TH hut vas vue Gus Sutin ODE E cas UTR ovav A Ger oa uet Say Gait CRM O ain O ae TE R LER yeh S LIHEHFE FEFEAT A ASA Dual bTIME LIHEHE ZEHz 18EHz RESET 246 FEE 38 13 31 27 JA r EEUU E ETE TET TIS A e R FILTER 14 75 4 Hz 54 1 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d i B 23 4 SH r Viris A ME s he Sa E TE pies US O GD DLE Wa aq Ger I A IERI UOI TR DIM ot DEINER OE DIFF Fh 2 1 n dd PEN a l TACH Ha SPEED Bg d dotted crar ROOMS 12 Press EXIT to enter this endstore time
263. menu will only be active for 6 seconds it will then return to the menu prior to pressing the Shift key 23 PER 28 14 55 AH LS YARDS M SCALE U OFSET H SCALE H OF SET SYS IMFO 1 2258 HEMT IAL 1 3 LINEAR 2BHz zBkHz 25 FEB 95 28 13 29 ER 14 25 8 Hz LS Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL 43 2 A 31 7 Ph 83 2 Sns 28 85 8 8 SPEED 4 6 datted crar SameREF SetEEF Ls REF 3 1 e rta 3200 training book Page 2 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 2 Press the SetREF O key to assign the displayed spectrum as the reference o 28114133 ATAXRIS V HAIS U SCHLE U OFSET H SCHLE H OFSET SYSIMFO SPL 1 225 BR r MAA EXPOHENTIAL e Dual LIHEHR 26Hz 2HkHz STOP 23 FEB 98 28 13 29 rer crx SE P V FILTEF 14 zh Q Hz L 3 1 Channel 1 ie Z T 58g ko x X o X xw w A s n n n K s s ann n BIFF P 53 z n TH 5 REM E TACH H B SPEED B B H Hz Bak Hz A kHz atted crar DUUE UZ McSTOP McWAIT McREFT McSTHET SameREK SetRE usREF The spectrum will be placed to zero across all frequency bands and the vsRef indicator will appear on the upper left side of the display 04 OCT 23 47 48 NORMAL Le MIN MAK SRL DISPLAY note DETECTR Hate TEST 1 SPL 7 7259 5 LANE K A O RE A O A RR zi dm ere 1 zB i D LIHEHRE ZAHz zbk Hz RESET 64 OCT 94 23 23 47 O A HT FILTER 1 SH Hz L Channel 1 of z du Me r d FHOHS 98 4 TACH 8 4 SPEED B a i
264. mer technique the measure ment needs to begin at or before the exact moment of the hammer blow Consequently the analyzer needs to be set up to trigger from channel one on the positive slope of the time domain impulse You also need to establish a delay or pre trigger on channel one so that the entire impulse is cap tured 29 Press EXIT twice to return to the MAIN menu 30 Press T TRIG M from the DISPLAY menu x es zB 47 14 A ZFECT C SPECT A FER COHER TIME DISPLAY note DETECTE LEF ag PEUT I COUNT MANUAL ACCEPT La EAR 1Hz 16kHz RESET Hr JAN 38 20 46 83 ro TENA FREE He Eb Hz ESHH 1 Auto SrEectrum D 1 d B B B 23 4 B KKR ks qs kra R O i A e V C oe Be Rr e RR Sap jm ONT II ra IE SEU ob RATE QD A ds E E Baze Fre3usenmncuaz Ae AE REM TACH BH SPEED B B z a dotted crar HLTEEH BORN Fa gt R SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 10 23 e rta 3200 training book Page 24 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 10 24 31 Next select a trigger level as a percentage of full range by pressing LEVEL M ui 25 d05 dB A 3FE T TIME note LEF ET wor NM e dy Sen tee P Do N owe ur OE ur tote sco Sieh 26 AP Rea UE jw R WR weckt o We Du e ETUDES ouk GRO A eA D dy vuol MANUAL ACCEPT al HE 1Hz 16kHz RESET Hr JAN 93 295 d75 29 ro EE zi V v ln Z ne A NR EET FREQ He HRORRHS ESRH Auto Srectrum d 11 3 E B PTT RA RR AR A OA A Rd ee B
265. microphone input Connect the remote control cable 15 pin connector to the I O port on the right side of the 3200 Next insert the appropriate spacer between the phase matched microphones 13 mm or 50 mm In general the 13 mm spacer is the appropriate choice for most measurement applications In the case where one is interested in low frequency data the 50 mm spacer should be used Acoustic Intensity measurements can be done in full octave bands 1 3 octave bands or narrowband FFT Since most inten 11 12 e rta 3200 training book Page 13 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL SCREEN SYSTEM sity surveys are performed in 1 3rd octave bands we will setup the 3200 RTA accordingly 1 Press SYSTEM to enter the main menu of the 3200 Select FILTER G to enter the filter menu P 15 57 42 Chanls STHHDED CROSS IHTEHSY UNITS CLASS SPL B em 148 ERA A a Sante fae E i A A A TR 87 61 i nhs ad HD 9 4 EXPOMENTIAL 1 8 Dual LINEAR ZBHz zBkHz RESET 12 JAH 38 13 55 53 asi KOV ds Qu ite adhe z l AMEN NE TE E FILTER 24 z756 Hz L 3 g L 1 POR a BA osito VUA Rut HAD Wa aci n DIFF Ph 62 8 Sn 7 88 men a TACH A SPEED B El a z z z dotted crar IHITIAL I O 5SIG GEN INPUT clock COLOR MLS FILES RESETS Then choose 1 3oct B to activate the 1 3 octave band digital filters Press short G to select the short filter su 10157127 110 30
266. nas eee Ter Cee ee a E ee ee E PHOWS 72 3 aa en TACH B H SPEED H H 25 5 Hz sae Hz 18 BkHz noise B A ABCD A WGT C WGT LIHEHFE Fat JJdtdt bacHHHL AUKIO PUSH T Press EXIT to return to the SYSTEM menu Next we need to establish a detector type and averaging EXIT time to simulate the slow or fast detector response time of a sound level meter Press EXIT again to enter the STANDARD feature menu 9 Within this menu Press DETECTR H to enter the detector setup menu zd FEE 14 85 53 Chanls STHHDED CROSS IHMTEMSY UNITS FILTER CLASS 55 crass p SPL 9 9090 TERA A AA E o EXPOHEHT IAL 1 3 Input 1 A WEIGHT RESET 24 FEB 38 14 64 46 CMT A e PL T I FILTER 27 Seq Hz 583 Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 58 2 H 77 TH MD Ee Mab Sux cae fac wah fan fey A cue Sot ae ancy cis RS Ve ow DIFF Ph H6T n TACH B B8 SPEED B a REM SH CC CC TT E EN HA Hz Bad Hz H bk Hz H DC outrut ROOMS I 0 IG BEM INPUT clock COLOR MLS FILES RESETS 10 Press EXP C to enable the exponential detector C 24 PEE 14 08 65 LIH LIM E EXP ETZEXF ET LIH HL TIME SPL EB BEBA 118 EXF NEHTIAL 1 3 InFut 1 A WEIGHT RESET 24 FEE 983 14 64 46 ai FILTER 27 599 Hz E Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 5H A vy r DIFF Phz MiaT Sns SER TACH BH SPEED B B dotted crar ROOMS 11 Next we need to establish the exponential detector averag X ing time or rate Press AV TIME H to enter the detector aver H aging time menu
267. nation of the airborne sound trans mission parameters by pressing either ASTM I or ISO J For this exercise use the American Standard ASTM I 30 Now you have a choice of looking at Noise Reduction NR Q A Normalized Noise Reduction NNR B Transmission A Loss TL C and Field Transmission Loss FTL D Now assuming the RT60 table is full of RT60 values taken in the receiving room all the pieces are in place Impact Sound Isolation Impact sound isolation is a measure of sound generated in a room resulting from repeated impacts is Footsteps on the floor of the room above In practice a standardized tapping machine is utilized as a source of impacts on the floor above and the resulting sound pressure level produced in the room below is measured in 1 3 octave frequency bands 8 34 e rta 3200 training book Page 35 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Resultant measurement choices are found at the bottom of the screen in either the ASTM or ISO menus These include Ln ASTM and Un and UnT ISO Noise Ratings Noise Criterion NC A A single number technique for representing the character of steady indoor background noise is based on the 1957 Noise Cri teria Curves These are a set of similar octave band reference curves which are overlaid graphically upon an octave frequency spectrum measured in the room to represent the background noise B
268. ne or all of the ten registers 0 9 you may store them as a set of Macros as a file to the memory of the analyzer 1 To do this press the STORE hardkey STORE The message Store Macros Data XX will appear on the upper right side of the display This indicates that the Macros have been stored as a file to the memory of the analyzer and have been assigned a record number xx 23 as 15 66 13 Chanls SLM H STHHDED CROSS SPL T HH SR A Devas ta do Gane te Ze VK Cay mamans sui Met Gee vacuo cds cui cor cien Gee Pd ya SP a gt Ve o CEN le CROSSES dore LIHEHE SIHGLE c EE Dual LIHEHE ZAHz zbk Hz STOP 23 FEB 98 1715713 TAI d A hu OA A A AL R FEEL Ae E ARRAH H4HH F Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 67 7 B 82 1 TACH BH SPEED B A 51G GEN INPUT dotted crar COLOR MLS FILES RESETS I o e rta 3200 training book Page 1 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM C HAPTER Printing The analyzer can print any displayed data directly to an Epson compatible Canon BubbleJet or Hewlett Packard LaserJet printer equipped with graphics capability and a Centronics par allel interface Before printing you will want to make certain that the desired spectrum has been recalled from memory or is currently dis played on the analyzer 1 Connect the printer to the printer port on the right side of the analyzer e a 2 Press the PRINT hardkey PRINT 3 Press
269. nerator provides swept sine with tracking filter and feedback level control dual frequency swept sine and a pulse generator in addition to the pink and white noise provided by the OPT 10 Noise Generator Also there is an autolevel feature for use with the pink noise to assist in equalizing the noise level in a test room 1 Press the SIG GEN J key from the System menu i e 16 88 17 Chanls STHHDRED CROSS INTEWSY UNITS FILTER CLASS SPL B BREE atr E p dip penu EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 Dual LIHEHRE 2H8Hz zBkHz RESET 19 FEE 38 16 65 48 TH sR ARR See ab es iocans EGE BAS N RR RRR wim vs Me Se IRR dn Sh gc a Se OE E OC UE 8 EL Ge A FILTER 14 z5 H z L 3 Channel 1 of Z NORMAL d z3 H H 34 3 54 cL O O A EE O xc BIFF Fhz 02 5 Sn 7 45 REM THCH BH SPEED A F pr nett A Ek Hz datted crar SIG GEH JIHFLUT clock COLOR MLS FILES RESETS e rta 3200 training book Page 15 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 2 Select the desired spectral content by pressing one of the fol lowing keys e ER WSS ql 34 DN OFF HSRUH OFF RUH lt HTT gt HTT SPL EB BEBA LBB P eee EXPONENTIAL 1 8 Dual LIHEHE 2BHz 26k Hz RESET 26 FEE 93 H3 36 51 NOOO FILTER 14 25 8 Hz L 3 1 i a 1 01 5 HORTA r UU DIFF Ph 65 9 n2 6 85 REI l TACH H H SPEED Bg d doatted crar ELAY SINE I Swept sine generator z5 H8 IHITIHL PINK J Equal energy content per per
270. ng book Page 10 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Li d 11153126 A SPECT E SPECT KPEE COHR TIME PISFLAV rote ETE TR ES HD EAF HIH H No Exponential Window a MERE TIRE DA Bad KEPA jp REL o Bate Freajercy o TACH El d SPEED B Gb S A dedi crap T TEIG EETLIF FILES HLITLETPE 31 38H 21liccig H SPECT C SPECT A FER GUHER TIME DISPLAY mote DETECTR Ll uer VW ei Ia UT ga DUHT_SIHGLE 4 IL TT cj Dim srn Exponential Window a7 O ptr Freausernc4 i n m n X on NO G m 9 1 3 3 2 3 3 A 2 m m a m m TRCH d d SPEED d d de Beda 200K 637 6675 EH dobted crar SHEHEHH ALTER EMMORF Pio FLIHE T TRID SETUP FILES AUTOSTR l om E PEE I o Sd PORER An celis ae ean gi et aa o Can tac Exponential Window applied dEl p 98 ETT E a 0 3 Bo 03 93 3 9 3 3 3 03 3 3 o 0 o o s 9 o o 3 s o 3 3 1 Base Frea usrnc4 THH 4 0 SPEE 40 Boda Oke 637 675 EA sdotted crar SERIE AF ALTER ENHORN Pick FLIAS T TRID SETUP FILES HUT ULSTER 10 10 Shaker Excitation e rta 3200 training book Page 11 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Leakage Why We Use Windows 11 SEP 11 53 28 H SPELT C SPECT FER COHER TIME DISPLAY note DETECTR lz E E DM ULM EMT A EIE REAL
271. note S TEST 1 1 7 7 777 dE el d BE rcc r2 LIHEHE STHGLE va HA Dual HEBR 2BHz iBkHz T AZ AUG 94 16 48 5 2ig ar gg FILTER 14 25 8 Hz _Lo3 PO 1 d 13 0 19 34 aa Bam AL LI LI T PR VY A 33 A 31 Ld JOB TEST LOC PART TOP a 25 4 Hz gum Hz kHz Z A dotted crar HITEST S J0B 55PHRT S AREA ED CitF4 Cz Fd z F3 FZ Now the name of the last part that you created measured will appear at the top corner of the display next to the job name 13 JON 01 32 58 Power F2 P I F3 HPP F4 FHU note S gt TEST D UTTYUTS Eh B iria SH yl A A O sae SB SRI Eie i Rc QI Ecc EID C CC ee LIHEHFE SING za AR al LINEAR zeHz iBkHz RESET 13 JAM 38 01 3 18 FILTER 25 315 Hz L 3 BB Pout d 13 15 44 144 BEIM SH E can de da AA EE V 34 64 Hz AZ 54 dEFl i JOB_ TE REM PART FRONT at 2210007012011 a 117 OA 11 17 0 AREA POIHTi1 25 8 Hz Sea Hz 16 8kHz A dotted_crsr RITEST S J B SPART SAREA SEDIT Ci F4 2 Dz F4 2 F3 FZ 20 Press Power A to perform the sound power summation 13 Sart 1 35 61 Gover F2 F I F3 HPF F FHI note SPTEST FR MT g On cn Lia dE F Kr A RN A K a N Z AED A e LAER SIHGLE zu Dual LINEAR 2093 10kHz RESET 13 JAN 98 81 34 23 18 FILTER 25 315 Hz L 3 BB PR T 45 13 61 d 18 44 209 HABER SH ic it ECCE RERO OE EE du desc det apros 34 64 Hz Az o dEFl DB TE REM PART FRONT a IEEE 2020140273117 27277 7107070072011 II AFEA F OIHTi
272. o EXPOHENT IAL e Bm F dotted crsr UIEi dE ell SPL G under undet undef Under Under e rta 3200 training book Page 10 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 5 Press the up or down arrow on the keypad to optimize the A V range One way to do this is to range down one increment at A v a time until an overload is reached Then range up one or two increments 21 Heu 03 19 49 SLOFE Name SAME R UMI TS Hoise F ml cal U cal level G 51 3668 5H Ee O A ac ee cad ce Dee A A AO EXPOHEHTIAL 1 78 InFut 1 LIHEHE 1Hz 16kHz I E pU 21 MAR 94 85 13 54 lan JEE Jaha FREG BB BRBAHz HERA Channel 1 af 1 HORMAL d 4 9 Z F PRE a s M D A IPO Sn OA O PK n NA LOC TACH H H SPEED EA 5 dotted crear WIE Under undet unde Under 6 Notice the prominent signal at the calibration frequency RESET 81 25 Hz After the signal has stabilized press R S to stop R S the measurement 21 dg 929 165 2 SLOPE name SAME k UHITS Hoize F ml cal U cal level 3 9268 EXPONENTIAL 148 Inrut 1 LIHEHEF 1Hz 1 kHz RUH 21 MAR 94 99 165 27 n ENERO Ek ace O R REESE a A E R Je See Sed R ET FEEL AA BHARAH HS8HH S Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL l d 43 7 1 3 TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 4 s s dotted crar UIBEi dE l SFL Ej under Under undet unde Under 7 Move the active cursor to the calibrator frequency 81 25 Hz by pressing the horizontal arrow key
273. o one of two things 10 13 e rta 3200 training book Page 14 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL impactata single point and move the accelerometer fixed excitation fixthe accelerometer at one point and move the hammer fixed response e Fixed response is preferred e Once you select a method fixed response or fixed excitation you must adhere to it e The reference point is determined by performing a driving point survey Test Setup The Driving Point Survey e Driving point measurements are Frequency Response Func tions in which the force impulse hammer and the resulting response accelerometer have been measured at the same location and axis e The driving point survey is used to find the reference point te that excites all of the modes of interest te e Used to avoid the mistake of performing an entire modal test with the reference point on a nodal line LZ re l 59 42 ALSPECT C SPECT amp FEFE COHER TIME DISPLAY note DETECTE MAG Hate DRIVING POINT GS LEF Ba Lb Eo ok bo ooo oSHexm eee COUNT SIHGLE 4 PREHMP LIHEBR 1 3 kHz RESET H2 JAN SA 4 56 14 A Sc FREG AA AAAAHT ESAA Transfer Function Hi Z d 8 58 MAGHITUBE Base Freauenca TACH BH SPEED 5 Ms dotted ALIAS B cram ALTERM BWHORM X P lt E TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 12 ZEP 18 88 22 A SPECT C SPECT amp FEFE COHER TIM
274. of adding High Pass and Low Pass analog filters to the Spectrum to cutoff any unwanted fre quencies without limiting the bandwidth of the instrument 1 Press the INPUT K key from the System menu it 41 58 43 HChanls STAH E CROSS INTEHNSY UNITS FILTER CLASS K Hobe SPL B BEBE 138 Tl LL ML Bg EXF HEHT HL 175 DIRECT LINEAR ZB 2BkHz SET 19 OCT 94 41 58 10 118 DA SA ee ab tva E weed TE ood oio d dci FILTER 14 25 4 Hz L4 Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL gl A 3 7 AA PHOHS 88 5 EE TACH d d SPEED A F z z 5 56 H BDG Hz 15 QC HZ dotted crar ABCD I HOISE IHFUT clock COLOR SETLIF FILES RESETS 2 22 e rta 3200 training book Page 23 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL EXIT A WGT I C WGT J Linear K jdt L f dtdt M 2 Select one of the following analog filters al B2 5H8 355 DIRECT PREAMP AUTO FA Hi LoHz SPL B mana 11H RRR NR K KN KK NR NR NR KN R e RN R E A Aa TEE EAF HEHTIHBHL 1 5 PREAMP LINEAR 28 28kHz RESE 19 OCT 94 B2 4B B5 a NS X RN RR RN A AAN U TI FILTER 44 18 AE Hz Leo Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d a 55 4 rn Bcc TIENE FHOHS 72 3 LOC TACH H a SPEED B n noise B El AUKIO A Weighting C weighting Linear with selectble highpass and lowpass filters Single time integration Double time integration 3 To select the high pass and low pass filters press the Hi Lo Hz
275. oint in space e Sound Intensity multiplied times the area over a measured surface yields sound power Advantages of Acoustic Intensity Does not require a special test space can be done in situ e Measurements not affected by steady ambient noise e Easy conversion to Sound Power e Can be used to locate sound sources e Provides a means to rank sound sources e rta 3200 training book Page 3 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Acoustic Intensity measurement hardware e Microphone probe and a spectrum analyzer e Spectrum analyzer should make measurements in octave bands and or FFT e Spectrum Analyzer should make measurements in real time EEE 11 3 e rta 3200 training book Page 4 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Acoustic Intensity nuts amp bolts e Acoustic Intensity measurements require simultaneous mea surement of sound pressure and particle velocity i pev e The velocity is estimated by measuring a pressure gradient sound pressure difference between the two microphones v 1 p dp dr dt vp 1 p Pa pp dr dt p fluid density dp dr Pp P a r direction e Time Domain e Pressure estimated by averaging the two microphone pres sure p pa pb 2 e Intensity Pa Pb 2fAr J pa pb dt e
276. op in sound pressure per doubling of distance Reverberant field the area away from the sound source where reflections from walls and other objects can be just as strong as the sound you are trying to characterize Basic Acoustics 4 7 e rta 3200 training book Page 8 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL OPERATOR POSITION a DINI E m SZ LED S C REN ZC AE The operator should be passtionied at least 1 meter behind the microphone The operators body should be lo the side of ihe microphone Body reflection causas low frequency errors These errores accur below 500 Hz and can be as large as 6 dB Use A tripod if possibile Basic Acousiics SOUND LEVEL METER Features measures sound pressure level SPL weighted and unweighted SPL rms weighted and unweighted peak fast slow impulse response typically overall SPL some provide octave 1 1 1 3 SPL s Limitations SPL is a scalar quantity provides no information on direction of sound SPL dependent on measurement environment Basic Acoustics 4 8 e rta 3200 training book Page 9 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL L WEIGHTING NETWORKS o 4n Qo c5 R usoL25555560505o000000555552j24 Me v o ooBooooPo Po 44 Zhero ro 1 Basic Acoustics FAST RMS DETECTOR Basic
277. ophone is used in a free field microphone should be angled approximately 85 degrees to the sound source Otherwise the resultant measurement will be overestimated Basic Acoustics e rta 3200 training book Page 5 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL MICROPHONE RESPONSE Free field microphones compensate for self created disturbances in the sound field Random incidence microphones respond uniformly to sound regardless of the location of the sound source s dB Free field Random Incidence 1000 5000 Basic Acoustics CONDENSER MICROPHONE grid cap diaphragm air vent 3 electrode insulator back plate conductor Basic coustics 4 5 e rta 3200 training book Page 6 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL LD MICROPHONE TYPES Condenser microphones requires a polarization voltage Change in capacitance between diaphragm and charged backplate is proportional to change in sound pressure Prepolarized electret microphones requires no polarization voltage Uses a pre charged foil to detect change in capacitance which is proportional to a change in sound pressure s Piezoelectric microphones sound pressure causes a deflection in piezoelectric crystal This generates a charge proportional to sound pressure Dynamic microphones
278. ortion of the decay curve zA Es 15 34 37 RTEA REPLACE AVERAGE Huto RE Auto AL note Hate SFL AVERAGED A NR A aed peor FEFEHT A AS S588 We LINEAR 2B8Hz 18EHz RESET 28 FEB 38 15 17 55 DATA 232 Channel 1 of Z usTIME FU Td 1 1566 A E A as ee dee A TU T FTAH H 1 45 ct 1 1664 HutaTH Max 2 25 6 7 4 o H EAR Ev EA AA DE A o nao AP wc OM Ie te EA AAA A Lea 55 5 55 5 55 D B dam Z lm doatted crar ROOMS lthresh hthresh A Fren H HMext DATA SOLID DOTTED BOTH The RTA automatically computes the RT60 for values between the two cursors performing a linear regression curve fit The RT60 value for the 1 6 Hz 1 3 octave band is 0 195 seconds This is the time that it would take the room to absorb 60 dB of noise at the 1 6 kHz band z S 15 34 37 RTEA REPLACE AVERAGE Auto RE Auto AL note Hate i SPL AVERAGED TH A aU ats all cay Sap cur a oma age RC ay aa cb 18D day Cauky Vila CEL EC UE e TRU DU LIHEHFE FEFEAT BH bTIME Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz RESET 26 FEB 38 15 17 55 DATA 32 k T Zd de cone ci E NAP ZA DADO ee tae Sak Se JEU STO a Channel 1 of Z usTIME J S Td 1 1588 AB Od puc pc EE ES m SS POTRETE EST T FTAH Hd 1 45 ct 1 1004 Z FEM i A re doc O n ate Be geet ab ooo ae a L 55 2 55 48 B dam zm doatted crar ROOMS lthresh hthresh A Fren H Hext DHTH SOLID DOTTED BOTH There is a storage area in the RTA for archiving RT60 data It is called the RT60 register The RT60 table i
279. ostore measurement by pressing R S on the RTA At this point the RTA will start capturing spectra at a rate of 20 per second every 05 seconds After 1 second the noise genera tor will be shut off due to the way the noise generator is config 8 10 e rta 3200 training book Page 11 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL ured but the RTA will continue to capture spectra as the room absorbs the reflecting sound that remains from the now inac tive speaker amplifier This will continue for 1 second until the 2 second Autostore endstore is reached At that point the RTA will cease capturing spectra The end result is that you will have 40 spectra 20 per second for the 2 second measurement that will characterize the reverbera tion time of the room 16 Press SYSTEM to go to the System menu SCREEN SYSTEM Setting the Signal Generator Delay The next thing that you need to establish is the noise generator duration As mentioned for this test you would like the pink signal generator to automatically shut off 1 second after the Autostore measurement has begun 1 Press SIG GEN J to enter the Signal Generator menu J 19 FEB 16 88 17 Chanls STANDRD CROSS IHTENSY UNITS FILTER CLASS SPL B ABBA ad r E ier av va pie RA A v a A na A Zv cl den v aaa Ae v EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 Dual LINEAR 28Hz 2BkHz RESET 15 FEB 98 16 45 45 79 r R R RI a a fe RS N TRT A ams SD R
280. per end frequency limit via the numeric keypad where the sweep will end z FEE 49 61 45 Fztart Fend k Se R ez Lee Les lt ATT gt HTT HEB 09 01 08 Fstart Ferd Rise Res Lee SPL B em 140 r modi e CRURA TRO UN ID QE VS queas iE Ea al sy ie RS AS at TERN uS RUND zuo TORN UB Moda S QUE RE DES M A E EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 Dual LINEAR ZBHz zlBkHz RESET 26 FEE 98 A8 38 51 ag r Ao hie side A A O A de A A BA e GB EN N hie ie Mek ay te Sty TE FILTER 14 75 8 Hz s E bn l of oe NN DIFF Ph 65 9 Sn 6 85 REN i TACH H 4 SPEED AA 5 4 Hz E38 Hz zA DL HZ dotted crar IHITIHL as TAFRFT alEHD SHEEP LIH z tone Auto L FILTER D Press the EXIT hardkey EAM The rate of the sweep can be either logarithmic or lin ear in the frequency domain Whenever one of the parameters of the sine generator is changed E Press the softkey L to select between Log and Lin L ur 03 01 08 Fstart Fend R se k es Lse Les HATT gt ATT SPL B BREE 140 p o D AT ep ea an ae ge a a ee EXSF HEHT T DL 1 8 Dual LINEAR 26Hz 26k Hz RESET 26 FEE 98 08 36 51 asi r ECCE di S 4001707002211 amd icc RS R R R O ae A 6 FILTER 14 75 8 Hz s a ola 1 g z HORMAL d 34 46 3 5h A DL I LL BIFF Fhz A a n AS REM 8 SPEED 4 8 TACH 8 decida a ONE m L 25 5 Hz 536 Hz datted crar INITIAL al THET alEHD 2 tone Huto L FILTER Log Mode When the Log mode is selected the sweep rate decade second
281. quency range In this measurement it should be clear that we have achieved much greater detail of the of the data within this reduced frequency range Integration and Double Integration A common goal in the measurement of vibration is to extrapo late velocity or displacement values from accelerometer data e E SCREEN SYSTEM e rta 3200 training book Page 17 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL This can be done in the RTA by using the integration and double integration functions Let s first change our zoom factor back to 1 so that we can view the entire 0 Hz to 2 5 KHz baseband 1 Press 1 A from within the FFTZOOM window 32 6d G Z LIMEAR SIMGLE Z Input 1 LIHEHR 1Hz STOF i TACH B B SPEED B a doatted crar BHSE Hz Press SYSTEM to exit back to the main system menu Choose UNITST F to enter into the units menu B3 1 BB 25 51 Chanls SLM A STHHDRED CROSS rae are FILTER CLASS zB GER InFut 1 LIHEHE 1Hz 1BkHz FESET 83 JAH A8 0124132 FEL B m Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL z 115 H e Bra TACH 8 8 SPEED B a R EH solid crar IHITIHL 1 0 SIG G3EH INPUT clock COLOR MLS FILES RESETS The integration and differentiation functions are in the SLOPE window Press SLOPE A to enter this area az e dar 26 5 17 name SAME R LUHITS Hoise F ml cal U cal level n H Bad wc etree eee sti ir di ROS LIHEAF SINGLE 2B ABBA
282. r macro name 4 Begin entering the name of the macro If you make a mistake entering the text you can move the cursor with the left and right arrow keys then press the SPACE hardkey to erase the last character 5 Begin defining the macro by pressing the following keys DETECTR H LIN S A AV TIME H Enter 5 seconds for the detector time EXIT hardkey twice System hardkey Filter G 400line K EXIT hardkey SPACE hardkey R S hardkey 9 2 e E e rta 3200 training book Page 3 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 6 Press the minus key This will terminate the definition of nn There are four special Macro keys that can be found by pressing the SHIFT hardkey They are labeled McStop I McWait J McRept K McStart L These special Macro keys are typically used for special applications 23 FEB 19 47 03 118 SPL B BREE ad u O A o T EA ERXF HEHT HL 1 8 Dual LIHEHR 2BHz zBkHz RESET 23 FEB 98 19 33 12 TH nn ILL LIII FILTER 14 25 Q Hz L 1 Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 23 6 8 SH ponam op neho Se vn 1 she arit PST SE Z E es o A dicc DIFF Fh S78 n 7 435 l L TACH 8 8 SPEED B a dotted crar McSTUP McWwAIT McREPT McSTHET McStop I Will cause the macro processor to pause during its execution un til the analyzer is in the STOP state at which time the execution will contin
283. ration signals and dis play the data in calibrated velocity units 13 Press R S to gather velocity data from your vibrating struc ture RESET H S ga sa 642141 SLOFE name SAME R LUHITS Hoise F ml cal U cal level E H zB 2090 EAR SINGLE ZE 2690 ut 1 LIHEHEF 1Hz 18EHz F H i JAN 98 99 d15 1 2 E HE BBBBHAz HSHH hannel 1 of 1 HORMAL 46 5 E 34 9 TACH 6 8 SPEED B a HA AAA u solid crsr IHITIAL dB FU SPL G FT75 under under under Under 14 The last task that we need to accomplish is to save the vibra SCREEN tion measurement setup so that we can avoid having to SYSTEM N reconfigure the analyzer should we wish to make additional vibration measurements in the future Press SYSTEM and then SETUP N to enter the SETUP menu 7 20 e rta 3200 training book Page 21 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 15 From within the SETUP menu press name B so that we can assign a name or label to this setup k SETUP STORE B00T note ET zB mia LIHEHE SINGLE zB AHAH InFut 1 LINEAR 1Hz 18EHZ STOP a JAN S BaAr41 13 FREQ AG 206902 HERA Lh ORMAL amp z 4 TACH H H SPEED B d G i ted CER I Gi Gl E R un tl s solid crzr DEFAULT MODAL under under under under Under 16 Next press undef J This will select the K softkey within the SETUP menu as the key to which our vibration setup is stored E
284. rdkey to return to the Main Menu EXIT Special Measurements ROOMS I Room Acoustics vsRPM J Versus RPM measurements STAT K Statistics and Ln calculations Each of these measurements and keys will be discussed in detail later in the manual Triggering The analyzer has the capability to begin averaging automatically when a specific trigger criteria has been satisfied The analyzer can trigger in both the Freguency domain and the Time domain FFT mode only Freguency domain triggering 1 Press the F TRIG M key K M MENU MM WM ape eee WBRA SSU SPL 14 6650 TH EA TT EXPUHENT IAL 1 8 i Dual LIMEHR 26Hz 26k Hz STOF AS OCT 34 15 25 56 JB ee O FILTER H 1 SH Hz Leo i Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL l d 16 E 56 5 ad nabo O ua aa A FH HS 63 4 oat O ee OO OOV V vv TRCH g j a SPEED g a INITIAL ROOMS GsRPM STAT Mx Spec FL TRIG SETUP FILES AUTOSTR 1 12 e E e rta 3200 training book Page 13 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL The word TRIG will appear on the left side of the display This indicates that the trigger function is activated This type of triggering can be used with either Octave filtering or FFT B3 det 15 26 57 S H Hz z INITIAL SLOPE SL FE 2 29 saa Hz 1820 8 5 14 6658 PEL EMI 1 8 ua LIHEBR 2BHz 2zBkHz STOP AS OCT 94 15125156 FILTER 4 1
285. red records to be applied in the Block Maximum function 10 Press the EXIT hardkey 1 35 e rta 3200 training book Page 36 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL In the third line down on the right hand side of the display the word MAXIMA will appear indicating that this autostored record is a maximum record So d1 33 3E6 W Fall B AWE B MAX E 5UH 1sTIME KEEP Hate SFL MAXIMA EXFONEHT IHL Dual LINEAR 2BHz zBkHz STOP 24 FEE 98 26 10 14 FILTER 14 25 8 Hz L 3 E 1 D RE r DIFF Ph 72 9 Sn 9 82 TACH d d SPEED B a x z z recall data DUUE UZ DELETE H Freu A Nest 11 Press the EXIT hardkey if you are finished viewing the EXIT recalled data to return from the Recall Menu 95 OCT 0 00 43 W Fall E HUE vsTIME KEEP Hate TEST 1 i SPL AVERAGED an ge E aby ier S od wana A a ME dE TEN SINON AAA EN EXPONENTIAL bT IME Dual LINEAR 28Hz 2BkHz i RESET 4 OCT 94 08 53 55 TA E det nuuc iocus weit densas door an Pret dev A teak Jat satin ED ms D Ip c LE FILTER 77 KAR Hz Les Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d A 46 5 BE MM LLL p Ree ara PHONS 133 3 l TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 hrec all data H Freu H Hext recall To turn off the Autostore function press the OFF A key in the AUTOSTOR menu The byTIME message on the left side of the display will go away UR Briq OFF boTINE delta endstor note I SPL B ABBA an ala sont A aa EXPONENTIAL 18 bTIM
286. rent that the 500 to 3000 RPM t span that you used to acquire the vsTACH data you ll need to modify the X SPAN To do this press X SPAN D to enter the x axis scaling entry field 16 eth 14 486 38 SLOFE alevel THGBHES 3FAH VIDEO pH LS note WIDTH SOURCE IS TACH IHPUT 117 7588 ERPUHEHT IAL 1 64 Input 1 LIHEBR 1Hz 1B8kHz STOP 15 OCT 94 22 21 58 PEH LEUEL C FREQUENCY k Hl 56 7 1 12 506 Z B2 59 6 1 27 AEE 3 Bi 49 8 1 Jr 990 4 Bd 38 28 1 JE Bac 3 B 27 3 1 62 JEN 6 B 35 7 1 77 BEA BEE SEBE RPM BDG crsr Bi DCHOTOF STATUS HIDE TACHSET B ORDER REDRAW PEH CHAHHEL FRED Type in 00500 03000 into the LOW HIGH entry field 16 OCT 14 47 85 n E OM EXFOHNEHTIHL 1 64 InFut 1 LIHEHE 1Hz 1HkHz STOP 15 CT 94 22 21 38 FEH LEUEL C FREQUENCY b Al 56 7 1 12 588 2 BHz2 59 6 1 275 AAA 3 Bi 49 8 1 EE 4 Ad 38 28 1 556 092 B 9 27 3 1 62 EE 6 DG 35 0 1 75 AG FFM THE CRS 1 Bd DCMOTOR The vsRPM graphics display has some interesting features First notice that the display is currently viewing 6 different frequencies from the accelerometer as they changed in amplitude during theDC motor run up The frequencies that are currently displayed are shown on the right of the display Notice also that each of the 6 traces are labeled accordingly on the left side of the display 16 SET 14 45 06 SLOFE alevel TAGEARS A 3FAH VIDEU pH LS note WIDTH SOURCE IS TACH kt G 17 7888 ERPUHEHT IAL 1
287. ressing the numerical PEN key associated with the 75 Hz frequency In this case it would be PEN 06 Press the numerical hardkey 6 to activate PEN 06 16 NEU NC alevel TAGBARS A 5PAM VIDEO ASIS note WIDTH l E SOURCE IS TACH INPUT nr TREE A mM Em EN eg bTACH R a aiga Input 1 LINEAR 1Hz 16kHz AA STOP 15 OCT 94 22 21 58 AAN YO RANTS CL Na Ww 2 02 24 2 l 25 BAG BH A AA MO E 3 AS 6 1 1 Ar 00A d Bd 3 7 1 8 mad LOC gt Ba 13 8 1 52 300 24 AA bl n n n nnn 5 H 12 4 1 T5 AAA 388 3006_ RPM 2762 crsr oq DCMOTOR STATUS HIDE TACHSET B RDER REDRAW PENH CHANNEL FREH Then press FREQ P to enable the frequency modification mode 16 Bail 19 43 32 SL FE alevel TAGERES s SFHM VIDEO ARIS note WIDTH 4 1514213 C FREQUENCY carnea A en Dn cw Dn Den G Cau c ut za ms ra d men IT n Ba DCHOTOR STATUS HIDE TACHSET B ORDER REDRAW FEH e rta 3200 training book Page 19 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 7 Next press the right arrow key until the PEN 06 frequency has changed to 200 Hz 16 Sel 19 34 21 SLOFE alevel TAGBARS 3FAH WIDEO pH LS note WIDTH 8 8268 TIAL Ed LIHEHR 1Hz 16kHz l OCT 94 15 42 36 WEL C FREQUENCY e T 1 12 500 9 6 1 25 888 2 8 1 ore 300 4 3 1 29 mad res 1 62 300 Ja 1 268 mad SHE x freauencu CHAHNEL FREH 16 EL 15 44 21 SLOPE level THGEHRS SPHH UIDEO X HXI2 note WIDTH M
288. rzrz ALTERH EXIHDPEH x SE TJP FILES ALUTOSTFR e rta 3200 training book Page 8 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Impact Hammers Double Hits e Double hits occur when the hammer strikes the test item twice e Double hits render the measurement useless e Double hits are difficult to avoid at measurement points on the test item that exhibit a lot of motion at resonance e Impact testing is easy but does require practice and tech nique Pulling the hammer back or letting it recoil naturally after impact helps 11 SEP 11 54 54 A ZFECT C SPECT x FEFE COHER TIME DISPLAY nate DETECTE REAL Hote DOUBLE HIT l LEF al Bie Jud IA E TT H A EIER COUNT SINGLE 4 DIRECT LIHEAR 1 3 2kHz RESET 11 SEP 32 11 14 38 s TIME AA ABaBms ESAA lieiohted Time D i d 5 57r E 33 REAL B n O 3 UG8 O O O EO EO nunnu EO BO EO Go 983 B3 39 G3 Z EO 93 939 Z Z EO Z Z o3 G3 Goa z Z Base Frealeri g LOG z TACH d d SPEED B B BE AAA ZUOM 1 Ta 6577 Z H kdotted crear HISC HLTERH BuWwHORM Pc gt R ALIAS T TEIG SETLIF FILES AUTOSTE 11 S 11 45 13 H SFECT C SFECT amp FEF COHER TIME DISPLAY note DETECTE Hotel DOUBLE HIT LEF B1 COUNT SINGLE 4 DIRECT LIHEHE 1 3 2kHz RESET 11 SEP 92 11 14 35 FREQ nA ABBBHz ESAA Auto S5rectrum D 1 s 47 1 a Base Freauencu TACH 8 8 SPEED 4 6 S so
289. s You can accelerate the movement of the cursor by holding SHIFT and pressing the desired arrow key at the same time zl MAR 45 21 42 m G 2r 5290 EXPONENTIAL 1 8 Inrut 1 LINEAR 1Hz 1 kHz RUH 21 MAR 94 995 295 32 81 258m Hz HSAA Channel 1 af 1 HORMAL d 2 2 Z 2 4 TACH 8 8 SPEED o dc B TH SOLID COT 8 Atthis point we should take advantage of the RTA s hori U zontal expansion feature This will expand the display so E that the calibration signal can be viewed in more detail Press SHIFT and then H SCALE E to activate this feature H OF SET FFTZ00M 14 APR 15 56 55 AXIS YARIS U SCHLE U OFZET a 19 2868 EXPONENTIAL 1 8 Ineut 1 LIHEHE 1Hz 1 kHz STUP 14 APE 34 15 54 16 x FA 9690 Z HSHH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 33 2 B 73 6 TACH d d SPEED B a dotted crar SameREF SetREF us REF 7 10 e rta 3200 training book Page 11 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 9 Within the H SCALE menu you have a number of choices S for the scale multiplier Choose 4 C to select the 4 times mul C tiplier 14 APR 16 61 34 1 z S 29 SL Horizontal Scale G 5 4508 EXPOHEHTIAL i Ineut 1 LIHEBR 1Hz 1B8kHz STOP 14 iE s 15 53 TACH 6 8 SPEED 4 4 dotted crsr The display is now expanded by a factor of 4 Since we plan to enter the calibrator level 1 0 gs in linear units we need to change the vert
290. s a convenient place to store RT60 values for each of the frequencies Press RT60 B to view the RT60 register REPLACE AVERAGE Auto RE Auto Al note zH a 15 34137 Hate SPL WERAGED TH Wo cles Yd dah a fa wa yas ear eral Ae bg aw Bel ale pe dan TTT e Aah uta dar be a Mr nao tsar sar ep fel ale pee te LORS 65 He LIHEHFE FEFEAT H H HA bTIME Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz RESET 26 FEE 33 15 17 55 SH AP PEE A A A Te tn NTM ATA EX 1 b k Hz 54 Channel 1 of 2 usTIME 27 2 Td 155 Ab Stamey EG E Ca San LE sae du SEDE SEPA SEAT IN CORTO VEA IS O ON e dle FTAH A 135 ct 1 10064 HutaTH Max 2 25 8 FEM IS EA RNR AA A T NE Ley 5 5 5 5 5 4 B dam z HERE dotted crar ROOMS lthresh hthresh A Preu H Hext DATA SOLID DOTTED BOTH 8 17 e rta 3200 training book Page 18 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL EXIT 8 18 In order to store data in the RT60 register you must first clear out any old RT60 data that may already reside there 8 Press RESET D to clear the RT60 register Bn 16 46 76 EESE Auto RE Auto HU note ETER Hote SPL WERAGED 5 PN A OA a A AE LIHEHFE FEFEHT H H DG bT IME InFut 1 LINEAR ZEBHz z kHz RESET 658 OCT 94 15 82 54 DECENT CEDE E E A R A E EE ETA TAN at z 75 4 HA Hz L ET amp H DATA ET amp RH 1 66 AWG 61 HutaTH Max 2 25 8 a A L TACH SPEED both crers H Hz GAD Hz ROOMS lthresh
291. s name with a flashing cursor will appear on the display Push SHIFT CLEAR to clear old name dz H 34 9 SH PS HER cl s ILL TEE BIFF Fh 2 5 Sz 7 45 ae Crece l g TACH 6 0 SPEEDS 5 6 25 0 He o e K Adotted crsr IHITIRL I J K L H H P Enter the new desired Unit name M SEC by using the alpha characters appearing on the display Typical names for Units are g m sec ft sec or psi Paige Diane a P sele E a i at won oom on m on p m A 3 AONO Ro aom om a n om 3 O3 23 o3 no m s m m on mo o3 9 o3 onm og snm n n ERXF HEHT HL 168 se Dual LINEAR zBHz zBkHz RESET 19 FEE 38 16 13 15 TH a J z p ee AV o at eo 4 FILTER 14 75 4 Hz L Channel 1 of Z HORMAL dz A 34 9 SH Po i A LX D IL E BIFF Fh S78 n 7 435 SEP sia a E a o r ee TETTE E l g TACH 6 0 SPEEDS HH 25 0 He O 680W ZU 19 Adotted crsr IHITIRL I J K L H H F Press the EXIT hardkey The new name M SEC will appear on the softkey previously selected 19 FEE 16 18 57 SLOPE name SAME R UHITS Hoise F ml cal U cal level SPL 9 9090 GIS EE u E o oj aes HERE EE EXPOHENTIAL 18 Dual LINEAR zBHz z akHz RESET 19 FEE 38 16 18 05 TH EE eo a geass Sele EEE eR GR PECs LE FILTER 14 75 8 Hz L MELLE 1 ue a r B Pe DIFF Ph 52 28 Sn 2 4z Ten SEP a TRCH 8 g SPEED g g ZE z dotted cran INITIAL dB FU undef undef undef unde Press the newly named unit key M SEC The new name will appear on the upper right side of the display
292. s the RESETS P key 19 EB 61 58 43 Chanls A STRHDRD ERUSS IHMTEHS UHIT5 FILTER CLASS l Hote SPL B AGRE 134 EAR REER HORE aod oe SRT o ue Nas r soos HS eel EAF HEHTIHBHL 14 8 DIRECT LIHEAR 26 26kHz ET 19 OCT 94 81 28 18 114 FOR 3 88 ORON O3 8 29 3 9 3 2 3 ro s m mono 3 9 5 3 NN 3 9 5 ON 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 n n on FILTER 14 z25 H Hz Fa Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 41 A 73 A FPHOHS 825 5 L TACH A A SPEED a a Zl us ee eee ee C CERE ELE E 25 8 Hz PDD Hz In BkHz sdotteder ABCD 1 0 HOISE IHFUT clock COLOR SETUP FILES 2 Press one of the following keys to perform the desired reset B AB A aed oS cp s aa opens aires acu see E POHEHTIAL 1 8 Dual LIHEHE 26Hz ZBk Hz RESET 24 FEE 38 13 52 13 hee ah t eee eee ka Rk dd ee eee ee FILTER 27 Saag Hz 5 2 eo z 1 OIM riu rcc aa b od b d a b DIFF Ph 28 3 Sn 16 48 SED l TACH H H SPEED Bg d DC outrut ROOMS R MEMRY A This will perform a reset of the internal RAM of the instrument and clear out all stored data and all user defined setups bringing the unit to a default state R UNITS B This will perform a reset of the user defined Units only R SETUP C This will perform a reset of the user defined Setups only 2 26 e E e rta 3200 training book Page 27 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL R RT60 D This will perform a reset of the RT60 data only R USER
293. s the Shift CLEAR hardkeys to delete any entered text For this example enter the name NOISE by pressing the alpha characters appearing on the display as gei 16 12 28 H E C D E F a H Enter zetur name HOISE __ ah E o A e Pe EXPOHWEWT IAL 1 8 i Dual LIHEHR ZAHrx zbk Hz i RESET 64 OCT 94 16 65 24 B zoe seu uem ded IS liu en qus Tel qe ce Ue Ut d Awad Care del qe Ee qu MO T NS DU NE ay dp depu e e FILTER H 1 NE Hz Leo Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d s A 34 7 at as TEETH PHOHS a 5 l TACH 8 8 SPEED H H l offset B F M M e rta 3200 training book Page 17 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Press the EXIT key after entering the new name The new name you entered will appear on the softkey that you previ EXIT ously selected See figure below HS t 15 43 59 name R SETUP STORE gt BOOT nate SPL 14 5504 TH E a od de xw Ae UR SO Smee Gee E A ads GP cae ce aR ae a LP Ge pede uh GP Aca Te e ne GELT C EXPONENTIAL A Dual LIHEHR 2HHz ZB WkHz i STOP AS OCT 94 15 38 42 5A vows ces a N apN o6 909 9 Gp As 9 xcv a x ew eov T FILTER H 1 ER Hz Leo Channel 1 of Z HORMAL i g x B 66 2 zn PM A PHOM 62 3 LOC al TACH d d SPEEb B a z obl b Hz A Ak Hz dotted crsr INITIAL DEFRULTCRUTSE gt under unde undef under undef undef 4 Press the STORE E key to store the present setup to one of U the named softkeys
294. sferring disk files to analyzer memory 1 26 transferring to a disk 1 24 Filters FFT 2 7 Fractional Octave 2 5 Octave 2 5 I I O Communications 2 10 I O port control 2 11 INTENSITY 2 2 L Leq 1 4 Linear Scale 3 3 Ln and Statistics Calculations 9 1 Logarithmic Scale 3 3 M Main Menu 1 4 Max 1 4 Max Spec 1 4 Min 1 4 Modal Analysis definition of 10 1 setting up the Model 2900B 10 16 Modes of operation 2 1 Multi display 1 6 Noise Generator Option 10 2 13 Normal 1 4 Note 1 9 O Order Tracking 12 1 R Reference Spectrum defining 3 1 Resets 2 26 Room Acoustics airborne sound transmission loss Index 1 e rta 3200 training book Page 2 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM measurements 8 27 impact sound isolation 8 34 Noise Ratings 8 35 NC 8 35 NR 8 36 RC 8 36 sound decay measurements 8 2 sound transmission loss measurements 8 21 S Scale linear 3 3 logarithmic 3 3 SEL 1 4 setup analyzer 1 2 Setups storage and recall 1 15 Signal Generator Option 11 2 14 Statistics and Ln Calculations 9 1 T Triggering 1 12 Ge frequency domain 1 12 Waterfall autostore 1 31 Z Zoom changing vertical and horizontal 3 4 Zwicker Zw Diff 1 8 Zw Free 1 8 Index 2 Model 3200 Training Manual 3 2 98 e E PostScript error nostringval nostringval
295. t x 6 644 Bia REM S i b Hz E SH Hz Se B z dotted crar ROOMS lthresh hthresh Auto TH SOLID DOTTED edit You have finished the RT60 portion of this exercise At this point the data could be sent to a printer which would yield a graph like that on the display The printout would also include a table that lists the RT60 values for all of the 1 3 octave band frequen cies between 400 Hz and 5 kHz 19 Press STORE to archive the RT60 register 28 FER 16 04 32 R RT amp B Auto RE Auto AU note STORE RT G Hotes SPL AVERAGED 15 son ee ee we A O SN o e sns LIHEHFE FEFEAT A ASA TIME Dual LINEAR 28Hz iBkHz RESET 28 FEE 98 15 17 55 12 O lt lt el lt lt n nnn af 75 4 5 Ell Hz 54 RT amp 8 DATA r RT 8 8 226 KAUG gi bk o O o G A Be DG atted crar ex dot SOLID DOTTED edit Hee RSA msama p H Hz lthresh hthresh Auto TH Sound Transmission Loss Measurements Sound Transmission Loss measurements and Sound Transmis sion Class or STC measurements are commonly used to evalu ate the acoustical effectiveness of walls partitions doors etc for isolating noise between adjoining rooms This is typically accomplished by placing a speaker in one of the rooms produc ing noise in that room and making the measurement in the adjoining room Three measurements need to be made to accom plish this type of measurement A 1 3 octave band sound pres sure measurement in the source room a
296. t outputs an analog pulse TTL train that is pro portional to the rate of rotation of the test device For this test you will use an optical pickup in conjunction with the Larson Davis Model T100 tachometer to detect one pulse per revolution of the dc motor byTACH Autostore Measurements The first method that you will use to acquire variable RPM data is the Autostore byTach feature This method is very similar to the Autostore byTime function The key difference that instead of gathering spectra over a time duration at a specified time interval you will capture spectra over a range of RPM values at a predetermined RPM delta 12 1 e rta 3200 training book Page 2 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL For this test you will capture spectra from the dc motor plate as it runs up in speed between 500 RPM and 3000 RPM at 20 RPM increments using autostore The end result will be a set of frequency spectra starting at 500 RPM with roughly 20 RPM increments between them 500 520 540 The last spectrum acquired will be at 3000 RPM Setting up the 3200 Measurement Parameters 1 Connect the output of the tachometer to the TACH INPUT of OFF the Model 3200 Attach the accelerometer either via a 950B or ON AD012 adaptor to the Channel 1 input Press ON to boot up the 3200 3 Press STAND1 B to enable a single channel measurement 2 Press SYSTEM to get to the main Sys
297. tem menu SCREEN SYSTEM eh wo domom mos S EUR RR we A e Le a RR RNK KN N EXPONENTIAL 18 ual LINEAR 2BHz 2BkHz RESET 15 OCT 94 16 13 59 de Kc AR R BAS dn V R ieee RR di RRR u LIS OU c ie N RR des Finde Codo Be db den ad Dino a iet RRR oa AKU RRP R FILTER Fld 75 48 Hz L 3 ESL l of 2 NORMAL OOTD FHONS 53 6 LOC AA TRCH g a SPEED g a k Ja Hz A kHz dotted crar IHITIRL Ivo HOISE IHPUT clock COLOR SETUP FILES RESETS 4 For this exercise you will use FFT filters and analyze the W data in a range of 0 to 5 KHz frequency baseband Press FIL G TER G to enter the filter menu is DET 16 49 19 sw STANO 1 STAND 2 Cms INTENSY UNITS cas SPL B ABBA eh r DID rx EXPONENTIAL 18 Ineut 1 LIHEBR 2B8Hz 2B8kHz RESET 15 OCT 94 16 47 82 4B amp UE um UA DAD SS eo TR R RR see ew LUN LRR E GP ae es aR eS Scene ok A UR LUE ee ee ee A FILTER 14 75 48 Hz LA Channel 1 of 1 NORMAL d A 34 9 I PHOWS 55 3 Loc TACH 6 6 SPEED B amp HH GAW Hz A ek Hz dotted crsr IHITIHL HOISE IHFUT clock COLOR SETUP FILES RESETS e rta 3200 training book Page 3 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 5 You will use a 400 line FFT for this test Press 400line K to establish this frequency resolution choice 15 S6 16 53 56 1lrloct 9 143act lona short l L B aaa AH r a a a le R RT a AR ARE E A K A A a EXPOH
298. ter EE 16 38 18 1 loct 1 3oct lona short reverse SPL 13 6688 118 x ox wo x wow ow wow x ae A e oom o o oom oon oom wa moon a ERXF HEHT HL 1 E Dual LIHEHR 2EBHz zBkHz STOP FEE 98 18 37 43 ELE DIUI ona sy IR a ne he AAN kt ney evn 5 FILTER 14 zh Q Hz 5 5 1 v Channel 1 Z borde r xc A oorr KRK O BIFF Ph 142 B n TS HE REM TACH 4 4 SPEED B B SF a meme re nnn e rm rn rn ron n nm nr n n NS Hz ae 134 IHITIHL 18Hline 2801 ine 4481 ine sa l ine FFTZOOM WIHDOW BASEL Ed The reverse time short filter is used for measuring short RT It re duces residual time of the filter by a factor of 10 It allows mea surements of RT at 200 Hz down to about 20 ms EE 16 38 18 1 loct 1 3oct INITIAL Hz 1Baline 2001 ine 4maline saline FFTz DM THD BASE Bd lona short reverse SPL 13 6668 EXPONENTIAL 1 3 Dual LIHEHE Zk amp BHz zBkHz STOP 15 FEE 98 16 37 49 FILTER 414 25 8 Hz 3 Channel 1 S z s nne r d DIFF Ph iB82 8 Sn 78 86 TACH B B8 SPEED B a ae 138 3 Press the EXIT hardkey to return to the System Menu For FFT Analysis perform the followin g There are three parameters which must be defined to perform an FFT analysis the number of lines the window type and the full scale frequency 1 Press one of the following keys to select the FFT analysis mode and the number of lines Note H4AA designation when 400 lines is selected 100 line FFT 200 line FFT 4
299. th I O communi cations or change the input filters There are three basic modes of operation of the analyzer To select the desired mode press one of the following keys IHTEHSY UNITS FILTER CLASS Hate SFL B mama 134 A T Ee EAF HEHTIHBHL 175 DIRECT LINEAR 28 28EkHz RESET 19 OCT 94 81 58 18 114 Quel A a A a De obe FILTER 14 25 8 Hz L Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d Ser SA PRI a A Eu S No Pi A ea PHOWS 8388 5 LOC TACH B H SPEED B n 5 56 H haa Hz 15 QC HZ dotted crar ABCD I HOISE IHFUT clock COLOR SETUP FILES RESETS This key permits you to select the number of input channels to be used for measurements You may select up to the number of in put channels with which your analyzer is configured with A ABA A wwe mode o Ue o SS im cam a eA ee roam a Ser RAR set mole a UD E UE De Enter of Channels 2 138 a oue mmox Gee Rd E e E E E A mox m a AUR e E bce dem x b Eu EXF HEHT HL 18 DIRECT LINEAR Z8H zbBl Hz 13 OCT 34 61 58 16 118 S a 4E Vaca a A A a vec R cR Jal ERES malla od AR VEO MEL e cR JR ODE WE UE Et TRI DES Rer UR FILTER 14 25 4 Hz a Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL 81 3 Yi DA M PHOWS 22 5 LOC TACH d d SPEED H H Bie S VO L L 25 69 Hz BAe Hz I5 QC HZ dotted crsr ABCD This key places the analyzer in a standard operation mode where spectral data are measured for each of the different input chan nels but no cross channel parameters are measured 2 1
300. the TYPE G key to select the type of printer being W used The analyzer has a list of printer drivers ranging from G Epson compatibles to HP Laserjet printers 16 BB 25 48 95 acrem tabe al u video Leo List SPL B aaga a A E DX a IR A E ERXF HEHT HL 18 Dual LINEAR ZzBHz zBakHz RESET 16 FEE 93 23 47 33 rar I FILTER 14 25 Hz L 1 Huta Spectrum D d 24 3 B 39 1 SH E u E ERER AA E R TE ZR fo cea a ena dd REM TACH 8 4 SPEED 4 6 c l l zo H Hz 531 Hz zB BEHz dotted crsr DODFLIS user SETUPS EDIT eject init 6 1 e rta 3200 training book Page 2 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 6 2 EXIT TI lt screen A table B all C List H 4 Highlight the desired printer driver and press the EXIT hard key i 263x264 mm dote TEST 1 L 2HSR264 mm i 158x243 mm A RPOMENT IAL l4 i 129p Zd 3 mm ARE AMP haath z0 aa M 21d utu SET A AILTER 414 25 8 Le Channel 1 of z HORMEL Cannon BJ Diconix 1 al 1 i ARE AA dei 243x264 mm AHONS 63 1 di 2 26 1 mm LOC HP LaserJe dri 263x261 mm ACH 8 8 SPEED a d NWP LaserJe dei 263x261 mm printer IMITIAL FAST 5 Press the init O to initialize the printer If the printer was hooked up to the analyzer when it booted up the initializa tion is performed as part of the boot up procedure Evi 22140177 screen table a
301. top right side of the display type in 0004 0006 This tells the 3200 that you want to average the 3 receiving room spectra 72166 11 15 54 HUERHGE Hag rr p SER T SA HAMA HEAR 28Hz 28kHz a5 10 1910 y m Channel 1 of z NORMAL DIFF TES aas a nz Dr de SM TACH H H SPEED Bg d z hrec all dataFRoons e rta 3200 training book Page 31 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL EXIT STORE H CLEAR RECALL EXIT 15 Press EXIT to initiate the averaging calculation The new spectrum that appears in the display is the average of the 3 receiving room spectra 23 PER 11 17 12 W Fall B AWE B MAK E SUM KEEP Fd 642 seta el eee RR EU S C bci EE VBiBEEIEUE L ERE a F IHEHE SINGLE POTE ual LIHEBR 2BHz 26k Hz ESET 23 FEE 95 18 22 38 ILTER 14 25 80 Hz Lea Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL d 45 2 A a DIFF Ph 84 8 5n 22 35 TACH 8 8 SPEED B a hrec all data H 5 TAT REM 2o E z ROOMS DELETE 16 Press STORE to save the averaged receiving room spectra into the ROOMS file Notice that it is stored as Normal 8 ll FA11 E ALF R Ha RE I Ih KFFF 2355 11 17 55 M F ee as DOC STORE Hormal a 1 MOLE a K L SPL UERBGED LINEAR SINGLE 2B BA ual LIHEAR 26H7 26kHz RESET 23 FEB 95 18 22 38 FIL 14 75 0 Hz Led aa 1 E HORHMAL DIFF Ph 84 8 Sn 22 35 TACH 6 0 SPEED AGA recall data REM
302. tored 15 D 22126156 OFF bsTIME delta endstor nate E B piana ZE TIL DELTITUTITI VULTIS EXF HEHT T DL 1 64 bTACH Input 1 LIHEHE 1Hz 18kHz RESET 15 OCT 94 22 17 18 4B 2021030101017 0120011322127 21 1111252110117 201211010171 13111131 71711 FEEL A s ARRAH H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 95 2 z 71 8 l TACH 8 8 SPEED B A dotted crar F TRIG FILES You are now ready to make byTACH autostore measurements Performing the byTACH Autostore Measurement Verify that the output of the tachometer is connected to the TACH INPUT jack of the Model 3200 Also check that the accel erometer is connected either via a 950B or AD045 adaptor to the Channel 1 input Make sure that your tachometer is turned on and is reading an accurate tach signal from the rotating test article that is below the trigger speed 500 RPM 12 13 e rta 3200 training book Page 14 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 1 Press R S to initiate the measurement Notice that the FFT RESET from the accelerometer is being displayed on the 3200 screen R S Also notice that the trigger is ARMED and waiting Note the current RPM reading from the tachometer is displayed on the lower right side of the display 15 OCT 22 21 43 OFF ESTIME delta endstor mN e G 25484 EXPONENT I HL 1 64 InFut 1 LIHEHEF 1Hz 1i kHz RUH 15 T 94 22 21 33 i ma ARBBHz HAHA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d
303. ual LIMEHR 26Hz 16kHz STOP 12 JAH 398 26 42 61 FILTER 24 z258 Hz Le Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 114 8 A D DIFF Fh 161 6 Sns 72 66 TACH B B8 SPEED B a x z i i z S Lond crese IHITIHL 1 0 5I6 GEN INPUT clock COLOR MLS CFItes SRESETS 11 19 e rta 3200 training book Page 20 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL EXIT 11 20 EXIT EXIT 2 Next press create A 12 JAN 21 06 03 Create RECORDS sod sk Sara Memory Used dB Disk Used bike A Memoria Free 290 3 2 Disk Free ISK DATE TIME SIZE MEMORY 7 delete rename men delete rename 3 Using the alpha keys above and below the display create a file name such as AITEST 12 JAN 21 09 09 A E D E F G Memoria Used LIE Disk Used Hemor Free PER GE Disk Free Enter new name DATE TIME HANE CATE TIME MEMORY F 4 Then press EXIT to enter the file name Press EXIT again Notice the file name appears at the lower left corner of the display This indicates that this is the active measurement file All of our acoustic intensity data records will be stored e in this file 5 Select INTENSY E to activate the Acoustic Intensity analy sis measurement option Led 21 18 19 HChanls STANDED CROSS UNITS FILTER CLASS SFL 7 3800 rr DP EXPOHEHTIBL 15 Dual LINEAR 2B8Hz 1BkHz STOP 12 JAN A5 21 05 30 ai A cce ce DO RA A RA Abeta MCI FI
304. ue McWait J Used to provide a wait state during the execution of a macro McRept K Used to generate a repeat of the macro When this is used the macro will continue to be repeated until the analyzer is stopped manually by pressing the SPACE hardkey McStart L Sets the analyzer up with a time and date for the macro to start Executing Macros To execute a defined Macro the analyzer must be in the menu where the Macro was initially defined i e Main Menu System Menu The error message Macro Menu Mismatch will appear if the analyzer is not in the menu where the menu was initially defined 1 Press the MACRO hardkey to enter the Macro field SPACE MACRO 9 3 e rta 3200 training book Page 4 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL The message MACRO Select 0 9 or Create STO Store will appear on the upper right side of the display we 19 2 23 03 44 CREATE ag 20 B 1 amp FEB 98 20 43 TB FILTER 31 1 25kHz Lr TRIG y channel 1 of 2 H RMAL r Sa FREE Ph 66 4 5nz 6 28 REM TACH 8 8 SPEED AGA S z z dotted crear PODFUS F E gt 9 2 Pressa letter I P where the Macro was stored For this example press the letter K key The Macro that was assigned to key 1 in the previous step Defining Macros will immediately be executed upon pressing the numeric key Storing Macros After defining a marco to o
305. undef key if K is already assigned to K another label 15 OCT 19 34 13 ice eus E TURNUM gay e ee eee arin etude urea t pde PUSH UNITS TO HAHE SPL B did Bh a Mod Jm Rl RR o dl LOR Re Ge O GEL OW Val vie OE URL S EXF HEHT HL 1 8 InFut 1 LIHEHE 28Hz 26kHz RESET 15 OCT 94 19 34 83 4 Dlan d e a ae Ae AE CENE AA A AE NA que o Wa ee AA A YES fes lee We FREQ Ae BARAH H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 15 3 2 Loc TACH 8 8 SPEED B A Fil Cm Z 00mM 1 DDD mid kdotted crar INITIAL ander undef under undef under 14 Type in G G as the units name W 15 OCT 19 35 25 A E C D E F Cs H G 56 R RE d l OOL RT aa R L R a ca ate JRD C he ac Sk db dno R at 7 O IEA ER EE O R Su R Bi Entes e nan 4 SPL 68669 eh A GaP sap Ceti TRU E QE Ge A O O ARA A s Mes yatta Kul Me ak Meck c EXF HEHT HL 18 Ineut 1 LINEAR 28Hz 26kHz FESET 15 OCT 94 19 34 03 dB A ak ie Sa cl a AE A FEEL He BARRAHAZ H4HH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 15 3 2 Loc l TACH H H SPEED B d FA 0000 JZ 00H T SARA Bd dotted crar IHITIHL I J E L MH H F 15 Press EXIT to enter this new label 15 ct 19 36 89 SLOPE name SAME k UHITS Hoise F ml cal U cal level 16 Now select this new unit key to activate it Press G K Lt SPL B did eh S HR R cw deb dE des Se a du det Ja DCUM DIO S OEC de um cw Lowe T Dude Das EIUS DES N den eC o Voie a s o E EXPONENTIAL 18 Inrut 1 LIHEHE 28Hz 26kHz RESET 15 OC
306. ust the output level start to end and end to start o 03 01 08 Fstart Fend R se Fes Lse Les HATT gt ATT 1 SPL B BREE 148 m IQQ C DL DRILL p o LI EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 Dual LIHEHR 26Hz 26k Hz La RESET 26 FEB 93 AH 36 51 ai a S fessos du aduer iunt avena dtes cue FILTER 14 75 8 Hz Leo Channel 1 of Z HORMAL sa CL BIFF Ph 65 9 Sn 6 B85 FEM i 4 SPEED B d T TACH 8 z5 H Hz 6360 Hz ZH QL HZ dotted crar INITIAL AIS TART alEHD SHEEP LIH Z Lone Huto L FILTER G Press START I or OEND J to assign the sweep to begin at the pre selected start frequency or end frequency mal EE 03 01 08 Fstart Fend R se Fes Lse Les lt ATT gt ATT SPL B BREE 140 A cM lll s EXF HEHT T DL 1 8 Dual LIMEAR 2H8Hz zB kHz RESET 26 FEE 98 AH 36 51 ai uL I IX IX XL IR EIL NELLE FILTER 14 75 8 Hz Leo Zana 1 it pores NN DIFF Ph 65 9 Sm 6 85 L TACH B B SPEED B a dotted crar z tone Huto L FILTER K ur 63 01 08 Fstart Fend R se Fes Lse Les HATT gt ATT SPL B piana 148 DELLI I IR Ko o Pon TL EL A Ge neat p a EXF HEHT HL 1 8 Dual LIHEHRE 2H8Hz zBkHz RESET 2H FEB 398 AH 36 51 ai SKI M LM LL IL EM BO FILTER 14 75 8 Hz Lera Channel 1 of Z NORMAL d 34 4 H 3 Al Z EZ v tn O EE I OE BIFF Fhz 65 A n 6 85 REM ge L THCH BH SPEED B B zn z z z datted crar INITIAL AIS TART alEHD LIH Z Lone Huto L FILTER 2 17 e rta 3200 training
307. va VERE EE ab RS NA vin cay C VE ee VE Te ca Es vt NERO Gas va Ta a ant sar VE an MITES NES de FILTEF Hld 25 6 Hz Leo 1 MEL ca 1 p PORTAL GA L DIFF Ph 65 9 n2 6 85 REM n l TACH d d SPEED Ae 5 8 Hz Boa Hz zH HBEHz dotted crar ROOMS SINE PIH WHITE PULSE DELAY The noise generator will deliver a pink noise signal to the speaker amplifier system 4 Press R S Adjust the channel one input gain of the RTA RESET such that the signal is optimized without creating an over R S load condition The best way to do this is to press the down arrow hard key until and overload occurs el 5 T NE DIA d I A uM SPL 3 1688 EXSPOHENTIAL 1 2 Dual LINEAR 26Hz 16kHz STOP 26 FEE 99 12 27 25 FILTER 14 25 0 Hz 583 dcr anne 1 ES PORTAL r DIFF Ph 83 1 5n 30 20 REM TACH 8 8 SPEED 48 4 H Hz 524 Hz B Hz dotted crear ROOMS SIHE FIKK WHITE DELAY e 5 Range up by pressing the up arrow hard key until the over e A load indicator disappears A m pge 12529011 IN AN EE cam oam SPL 4 7358 EXPOHENTIAL 1 8 Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz STOP zd FEB 98 12 22 34 FILTER 14 25 8 Hz 583 Channel 1 Z HORMAL d a a DIFF Fh 59 8 Sns 38 683 FEM TACH H H SPEED B d H Hz Eod Hz E El dotted crar ROOMS SIHE FIHK WHITE FULSE ELAY You may also need to adjust the output level of the ampli fier speaker in order to insure that all of the frequencies of interest are being excited equally The spectrum displayed on the RTA should be
308. ve the cursor to i a center frequency about which you would like to apply the M zoom For the example move the cursor to 1650 Hz Then press FFTZOOM M xdi snc M LIMEN LE LL d i G zA BBE 14 a LIHEHOE SIHGLE zB mg neut 1 LINEAR lHz l kHz TAH 9 AH 56 Bv wA A A EA 153 DH HSHH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL Br Z 14 TACH d d SPEED B 8 datted crar 4 Notice that you have a number of zoom multiplier options S from which to choose Select 4 C for this example C G3 JAN 60 16 12 1 2 g 16 z2 64 20 BABE LE LINEAR SIMGLE zA iai Input 1 LIHMEHRE 1Hz 18kHz STOP B 93 WIS 117 32 FREQ 1656 AGBBHAz HERA Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL d 49 1 14 1 TACH B B8 SPEED B a doatted crar BHSE Hz 5 Note that the frequency span has changed It is now 1337 5 RESET Hz to 1962 5 Hz All of our 800 lines of frequency resolution Ge R S will be applied to this 625 Hz span Press R S to begin another measurement After 20 seconds the measurement will be complete B at 155 NA gt 1 z 4 Z l ae ad I G zA BBE 14 Wiss ko SAU AA J n t I AR NR RE Tent DR O LIHEHE SINGLE zB mg i InFut 1 LIHEAR 1Hz 1 kHz i STOP a JAN 98 995 225 BD 34 o DM O de a Xp a A AA ee OA AA o Mo Uh wo NE AE A A A lo Z 9 FRE 1656 AEHAHZ HSHH Channel 1 of 1 HORMAL i a 18 1 EE O MER o ee i e o e o o o o o o e k PP BE TACH H H SPEED Bg d 133v 4 HE dot ted crar IHITIHL z296 BHSE Hz new fre
309. y 11 Press the EXIT hardkey to return to the Main Menu EXIT 1 3 e rta 3200 training book Page 4 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Main Menu Selecting a display parameter 1 Press one of the following keys to select the desired display parameters B3 dot 15 62 63 HORMAL Lea DISPLAY note DETECTE SPL 1 7458 iil ecu ed a eile soon ute oan a EXPOHEHT IAL 1 8 Dual LINEAR 2B8Hz zBkHz STOP AS OCT 94 14133165 54 L l ai M zm ONE E un de wv TRES s FILTER H 1 ZH Hz Leo Channel 1 of 2 MAXIMUM i 8 A 56 5 zn Z PHOWS 54 1 DOE ii TACH BH SPEED EA ob b Hz 1 ik H dotted crsr INITIAL ROOMS uzRPM STHT TEIG SETUP FILES HUT STE Normal A Displays the averaged spectrum according to the parameters se lected in the Detector H menu Leq B Displays a spectrum that represents the steady level which inte grated over a period of time would produce the same energy as the actual signal The period of time is the actual run time of the analyzer Min C Displays the minimum level measured for each filter band since the last reset Max D Displays the maximum level measured for each filter band since the last reset SEL E Sound Exposure Level is similar to the Leg except the signal is the equivalent energy if it occurred over a 1 second time period Max Spec L This display type should not be
310. ys You can measure them one at a time using the analyzer in the STANDRD single channel mode or measure them simulta neously using STANDRD dual channel mode of the 3200 For simplicity lets measure one channel at a time 8 23 e rta 3200 training book Page 24 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 9 Put the analyzer in single channel mode by using the STAN DRD C key and Chanls A key PO 19 FEE 16 88 17 Chanls STAH E CROSS INTENSY UNITS FILTER CLASS TEP 19906617 AChanis TRE L EB BEBA 9H ANA AAA O EE EXPOHENTIAL 148 al LIHEBRE zBHz z kHz RESET 19 FEB 98 16 85 48 TA r E H a dalo z R d ewes R RT de Za R TIE a ee TE ei de vl sl O N FILTER Hld 25 8 Hz Les Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL Z A 34 3 54 A A A A Bek A TA e ROGA RR AAA a RO e E BIFF Fhz 7 5 5n 7 45 REI TACH 6 4 SPEED B d S H Hz 6360 Hz ZH QL HZ x doatted crar IHITIHL 1 0 516 BEN IHFLUT clock COLOR MLS FILES RESETS 10 Set the averaging type and time by first pressing the EXIT hardkey and then select DETECTR H 23 FEB 16 63 44 WORMAL Lea MIH HAs SEL DISPLAY note DETECTRE SE amran NORMAL Les NN a SEL SPL 9 0092 148 I A EVA ut EXF HEHT HL 1 8 Dual LIHEHRE 2bHz 2Z6k Hz RESET 23 FEB 38 69 56 54 SH r wc POTENT ESO EE MEET DIOECESI Wie 251 SAL UN E 0 8 FILTER 14 75 8 Hz Leo a ao 1 ence Hm r NN DIFF Pz 65 9 Sn 6 85 REM lt TACH H G SPEED B
311. ys and horizontal arrow keys to enter the range of record numbers of the autostored records to be summed together Press the EXIT hard key In the third line down on the right hand side of the display the word SUMMED will appear indicating that this autostored record is a summed record cs 6 48 57 W Fall B AWE B MA B SUM vsTINE KEEF Hote SPL SUMMED EXPONENTIAL Dual LIHEHE ZzkHz zEkHz STOP zd FEE 98 26 16 16 FILTER 14 25 6 Hz L Z M Channel 1 sa z 5 r DIFF Ph 3 7 Sns 18 35 TACH d d SPEED B B H Hz EH Hz x recall data DUUE UZ DELETE H Freu A Next Press the B MAX C key to apply the Block Maximum func tion z ice 151541870 U Fall BE HUE B MA B SUM vsTINE KEEF Hote SPL 5 Ed ati EXPONENTIAL 1 8 bTIME Dual LIHEHE ZAHz zHikHz STOP zd FEB 98 18 44 85 ra FILTER 27 BDG Hz Lx Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 23 39 H 467 9 54 DIFF Ph 74 1 Sns 16 65 imi TACH 6 4 SPEED B d x z z s recall data DUUE UZ DELETE H Freu A Mest The message MAXIMUM 0001 0002 will appear on the upper right side of the display 25 FEE 88 50 46 Last M 118 90 1 8 bTIME LIMEAR 26Hz 29k Hz STOF zd FEB 98 28 11 18 TH a RE E ZO kt za E ino FILTER 14 75 8 Hz L Channel 1 of Z HORMAL d 3 3 H 55 5 DIFF Phs 3 7 Sns 18 35 TACH 6 6 SPEED B B recall data poogru lt Press the numeric keys and horizontal arrow keys to enter the range of record numbers of the autosto
312. yzer capable of making cross channel measurements a calibrated impact hammer and an accelerometer Integral to the impact hammer is a load cell The load cell measures the force of the hammer blow used to excite the test structure The accelerometer is used to measure the resulting response acceleration of the structure These two signals are measured simultaneously and a transfer function is calculated between channel one and channel two Following are the steps used to configure the Model 3200 for measuring trans fer functions Setting up the Model 3200 First verify that the impact hammer signal is connected to chan nel one of your Larsone Davis Model 3200 and that the acceler ometer signal is connected to channel two 10 16 e rta 3200 training book Page 17 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL 1 Turn on the Model 3200 analyzer After the analyzer has com T pleted its bootup procedure enter the System Menu by press D ing SYSTEM Next press CROSS D 7 gp unes neis Sms meer us rim cues B BBBB 39H a v ae R A E RRR SR ae SEE jv RR RT ET a aa AA EXPOHENTIAL 148 Wal LIHEHR 26Hz 26k Hz RESET Br JAH 9S 81 32 28 DE if aaa A AAA FILTER 14 25 8 Hz Les Channel 1 of 2 HORMAL 75 8 H 34 9 54 EUR A A RE PNE O E A A O A BIFF Fhz 7 5 5n 7 45 REM a A ace ea x TRCH g d SPEED g a 25 4 Hz 626 Hz ZE DLE HZ dotted crar IMITIAL LD SIG GEH INP
313. z i brec all data ROOMS DELETE H Freu H Hext 8 15 e rta 3200 training book Page 16 Monday March 2 1998 11 00 AM 3200 TRAINING MANUAL Viewing the RT60 Reverberation Time Values CURSOR T D N 8 16 1 Press CURSOR to activate the horizontal cursor Then move the left or right arrow hard key to the 1 6 kHz frequency band z FEE 15 89 49 U Fall B A E E MAK E SUM wsTIME KEEF Hate SPL BEBE LINEAR FEPEAT 56 Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz STOP zd FEB 98 FILTER 2 446 Hz 53 r channel 1 s Z HORMAL E A DIFF Fh 98 8 Sns 32 16 TACH 8 8 SPEED B a S z Bak Hz E hrec all data ROOMS DELETE H Freu A Hex 2 To display the 1 6 KHz band decay curve press vsTIME E z FEE 15 49 43 Fall E AWE E MAK B SUM fus T LI KEEF SE EE Hate SPL AAA ri LINEAR FEPEAT B 6564 bTIME N Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz STOP zd FEB 98 13 86 67 FILTER 276 dug Hz 53 Channel 1 ic HORMAL d A DIFF Fh 98 8 Sns 32 16 REM TACH B B8 SPEED B a H Hz Bak Hz k hrec all data ROOMS DELETE H Freu H Hext In order to view the actual values of the RT60 for the decay curve both the solid and dotted cursors are used 3 First press SOLID N to activate the solid line cursor z LEE 15 32 05 ETEB FEFLH E AVERAGE Auto RE Auto HU note Hate SPL EFHGED LINEAR FEPEAT B m Dual LIHEHE 26Hz 16kHz RESET 26 FEB 32 15 17 55 DATA 32 1 66kHz 5 3 Chann

Table of Contents

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents